Subscribe to the Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal Subscribe Now!

Simple efforts to keep accountants ‘simple’

Article

Traditional perception about an accountant in business
parlance is something like spectacles on tired eyes, wearing white colored dhoti
and kurta, book of accounts traditionally known as Bahikhatas (red cloth-bounded
books) in hands. In traditional business houses and economy, Accountants were
regarded as the most authenticated and powerful persons of the organisation.
These traditional accountants, popularly known as ‘Muneem’ now seem to be the
saga of old era. However, there is not much change in the perception for an
accountant in an organisation. Even today, an accountant is perceived as a
person with minimum mental flexibility with risk-averse attitude. They are less
exposed to outside world, leading to deficiency in behavioural skill.


Peter Drucker was of the opinion in 1990 that accounting is
the most exciting and innovative working in Management today. But after 18 years
of this statement, accounting reporting mechanism has reached a state of
saturation and become stagnant. Nothing concrete in the accounting world has
happened for the last 10-12 years.

With the advent of new information technology and its
interface with business requirements, the role of a traditional accountant has
changed drastically. From Bahikhatas to software packages like Tally and now
from Tally to enterprise resource planning through Oracle, SAP, Hyperian, etc.
accounting has taken an entirely different shape taking care of the needs of
business in the fast-changing economy. There is paradigm shift in the roles,
responsibilities and perception for an accountant in an organisation. This is a
free economy and factors like geographical spread of a business, different
regulatory bodies to govern the business, rapid penetration of technology into
the business systems, expectation of management to have online information to
take timely and strategic decisions, etc. are now governing businesses more than
any other factors. An accountant is not an exception to this change mechanism.
Intense business and organisational pressure coupled with expected deliverables
have led all accountants to rethink and reshape their footing in the
organisation.

This is the period of transition and with globalisation of
economy, efforts to corner the functions such as accounting are wholeheartedly
attempted in the name of business opportunities, through mere compliance and
rework activities. This is the time where an accountant is wandering round the
corners of an organisation to keep his values alive and to keep pace with the
new-edge technology. With this kind of rapid changes in business places, a
traditional accountant is bound to become a rare species nowadays in India. This
situation would arise, unless accountants, organisation, professionals bodies as
well as the Government take a relook at the current practices. Everyone attempts
cost and productivity optimisation, but no one in the organisation talks about
the necessity of good book keeping that gives data integrity.

What should be done to keep accountants and accounting as
simple as possible from an accountant’s perspective ? Yes, a traditional
accountant always starts his daily organisation life with debit/credit and ends
the day with debit/credit. There are no innovative activities in his work
methods, other than accounts reconciliations, accounts scrutiny, etc. or some
reporting for cost controls. Here is an attempt to give some thoughts and raise
issues on measures required to enhance the role of an accountant from an
accountant’s perspective.

(1) National holiday :


For the last several years, accounting people of this nation
could never enjoy the national holiday on 2nd October, birthday of the father of
the nation Mahatma Gandhi. On this holiday, when all Government and other
companies enjoy holiday, accounts people in India work to complete half-yearly
accounts of organisations. They are helpless due to their commitments and
desired deliverables to their organisation. In fact they are even entitled to
overtime, allowance and they do not get a compensatory off in lieu of this
holiday. It is said that creativity starts in empty minds, therefore it is
desirable to give relief, so that all accounting people can enjoy the birthday
of the Father of Nation by one or other means.

(2) No more decimals :


Majority of companies (and especially banking companies)
raises its invoices/debit notes and other business instruments in fraction of
rupees. While accounting these debit notes/invoices in books of accounts,
accounting people have to give extra precaution on the decimal part of the
invoices. In case they commit mistakes to account for these debit notes/invoices
to the exact amount, these lead to reconciliation/payment problems. This is
leading all accounting people of this country to wear untimely spectacles. This
sometime delays the marriages of female accountants wearing spectacles.
Adjustments of these instruments in books require checking of calculations on
calculator. Rounding off of the business instruments will save the manual
efforts to use at least two keys on calculator. So it is desirable to provide
for compulsory rounding off of all business instruments in all business
transactions to save man-hours.

(3) Even and not odds :


Indians are habituated for the even and not odd ! Last year
budget imposed 1% higher education cess, thereby demanding imposition/deduction
of 3% cess on all tax liabilities of the organisation. In majority cases 3%
amount of cess never tends to be rounded of. So accounting people have genuine
reasons to urge the Government to hike cess from 3% to 4%. This will give
accounting minds of the nation bit relaxation in calculation of the cess and its
adjustments in books of accounts.

(4) Chart  of accounts:

The Excise Department generally asks companies to furnish information about Service Tax and Education Cess on Service Tax paid/charged during the period (Of course this period may go up to years). After all, it is their statutory privilege. However, this privilege of Excise Dept. creates embarrassing situation for accounts people. Finding out the amount of Service Tax and cess paid / charged with the amount of taxable services received/rendered is not an easy task. After all, accountants have to exactly round off the amount of Service Tax and cess levy / paid with taxable services rendered/received by the company. So, going one step forward, it would be prudent for all if the amount of cess is clubbed in the tax structure itself. Instead of charging cess in different heads it can be charged in one head only. This will reduce chart of accounts of all companies and all accounting people will have to reconcile lesser numbers of general  ledgers accounts.

(5) Natural resources:

Our corporate laws provide for quarterly board and audit committee meetings. Every quarter, accounting people of this nation have to prepare complete set of books of accounts by late sitting in office. Four times in a year, they have to take care of statutoryr audit team and directors. After all they have to arrange for their pleasant stay, good food, sight-seeing and valuable gifts. They have to be online on E-mails, cell phones, etc. for easy accessibility. If the Government reduces the mandatory requirement of audited books of accounts from 4 to 2, this will be of great saving to the valuable national resources. Most of all, this will give accountants an opportunity to go home in time and to share moments of life with their family and others. So by reducing the, number, the Government will be contributing to their family peace and country’s social development as well.

(6) TDS certificate and  C Forms:

Indian tax laws provide for issuance of Tax Deducted at Source (TDS) certificates within 30 days of deduction of tax. Similarly, C forms for the quarter are to be issued by the end of the next quarter. Earlier accountants were accustomed to issue yearly TDS certificates and C forms. Change in time frame has led all accountants to be followed up rigorously by their vendors. Issuing transaction-based TDS forms and quarterly C forms are adding to the manpower cost and paper cost to their company. Mere small mistake in issuing these two certificates leads all accountants being followed up by E-mails( post cards, faxes, and calls not only in office but a home as well. After all, issue of TDS forms, C forms demands a lot of reconciliations, clarifications, communications and resources. So if the Government provides for issuing annual TDS certificates and C forms, this will help all accountants. Of course, this will assist in role change of an accountant from ‘Accountant’ to an ‘Environmentalist.’

(7) Fringe Benefit Tax (FBT) :

The amount qualifying for FBT under Tax laws in case of conference fee is nil, while any amount spent to attend the conference like travel expenses are subject to FBT. Whenever company officials travel to attend seminars, accountants have to account for the conference fee and expenses incurred to attend the conference separately to reduce the FBT burden of company. This gives accountants additional pain to put two accounting entries after searchin complete set of expenditure sheet. In view of tills, if the Government brings the conference fee within the ambit of FBT, this will consolidate existing requirement of two separate accounting entries into one.


One may laugh on reading the above small efforts, but this is reality that needs to be accepted. In words of Ernest Oimnet, “Ideas are the roots of creation”. These are the ideas of an accountant. Yes, the minority voice of industry to which no one pays attention. This is the right time to raise the issues on a fronts. This is the start of the ringing of the beir. Business giants like Enron, World Com, Tyco International have collapsed due to non-confidence in the financial reporting system. Maintenance of data integrity in the different information technology environment will be the greatest challenge for an organisation in coming years. This is the time for both, the government and the business, to keep things simple. If business does not care for these things, business will suffer not today but surely tomorrow. Data integrity can only be achieved by letting accounts people be a bit relaxed. Allow accountants to spare some time for their thought process, so that they can devote time to create? better understanding of their roles to achieve organisational objectives and goals. The above small efforts on the government front will give accountants an opportunity to synergise accounting with organisational strategy and structure. After all, “For the experienced to survive, reality must be considered,” says, Charles B. Richardson. Simple but important, the above steps will help all accountants at large to keep them ‘Simple’.

GST — Issues and Policies

Article

Government without treasury is unknown in history. Government
raises revenue mainly through taxation or borrowing. Taxes matter both for the
government and the governed. We all know we need to pay taxes for public
services, but still most of us complain about taxes and avoid them, if possible.

2. Tax policy, its design and tax administration are the
reflection of the economic reality and the social and cultural factors of the
society. Tax policy of a country is shaped by ideas and interest, global
economic reality, administrative constraints, political institutions and
technological developments. A tax policy needs to delicately balance the
objectives of revenue, the need to facilitate economic growth and stability and
equity. Political economy necessitates balancing of growth and equity. Though
there is no alternative to growth, growth without equity is neither desirable
nor sustainable. A policy oriented towards growth cannot, therefore, ignore the
need to put in place measures to protect and ensure the welfare of the weak and
vulnerable sections of the population.

3. Evolving a tax policy and designing a tax system for a
fast developing and increasingly open economy is more challenging. India’s
international trade-to-GDP ratio exceeded 35%. The task becomes complex in view
of internationalisation of economic activities arising from globalisation and
liberalisation. Lowering the level of protection available to domestic
manufacturers of goods by reduction of customs tariffs, entering into free trade
agreements, both bilateral and multilateral, and liberalisation of international
trade have direct bearing on the competitiveness of the domestic industry and
thereby their very survival. These developments necessitate the need to tune the
tax policy in line with the changing economic environment without loss of time.
Tax reform in a globalised world has become a necessity for survival rather than
a matter of choice. The nation took a conscious decision to embark on the path
of fundamental tax reforms.

4. Indirect tax policy and system in India has been
undergoing fundamental changes. It is a well-accepted thinking that high tax
rates do not necessarily result into higher revenue, but are likely to
discourage compliance and distort economic activities. High tax rates may not
also seem to be an effective method to distribute income and wealth. Peak basic
rate of customs duty on manufactured non-agricultural products was reduced from
more than 300% in 1990–91 to 10% in 2007-08. During the same period, ad
valorem
basic excise duty was also reduced from 110% to the CENVAT rate of
14%.

5. The process of globalisation making competitiveness a
global issue and not a country-specific issue made many countries to reduce the
direct tax rates, both on corporates and persons, and customs tariffs and
simultaneously increase their reliance on domestic consumption taxes. In many
countries and regions, there is a shift from direct to indirect taxes.
Globalisation led to significant reduction in customs tariffs and consequent
reduction in reliance from customs revenue. During the period 1990-91 to
2007-2008, customs revenue has grown only by 404% as against 607% growth in
domestic consumption tax revenue. Ensuring the competitiveness of the tax system
is an inevitable response to the broader picture of global economic integration
resulting into global competition.

6. The Hon’ble Finance Minister in his Budget speech 2006
stated the intention to move towards comprehensive goods and service tax (GST)
by April, 2010. The scope of the Empowered Committee of State Finance Ministers
(ECFM) has been expanded to deal with issues relating to GST. The institution of
Empowered Committee of State Finance Ministers is one of the most successful
innovations in fiscal federalism. GST is considered to be the single largest tax
reform of the country in the domestic taxation. Adoption of Value Added Tax
(VAT) at the Central level and also by all the States for taxation of goods and
services has given enough confidence to all the stake-holders to move towards
GST at the national level.

7. Major problem afflicting taxation of goods and services
today is the tax cascading arising on account of the partial nature of the taxes
and also of multiple and overlapping taxes. Current tax structure results into
varying degree of taxes on goods and services depending upon the nature of
inputs used. No credit is allowed on CST paid on interstate sales. Even if the
statutory rate is the same, effective tax rate varies from product to product,
depending upon the quantum of hidden taxes paid on inputs and the structure of
production and distribution chain.

8. Indirect taxation in India, therefore, provides
opportunities for planning and arbitration. Simplified system of taxation
reduces the cost of compliance and cost of collection considerably and would
enable the business to plan its activities. GST reduces the scope for ad hoc
decisions and political compromises apart from reducing the compliance cost.

9. The core objective of GST is to remove barriers for trade
by creating a common national-level domestic market. A major reform of such
magnitude does require change of ideas, attitudes and mind-sets. This may cause
discomfort mainly on account of fear of the unknown. If one appreciates the
economic advantage of GST and appreciates its necessity in the context of the
global economic competition, then apprehensions and misgivings may not have any
place.

10. Consumption tax on goods and services on the basis of
value addition known as VAT or GST has been emerging as the tax of the future.
The global experiences support that VAT is the most effective mechanism to raise
revenue efficiently. The fact that more than 145 countries in the world across
the ideological spectrum adopted VAT to tax domestic consumption of goods and
services substantiates the view that VAT has now become a main feature of
indirect revenue system.

11. GST or VAT is a broad-based tax levied on multiple stages of production and distribution with the taxes on inputs credited against taxes on output. Revenue is secured by being collected throughout the process of economic transactions, but without distorting production decisions. It is collected at each stage of the transaction and the amount of tax is calculated on the prices of the goods and services at the rate applicable after deduction of the amount of VAT borne directly on various inputs used for providing output goods or services. Taxes collected at intermediate stages are only pass-through transactions. Collection of tax being at each stage of the transactions with input credit scheme, VAT has inherent incentive for tax compliance. Being a consumption tax imposed on goods and services, the tax burden is to be borne by ultimate consumers.

12. VAT is the single largest source of revenue in some countries and one of the most important sources in many more. Increase in VAT collection is not at the expense of income tax. VAT and income tax are in fact complementary to each other and one is not a substitute for other. VATis a simple way of collecting sales tax. No fiscal innovation is ever spread so widely in such a wide variety of countries.

13. GST designed with the objective of economic efficiency and neutrality requires:

  •     Harmonisation of tax base, tax rates, tax laws and procedures.

  •     To avoid cascading effect by providing credit of total amount of tax paid on inputs.

  •     To levy tax on destination  basis.

  •     To ensure  uniformity  in law and procedure.

14. The relevant questions to be responded while designing GST are, –

  •  Whether GST can address the fiscal tasks imposed by trade liberalisations and other economic factors?

  •  Whether a single GST in a federal country would affect the political equilibrium reflected in the country’s fiscal structures?

  •  Whether GST addresses the concern of vertical equity?

Equity and distributional effects of GST are matters of concern and academic debate. It is difficult to design VAT to meet the needs of vertical equity. However, experiences all over the world show that at present VATis the best form of general consump-tion tax available.

15. One of the critical areas in designing single GST is sub-national jurisdiction in levying of VAT. GST design in a federal country needs to take into account:

  •     the fiscal autonomy  of provinces;

  •     to use tax as an instrument to achieve social or economic objectives; and

  •     risk and  rewards  of ownership  of the tax.

16. Considering the revenue needs of provinces to meet their developmental objectives, provinces do expect sufficient fiscal space to mobilise revenue. The Constitution of India clearly demarcates the taxation power between the Centre and the States. GST model needs to strike a balance between harmonisation which is critical for economic efficiency and creation of common domestic market and fiscal autonomy of the Centre and the States required to discharge their obligations.

17. Though the desirable objective is broader base with lower rate, preferably single rate, the need to protect and ensure the interest of the economically weaker sections by way of exemptions, reduced rates or zero rates for basic services like food, medicines cannot be totally ignored especially in a developing or transitional economy. Equity aspects of VATare a matter of concern. It may be inevitable to introduce some degree of explicit progressivity within the VATsystem itself. In such cases, reduced rate is generally considered as the preferred choice. Minimising distortion and at the same time accommodating the different economic and social objectives is the real challenge for designing the GST system. However, experiences show that introducing specific measures inevitably creates complexities and resultant cost and goes contrary to the demand for simplification. It is also a challenge to balance the procedural requirements to eliminate the possibility of non-compliance and fraud and at the same time ensuring that the level of compliance cost does not affect the ability to compete. Ideal model may not be politically acceptable and administratively feasible.

18. Different forms of eST exist in different countries. What is important is designing an appropriate GST to suit the specific needs and environment and then running it efficiently. Differences among various GST systems indicate the objective reality of history and politics of member countries. European Union’s VAT is the much talked about VAT. However, there is a strong view that the Sixth VAT Directives of EU need major revision to cope with the realities of the expanded, more integrated and more developed EU of today.

19. The single-rate structure usually considered as an ideal and recommended by experts is followed only by Denmark among the EU countries. Most EU countries have a standard rate with two reduced rates. The average effective VAT rate as compared with the standard rate among EU member states varies widely and the percentage of variation is in the range of 8% to 32% of the standard rate. In EU, about  one-third  of the tax base is subject to non-standard  rates including  zero rate. Exemptions also vary  widely  from country  to country.  VAT in EU differs on many important  aspects. Variations are in relation  to the tax base, treatment  of foreign trade-origin or destination,  and the method  of collection.

20. GST model followed by New Zealand, Singapore and Australia with broad base and single rate is no doubt a clean model. But it may be difficult to replicate such model in a federal structure with strong identity of units and also in developing or transitional economies.

21. Despite differences, almost all the VAT models in the world follow the principle to tax consumption on destination basis and is applied on a transaction basis using the invoice – credit (output tax minus input tax) method basis. Origin-based income type VAT exists in Italy, Japan and some American states. China already initiated the process to have eST by the year 2013. Countries that do not have VATare US, Iraq, Iran, Cuba, some oil-rich countries and large number of small island countries basically in the Caribbean and Pacific.

22. Selectivity and discretion erode tax base and tend to create powerful special interest groups apart from introducing complexity in the system. Single national-level eST does avoid issues relating to interstate transactions. However in a democratic polity with federal structure and assignment of tax powers, it may be difficult to achieve, if not impossible, the ideal comprehensive value added consumption tax at the national level. The other model is taxing consumption at uniform rates across goods and services. This will avoid tax-induced distortions, bring simplicity and minimise the pressures for favourable treatment for some goods or services over others. However, fiscal autonomy warrants power to decide the tax rates to meet the revenue needs notwithstanding harmonisation of law and procedure.

23. Independent VAT applied simultaneously on the same tax base by two different and overlapping jurisdictions leads to high administrative and compliance cost. The only way in which sub-national units can effectively levy VAT is on origin basis. In such cases, if the rates are not uniform, results would be highly distortionary.

24. Destination-based consumption VAT through invoice-credit method requires physical border controls. In the absence of border controls, the alternative approach is to put through some form of clearing house mechanism to deal with the state transactions. Considering the magnitude of transactions, this approach requires a sound and extensive IT infrastructure.

25. One of the most critical VAT design issues is consideration of local conditions including support the level of the threshold limit above which firms . from trade and industry. Good GST design makes must register. One view is to set the threshold limit good VAT administration easier and bad design too high rather than too low. Dealing with a large makes good administration almost impossible. number of very small taxpayers inevitably results in
some loss in administrative efficiency. It is preferable to include all firms above a fairly high threshold in the tax base. The other view is that high threshold limit reduces the tax base and encourages growth of informal sector. A balanced and a pragmatic view needs to be taken. There are also challenges to make GST work in a system, which relies on self-assessment.

26. Desirable features of VATdesign such as single rate, zero rating instead of exemptions, refund of input tax credit, that cannot be adjusted against taxes due on outputs may not necessarily be feasible in the context of the economic realities. Features like more than one rate, few exemptions, and too high or too low thresholds may be inevitable at a particular point of time for successful adoption in the first place. However, experiences show that it is extremely difficult to remove such features at a later stage.

27. The clean system is critical in lowering compliance cost for business and administration cost for Government. The fundamental choice is between concessions to some with high rates or no concessions with low tax rates. This needs to be explained and communicated well so as to evolve a consensus.

28. VAT provides a competitive advantage to the country that implements it. It removes hidden taxes on exports. Many goods and services that bore no taxes are in fact have hidden taxes paid on most of their inputs. The resulting pattern of effective rates on products and industry vary widely and bear little relation to the Jegislativ,e intent. In India, the study shows that the tax incidence on different commodity groups varies widely. Elimination of exemptions and concessions reduces administrative cost as well as the influence of special interest groups on tax policy. Self-imposing nature of GST leads to increase in revenue productivity. VAT also strengthens the information base of the tax administration, resulting in improved compliance not only of VAT,but also of other taxes.

29. Critical factors for successful implementation of GST are political commitment, adequate and advance preparation, investment in tax administration, extensive public education programme and consideration of local conditions including support from trade and industry. Good GST design makes good VAT administration easier and bad design makes good administration almost impossible.

30. “Tax Administration is Tax Policy” says Milka Casanegra. The real tax system is that which is administered, not that which appears in the formal law. VATcan certainly be designed to fit into the tax administration of the country.

31. The most basic lesson learnt from international experiences in implementing GST is that doing it right is in most respects a matter more of art than of science. It is extremely critical to keep the administrative dimensions at the Centre rather than at the periphery while designing the GST system. Poor administrative system creates a wedge between theory and practice and thus encourages the spread of informal economy. A good policy is only as good as it is administered. It is important to keep in mind the administrative realities. Reform of the tax system is not a one-time affair. It is a dynamic process in which the responses are to be calibrated continuously.

32. Successful implementation of GST requires an effective consultative and communication process. Consultative process helps to improve the quality of decision-making. It may not be possible to have consensus with many interest groups and the public on all issues. As long as the decisions are fair and reasonable, and consistent with the stated core objectives, consensus develops after the decisions deliver satisfactory results. It is equally important to appropriately package the proposal.

33. There are no disagreements between the Centre and the States and trade and industry on the issue of common tax base, rates and laws and procedures. The issues are more on details and the mechanism required to achieve the stated objectives. Considering the consensus and the enthusiasm of the stakeholders and the appreciation of the necessity and economic benefits of GST, there is every reason to believe that the country is on the right path and will reach its destination.

Total disablement. Tanker driver said to have suffered 100% disability due to amputation of right leg up to knee joint in an accident : Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 S. 2(1)(e)

New Page 2

16 Total disablement. Tanker driver said to have suffered
100% disability due to amputation of right leg up to knee joint in an accident :
Workmen’s Compensation Act, 1923 S. 2(1)(e)


The claimant-appellant, a tanker driver, while driving his
vehicle from Ayanoor towards Shimoga met with an accident with a tractor coming
from the opposite side. As a result of the accident, the appellant suffered
serious injuries and also amputation of the right leg up to the knee joint. He
thereupon moved an application before the Com-missioner for workmen’s
compensation, praying that as he was 25 years of age and earning Rs.3,000 per
month and had suffered 100% disability, he was entitled to a sum of Rs.5 lacs by
way of compensa-tion. The Commissioner determined the same at Rs.2000 per month.
The Commissioner also found that as the claimant had suffered an amputation of
his right leg up to the knee, he was said to have suffered a loss of 100% of his
earning capacity as a driver and accordingly determined the compen-sation
payable to him at Rs.2,49,576 and interest @ 12% p.a. thereon from the date of
the accident.

On appeal by the insurance company the High Court held that
the loss of a leg on amputation amounted to a 60% reduction in the earning
capacity and as the doctor had opined to a 65% disability, this figure was to be
accepted and accordingly reduced the compensation. The claimant on further
appeal placed reliance on Pratap Narain Singh Deo v. Srinivas Sabata & Anr.,
(1976) 1 SCC 289, wherein a carpenter who had suffered an amputation of his left
arm from the elbow, the Court held that this amounted to a total disability as
the injury was of such a nature that the claimant had been disabled from all
work which he was capable of performing at the time of the accident. The
expression ‘total disablement’ has been defined in S. 2(1)(e) of the Act as
follows :

“(1) ‘total disablement’ means such disablement whether of
a temporary or permanent nature, as incapacitates workman for all work which
he was capable of performing at the time of the accident resulting in such
disablement.”


The question for consideration before the Court was whether
the disablement incapacitated the respondent for all work which he was capable
of performing at the time of the accident. The appellant herein had also
suffered a 100% disability and incapacity in earning his keep as a tanker driver
as his right leg had been amputated from the knee. Additionally, a perusal of S.
8 and S. 9 of the Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 would show that the appellant would
now be disqualified from even getting a driving licence.

The appeal was allowed and the judgment of the High Court was
set aside and order of the Commissioner restored.

[ K. Janardhan v. United India Insurance Co. Ltd. & Anr., AIR 2008 SC
2384]

levitra

Stamp duty : Transfer of agricultural land by great grandfather in favour of great grandson, exempted from payment of stamp duty : Indian Stamp Act, 1899.

New Page 2

15 Stamp duty : Transfer of agricultural land by great
grandfather in favour of great grandson, exempted from payment of stamp duty :
Indian Stamp Act, 1899.


The petitioner was a minor and great grandson of one Shri
Bhag Singh. The petitioner is son of pre-deceased father Shri Kuldeep Singh who
expired on 31-8-1999. The petitioner was also son of a pre-deceased grandfather
Shri Baldev Singh, who died on 24-7-2002. Shri Bhag Singh, great grand-father of
the petitioner executed a transfer deed, dated 23-1-2003 registered with sub-Tehsil
in respect of agricultural land. The value of the land disclosed was Rs.30 lacs.
The petitioner being the transferee did not affix any stamp duty on the ground
that Notification dated 21-12-2001 issued u/s.9(1)(a) of
the Indian Stamp Act, 1899 granted exemption in case transfer of immovable
property is made by the great grandfather to the great grandson. The collector
issued notice to the petitioner and held that he was liable to pay stamp duty
holding that the petitioner was not covered in the category of class I – heirs.

The High Court observed that no stamp duty would be
chargeable in case of transaction or transfer by an owner of agricultural land
or rural residential property to his class I heirs as defined in the schedule
u/s.8 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956. The schedule u/s.8 of the Succession
Act specifies heirs in class I, which includes son of a pre-deceased son of a
pre-deceased son. The aforementioned schedule reads thus :

“Heirs in class I and class II

class I

Son; daughter; widow; mother; son of a pre-deceased son;
daughter of a pre-deceased son; son of a pre-deceased daughter, daughter of a
pre-deceased daughter; widow of pre-deceased son; son of a pre-deceased son of
a pre-deceased son; widow of a pre-deceased son of a pre-deceased son.”


Therefore, the petitioner was covered by the phrase ‘son of a
pre-deceased son of pre-deceased son’. In other words, the transfer made in this
case was by a great grandfather in favour of a great grandson, which was covered
by the phrase used in the Schedule of Class I heirs. Therefore, notification
dated 21-12-2001 would cover the case of the petitioner and it would fully apply
to the transfer deed, which was registered on 23-1-2003.

[ Gurdial Singh v. State of Punjab and Ors., AIR
2008 Punjab and Haryana 146]



levitra

Hindu Law : Daughter of coparcener in Joint Hindu Family governed by Mitakshara Law gets right of coparcener from the year 2005: Hindu Succession Act, 1956, S. 6 (as amended in 2005)

New Page 2

14 Hindu Law : Daughter of coparcener in Joint Hindu Family
governed by Mitakshara Law gets right of coparcener from the year 2005: Hindu
Succession Act, 1956, S. 6 (as amended in 2005)


Respondent No. 1 the plaintiff filed the suit for partition
of the properties. The plaintiff and defendant No. 1 are brothers, defendant
Nos. 4 and 5 are their sisters, defendant Nos. 2 and 3 are the sons of defendant
No. 1. Krushna, the father of the plaintiff and defendant Nos. 1, 4 and 5 died
in the year 1991 while living jointly with his sons. There had been no partition
of the suit properties by metes and bounds. As defendant No. 1 avoided the
request of the plaintiff for amicable partition of the suit properties, the
plaintiff filed the suit.

The lower Court decreed the suit preliminarily in part on
contest against defendant Nos. 1 to 4 and ex parte against defendant No.
5 with costs.

The Court held that the (Amendment) Act, 2005 was enacted to
remove the discrimination as contained in S. 6 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956
by giving equal rights and liabilities to the daughters in the Hindu Mitakshara
Coparcenary property as the sons have. The said Act came into force with effect
from 9-9-2005 and the statutory provisions create new right. The provisions are
not expressly made retrospective by the Legislature. Thus, the Act itself is
very clear and there is no ambiguity in its provisions. The law is well settled
that where the statute’s meaning is clear and explicit, words cannot be
interpolated. The words used in provisions are not bearing more than one
meaning. The amended Act shall be read with the intention of the legislation to
come to a reasonable conclusion. Thus, looking into the substance of the
provisions and on conjoint reading, Ss.(1) and (5) of S. 6 of the said Act are
clear and one can come to a conclusion that the Act is prospective. It creates
substantive right in favour of the daughter. The daughter got a right of
coparcener from the date when the amended act came into force i.e.,
9-9-2005.

The contention that the daughters, who are born only after
2005, will be treated as coparceners, is not accepted. If the provision of the
Act is read with the intention of the legislation, the irresistible conclusion
is that S. 6 (as amended by Act 39 of 2005) rather gives a right to the daughter
as coparcener, from the year 2005, whenever they may have been born. The
daughters are entitled to a share equal with the son as a coparcener.

[Pravat Chandra Pattnaik & Ors v. Sarat Chandra Pattnaik
and Anr.,
AIR 2008 Orissa 133]


levitra

Dowry : Gifts given at time of customary thread-changing ceremony on birth of girl not dowry : IPC, 1860]

New Page 2

13 Dowry : Gifts given at time of customary thread-changing
ceremony on birth of girl not dowry : IPC, 1860]


Three accused, viz., Narayana Murthy (A-1), his father
Kannappa (A-2) and mother Shivabhushan-amma (A-3), were tried by the Sessions
Judge, Bangalore City, u/s.498-A and u/s.304-B of IPC and S. 3, S. 4 and S. 6 of
the Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961. During the pendency of trial A-2 died. The
learned Trial Judge found the evidence of prosecution witnesses insufficient and
lacking for holding A-1 and A-3 guilty of the offences alleged against them and,
accordingly, they were acquitted of the charges.

On appeal by the State, the Division Bench of the High Court
convicted A-1 for offences u/s.498A and u/s.304-B of IPC and sentenced him to
suffer rigorous imprisonment for a period of seven years u/s.304-B, IPC. The
High Court, however, acquitted A-1 for offence u/s.3, u/s.4 and u/s.6 of the DP
Act, 1961, whereas the judgment of acquittal passed by the learned Trial Judge
in favour of A-3 has been upheld. On 3-9-1989 the marriage of Jagadeshwari, was
celebrated. An amount of Rs.4,000 in cash and five sovereign gold ornaments
allegedly were given to A-1 in dowry at the time of the marriage. After the
marriage, Jagadeshwari started living with A-1, A-2 and A-3 in their house. It
was alleged that after marriage, A-1 to A-3 started harassing Jagadeshari for
not bringing sufficient dowry and were compelling her to bring more dowry from
her parental house. Jagadeshari during her pregnancy period stayed at the house
of her parents for about five months. She gave birth to a female child. It was
alleged that on the day fixed by the parents of Jagadeshari for performing the
customary thread-changing ceremony of the child, A-1 refused to participate in
the said ceremony and he made demand of a gold ring, silver plate and silver
panchpatre as dowry. Since the father of Jagadeshari was not financially sound
to fulfil the demanded articles, he gifted a steel panchapatre and steel plate
to A-1. A-1 expressed his displeasure and went back
to his house. After a few days, Ravichandra (brother) took his sister
Jagadeshwari and her child to the house of A-1, A-2 and A-3 and told them that
his parents would try to meet their demand of dowry articles within a short
time, but still they continued to ill treat and harass Jagadeshari.

Jagadeshari alleged to have bolted the door of the kitchen
from inside and poured kerosene on her body and set herself on fire. Parents of
the deceased, on receipt of information of the death of their daughter through
one of the relatives, rushed to the house of the accused and on visual
inspection they noticed extensive burn injuries on the dead body of Jagadeshari.
On the following day, the father of the deceased lodged a complaint with Police
Station.

The Supreme Court observed that there was no evidence to show
that there was any cruelty or harassment for or in connection with the demand of
dowry. The complaint does not reveal that the accused had raised demand of dowry
either in cash or kind at the time of marriage. Further, the Court observed that
gift given at the time of performing customary thread-changing ceremony in
connection with birth of girl child is prevalent in the society and such gifts
cannot come within the ambit of dowry.

[ Narayana Murthy v. State of Karnataka and Anr.,
AIR 2008 SC 2377]


levitra

Auction sale of property by bank held illegal and arbitrary — Valuation of house by bank at much lower rate than it was valued at time of taking loan : Securitisation & Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, S. 13.

New Page 2

12 Auction sale of property by bank held illegal and
arbitrary — Valuation of house by bank at much lower rate than it was valued at
time of taking loan : Securitisation & Reconstruction of Financial Assets and
Enforcement of Security Interest Act, S. 13.


The petitioner and his wife had taken a loan of Rs.4,80,000
from State Bank of Patiala for purchasing a double-storey constructed house. The
approved valuer of the bank valued the house at Rs.6,14,294. There was default
committed by the petitioner in payment of instalments and the account of the
petitioner and his wife was classified as NPA illegally and no satisfactory
explanation was given as to why the valuer gave the valuation of house in
question at Rs.4,16,000 in Sept. 2005 when the same was valued by the bank’s
approved valuer in June 2003 at Rs.6,14,294 and thereafter conducted auction
sale of property at throw-away price.

The Court held that wide powers have been given to the banks
under the provisions of the Act for selling the secured asset itself without
invoking adjudicatory process. Even the action taken by the bank under this Act
cannot be challenged in the Civil Court. Therefore, the statutory powers vested
under this Act with the banks and the financial institutions must be exercised
reasonably and bona fide. The presumption that public officials will
discharge their duties honestly, reasonably, bona fide and in accordance
with the law may be rebutted by establishing circumstances which reasonably
probabilise the abuse of that power. If there is no credible explanation
forthcoming, the Court can assume that the impugned action was improper.

The Courts observed that in the last five years the prices of
real estate have increased day by day. When a house was purchased in 2003 for
Rs.6,00,000, how its value was assessed at Rs.4,16,000 in the year 2005. The
valuation report was apparently a procured one. No reason has been given for
difference of valuation with the earlier report, and the house in question had
been sold for less than the value of valuation report given at a time when loan
was obtained by the borrower. Therefore, the above facts with unexplained
circumstances was sufficient to hold that the auction/sale was conducted
illegally, unreasonably, unfairly and mala fide and consequently the same
was declared to be illegal and void. In the instant case, the borrower was a
poor mason belonging to the lower strata of society and he had taken the small
house loan for purpose of purchasing the house in question and he was ready to
regularise his account with agreed interest within four months. The borrower
must therefore be given an opportunity to clear the defaulted instalments within
a period of four months; accordingly the auction sale of property conducted by
the bank, held illegal and arbitrary.

[ Bhupinder Singh v. State Bank of Patiala & Ors.,
AIR 2008 Punjab and Haryana 148]



levitra

Chairman’s Foreword

Chairman

The theme of this conference and the Diamond Jubilee issue of
the Journal is :

‘Challenges of change — always ahead.’

It exemplifies what Peter Drucker once said :

“One cannot manage change, one can only be ahead of it”.

Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society — BCAS — in its
existence has always been anticipating change. It has been innovating its
educational programmes to arm its members to be always ahead — to meet the
‘challenges of change’. Change also demands that we continuously rewrite our
rules whilst retaining our values. BCAS initiatives also :



  • attempt to bridge the gap between expectations and realities.



  • pursue excellence through curiosity and creativity. Hence, the motto on BCAS’s
    journal is ‘curiosity to creativity’.



  •  aim to create opportunities for the accounting fraternity to learn and
    re-learn.


Six days after the birth of our Institute, seven visionaries
established this organisation to chisel talent to meet the needs of trade and
industry and has since then been evolving and innovating. The Society is an
adjunct to the Institute. It is there to support the Institute in achieving its
objective of being ‘partner in nation building.’

It was Leo Tolstoy who said, “Faith is the force of life”.


It is the faith that the founders of BCAS had in the
accounting fraternity of this metropolis (great city) that continues to inspire
us. It was their dream — nay — vision to make BCAS an institution that disperses
knowledge and trains chartered accountants to serve the ever changing needs of
society. It is this vision which was articulated into a ‘vision statement’ by
the Narayan Varma committee in the year 2002; which in concrete terms guides the
present and will guide the future activities of the Society. It is rightly
said :

“Great leaders institutionalise.”

In order to achieve our objectives we seek not only the
co-operation of our fraternity, but also the co-operation of sister professions
which we have received in abundance. We take this opportunity to express our
gratitude for their contribution.

Questions arise :


What makes BCAS what it is today ?; and

What prevents BCAS — an oasis of intellectuals — from
becoming irrelevant like some institutions ?

The answer lies in the fact that BCAS has been fortunate in
always having leaders who perceived the need for change, has responded to the
environment and delivered change. This is what makes BCAS vibrant and
challenging. It continues to challenge the old and the young alike — challenges
them to contribute both to their personal growth and the growth of BCAS.
Individuals do not come to lead and leave. They continue to serve and face
challenges of change
to keep BCAS always ahead. It is because of this
that the BCAS is an epitome of excellence in the art of being always ahead.
Our leaders consider it a privilege to be part of it and serve it.

It was Eric Hoffer who said :

“The future always belongs to those who earn it, and the only
way to predict the future is to have the power to shape it.”

It is also said ‘everything is possible for those who
believe’ and I say that the founders of BCAS believed and the leaders of BCAS
today believe in its contribution to the growth and shaping of our profession.

I believe that my fraternity has the vision to both predict
and shape its future and to be a part of the exciting times that the trade and
industry is going through and beholds for the future. I also believe that in all
this along with our Institute, BCAS has the ‘wherewithal’ to contribute.

In an environment where Indian businesses are expanding
beyond our territorial waters and foreign investors consider India as an
opportunity, we professionals need to hone our skills to meet the needs of both
these challenges. In honing the skills of my fraternity BCAS has played a
crucial role by being ‘always ahead’.



  • It was ahead of others, as mentioned earlier, when it was established just six
    days after the birth of our Institute; to impart skills.



  • It was again ahead when in late eighties it encouraged the study of
    international tax.



  • It is again ahead today when it conducts programmes on ‘business consultancy,’
    ‘alternative dispute resolution,’ ‘internal audit’ and ‘corporate governance’.



To respond to ‘challenges of change’ we need to examine the
change that has happened and is happening in both the social and economic
environments. A few illustrative changes are :

  • live-in relationships are accepted and are also being judicially recognised.

  • divorce and adultery are not shunned but are accepted as ‘freedom of choice.’

  • single motherhood  is accepted.

  • gays and lesbians live openly and are no longer shy of their affiliations.

  • every centre of power, big or small, is suspect of conspiracy and corruption.

  • individuals and organisations blatantly use authority without accountability.

  • business failures because of un-ethical practices – sub-prime is the latest which has shaken some of the world’s largest financial institutions.

  • laws are violated  with  virtual  immunity.

  • reported instances of our professionals involved in unethical practices.

  • professionals are accused of being collaborators in fostering corruption.

  •  society existing at flash point – riots, dharnas and agitations based on religion, language, caste, creed and even on admission to educational institutions virtually taking place every day.

  • society today approves, accepts, tolerates and at times even applauds corruption – the change in character.

Our tolerance or acceptance of the above changes over a period has increased.

If one were to analyse these they represent different facets of the same animal corruption. In factual terms it is conflict between:

1.    standards of behaviour with practicality, for ex-ample, business considers tax as a cost and we support and contribute to this thinking whereas the excessive use of tax havens has been held to be not only immoral but against law. Professionals in U.5.A. have been fined for encouraging use of tax havens .

2. being lawful  and practical.

In this environment we professionals are challenged to retain our professionalism. Society conveniently forgets that we professionals also emanate from the same environment but expects professionals to live in an oasis.

Let us not forget that Arthur Anderson went down with Enron because there was loss of values. Whenever, wherever a seam occurs the first question is :

‘Where was the auditor ?’

In other words, we are challenged by the dangerous play of convergence of commitment to principles with convenience. I repeat and question:

Is it the time to rewrite our rules without changing our values?

BCAS believes that a professional without ‘values’ is not a true professional. BCAS attempts to inculcate values through its study circle and articles in the Journal. It is not shy of discussing the multiheaded monster’ corruption’ which is becoming the scourge of Indian psyche.

Friends, this conference is a symbol of BCAS’s commitment to excellence in serving the accounting fraternity and to create opportunities to learn. The symphony of professional thoughts which is going to be presented today will be a treat to our ears and will at the same time be ‘thought-provoking’. The special issue of the Journal also aims to achieve the same objective. The credit for this goes to the cast and the crew of this conference and our learned contributors who have diligently toiled to give us ‘thoughts to think’. A review of the papers and articles exhibits the mastery which the authors have over the subjects. They have made complicated, confounding and confusing issues simple. They have dealt with the issues with luminous clarity. Their level of excellence, I am sure, will be a source of inspiration to the younger members of our fraternity.

I would conclude by saying  :

‘BCAS is a journey and not a destination and pray that this journey will – nay – shall continue.’


Buildings in city of Mumbai are entitled to extra Floor Space Index : Development Control Regulation Act, 1991.

New Page 1

5. Buildings in city of Mumbai are entitled
to extra Floor Space Index : Development Control Regulation Act, 1991.


In an appeal before the Supreme Court, there was challenge to
the judgment of the Bombay High Court which, while holding that Regulation 33(7)
of the Development Control Regulations, 1991 (in short the ‘Regulations’) for
the city of Mumbai as amended in the year 1999 does not suffer from any
illegality, further observed that the same applies only to dilapidated buildings
of ‘A’ category which satisfy the requirement and those declared prior to the
monsoon of 1997 under 3rd proviso are covered under Regulation 33(7) and are
entitled to extra ‘Floor Space Index’ (‘FSI’). It also directed that certain
side space has also to be provided.

 

The Supreme Court allowing the appeals held :

1. The Scheme under Regulation 33(7) involves landlords
with the consent of 70% of the occupiers. There is no acquisition for
redevelopment under this Scheme. Therefore to bring in ‘old and dilapidated
buildings’, which is a
prerequisite for acquisition and reconstruction under the other Scheme,
namely, under Chapter VIII of the MHADA Act cannot be included in the
provisions of Regulation 33(7) read with Appendix III.

2. The provisions relating to buildings which have been
declared unsafe are specifically covered by Regulation 33(6) and
reconstruction by MHADA is covered by Regulation 33(9). When the situation has
been differently expressed in different Sections, the Legislature must be
taken to have
intended to express a different intention if this building belongs to ‘A’
category.

3. Hence landlord of buildings of ‘A’ category need not
wait for the building to get dilapidated as he is entitled to reconstruct.

4. Under Regulation 33(10) the open space is 5 feet and to
insist on 12 feet as per the High Court judgment would make the same
unreasonable and prevent even buildings which are on the verge of collapse
from being redeveloped.

5. The above being the position, the inevitable conclusion
is that the High Court was not justified in reading additional requirements
into Regulation 33(7) after holding the same to be valid.

[Jayant Achyut Sathe v. Joseph Bain D’Souza and Ors.,
Civil Appeal Nos. 2970 to 2979 of 2006 & others, dated 4-9-2008
(unreported)]

 


levitra

Deficiency in service by Development Authority : Consumer Protection Act, S. 2(1)(g)]

New Page 1

6. Deficiency in service by Development
Authority : Consumer Protection Act, S. 2(1)(g)]


 

The Development Authority was not able to allot the
commercial flat under the second Self-Financing Scheme 1985. Even after expiry
of 20 years the Scheme failed to take off. The petitioner opted out of the
Scheme. The Hon’ble Commission held that the Scheme was not earnest act on part
of DDA and it cannot be allowed to thrive on money of registrants. Petitioner
entitled to refund along with 12% interest and DDA cannot deduct cancellation
charges.

levitra

Firm : Personal liability and liability of partnership firm to repay debts : SARFAESI Act. S. 35.

New Page 1

3. Firm : Personal liability and liability of
partnership firm to repay debts : SARFAESI Act. S. 35.


The appellants and the respondents were partners in
partnership business. The respondents allegedly took a loan from a bank by
forging documents. Thereafter, the bank initiated recovery proceedings against
partnership assets. Meanwhile, the appellants and the respondents became parties
to arbitration proceedings as per partnership clause and the appellants opposed
proceedings by the bank. However, the Trial Court rejected the appellants’
application and allowed the bank to continue with recovery proceedings.

 

The bank had instituted proceedings under the SARFAESI Act.
There is a specific provision in S. 35 of the said Act, which lays down that the
provisions of the Act would have overriding effect over other laws.

 

It is open for the appellants to oppose the application and
proceedings which are initiated by the bank under the SARFAESI Act and seek
discharge of their personal liability, as also the liability of the firm to
repay the said bank loan. The subject matter of the arbitration proceedings,
essentially, is the statement of accounts between the partners, whereas the
subject matter of the proceedings which are initiated by the bank are in respect
of recovery of loan which was taken by the partnership firm from the bank. These
proceedings being distinct and separate, the subject matter of both these
proceedings, therefore, is different and, therefore, is was justified in
rejecting the application filed by the appellants for impleading the bank as
party.

[Ravindra Vithal Prabhu and Laxmibai Ramchandra Pai v.
Umesh Martappa Prabhu, Deepak Rajaapa Prabhu, Annasaheb Sambhaji Patil and
Kolhapur Janta Sahakari,
(2008) Vol. 110 (7) Bom. L.R. 2401]

 


levitra

Recovery agents cannot resort to activities of using criminal force against card holders for recovery of dues : Banking Regulation Act, 1949.

New Page 1

1. Recovery agents cannot resort to
activities of using criminal force against card holders for recovery of dues :
Banking Regulation Act, 1949.


The Chief Justice of Andhra Pradesh High Court received a
telegram from the president of All India Credit Card Members Association,
Hyderabad complaining that the recovery agents of HDFC Bank have illegally
detained one Prof. Murthy and the officer of Police Station has illegally acted
in that regard. Acting on the telegram, the Court observed that harassment by
the recovery agents of banks for recovery of amount due under the credit cards
is not the solitary instance.

 

The Court further held that recovery of any amounts due from
customers of banks should be by method known to law or a fair practice of debit
collection, which has approval of Reserve Bank of India, which enjoins the
overall supervisory and monitoring power over all banks in the country. Taking
notice of the criticism about the illegal methods being adopted by certain banks
issuing credit cards for recovery of debts due under credit cards, Reserve Bank
of India issued certain guidelines to be adopted by all commercial banks issuing
credit cards and which are employing recovery agents for collection of dues. It
was categorically observed in guidelines that banks or recovery agents should
not resort to intimidation or harassment of any kind, either verbal or physical,
against any person in their debt collection efforts, including acts intended to
humiliate publicly or intrude the privacy of credit card holders’ family
members, referees and friends, making threatening and anonymous calls or making
false and misleading representations. Therefore, banks or recovery agents
employed by them have to scrupulously follow the guidelines issued by Reserve
Bank of India in the matter from time to time and they cannot resort to
activities of using criminal force against the cardholders for recovery of the
amounts due. If any such criminal force or harassment is made by the banks or
the recovery agents employed by them for recovery of amounts due under credit
cards, the affected card holders will have a right to take recourse to law by
lodging a complaint with police or can move competent Criminal Court having
jurisdiction by filing a complaint as required u/s.190 and u/s.200 of the
Criminal P.C. Whenever such complaints are lodged by credit card holders
suffered at hands of gundas/recovery agents employed by banks for recovery of
amounts due to banks under credit cards, the concerned police shall register
complaint and after due investigation file necessary reports before competent
Court having jurisdiction over matter.

[B. V. S. P. Choudary v. The Station House Officer
Mahankali Police Station, Secunderabad & Ors.,
AIR 2008 A.P. 147]

 


levitra

Reminiscences about the profession

Article

The word ‘Reminiscences’ suggests remoteness in time unlike,
its synonyms ‘Recollections’ and ‘Remembrances’ which entail sequential
recalling of facts rather than disparate incidents. This subtle distinction
allows the latitude for selectivity, when penning ‘reminiscences’.


Reminiscences could be hazardous, but I agreed to write in
appreciation of BCAS’ role as a thought leader in our profession, and their
exemplary functioning, which reminds me of the hope expressed by Hon. C. D. Deshmukh, the first Finance
Minister of India in his speech inaugurating the ICAI that “this structure shall
house all that is noble and dignified in the profession of Chartered
Accountants”.

This narrative cannot begin without acknowledging a deep debt
of gratitude to two benefactors, Mr. V. D. Chowgule, and the Hinduja family, who
respectively facilitated my entry into Articles in London (1966) and passage
into industry (2002) gently, swiftly and with future prospects that could hardly
have been bettered.

Entry via UK :

An entry to ICAI membership in 1971 as a UK CA, under a
facility open up to mid 90s, and paradoxically shut during my own presidency,
gave me relief from examinations, and seemed almost providentially designed by
ICAI founding fathers, to set the duller lot free from the severer struggles
with Indian legislation, bestowing on me large leisure to brood over coming to
terms with Mumbai’s ground reality, on return from PW London Office.

Early ’70s :

On joining a large firm in India (1972), my first impressions
were of contrasts, difficult to reconcile. Firms with quality clientele to match
today’s multinational LLPs, but squeezed by an oppressive tax regime, worked in
rudimentary environments with non-existent creature comforts, the serene
antithesis of the later-day CA offices modelled after five-star lounges.
Unctuous peons donning traditional round black topis served feeble beverages —
reverentially to ‘Saabs’, obsequiously to ‘Seths’, deferentially to visiting
clients, and indifferently to other inmates.

CAs rode the high tide of sought-after tax expertise,
following doomed attempts by the business community to find cheer in the tax
regime then extant under the FERA-cum-Licence Raj, except through the most
abstruse tax planning, on a scale now hardly credible even to modern tax
planners.

The finest minds upon graduation craved Articles, enchanted
by the premium CA qualification. Some of the gems who trained during those
years, including under me, are today leaders of many sectors in India and
abroad, too numerous to recount.

Managers were deemed successful if staff rooms were empty
(there was no hot-desking then). It was seen as a sign of success (billable
hours was the main saleable product, as it is today) if the little ones were
ticking up chargeable hours in client offices, while the big ones turned
disputation into argument in tax offices, and escalated these before tax
Tribunals, — the latter appellate forum already under relentless surrender to
the rival black-gowned profession.

Seeds of slide :

Members of our profession were imperceptibly but irreversibly
consigning themselves to meaner and less rewarding rungs on the ladder of
representational work. When the enduring tale of our profession is eventually
written, the scribes shall have the unenviable task of scripting a durable
record of the price we paid for neglecting the two engines that could have
navigated us to greater prosperity and good fortune — presentation skills, and
language skills. The neglect of these skills virtually handed on a platter to
MBAs and other disciplines, traditional preserves, over which CAs could easily
have retained hegemony.

Inherent tragedy :

The inherent tragedy of the CA in India is that — the CA Act
keeps members from doing that which is not prescribed, whereas the Advocates Act
keeps non-members from doing whatever the black-gowned profession does. So the
CA Act shackles CAs while the Advocates Act shackles competition.

Extensions of accounting like costing, management accounting
and financial management had by 70s been popularised, covered by authoritative
ICAI pronouncements, and become common enough to be put to general account. The
concept of accounting had changed, from one of maintenance of books and tracking
asset changes, to complex resource allocations and forward looking measurements
that support decisions for the efficient maximisation of profit. These
specialisms were subsumed by management consultancy, which turned esoteric, and
gradually the more lucrative work was captured by brand names, mostly non-CAs,
able to win predatorily priced assignments, and function with impunity outside
any regulatory framework whatsoever.

Gradually, all perceived ‘value added’ domains moved away
from the core attest function.

Auditing :

Audits had progressed, beyond the’ post factum technique of validating profit or loss and asset changes, to prescriptive regulator-driven reporting regimes, notably the requirements of October 1973 obliging verifications of capacities, turnover, production and stock quantities categorised by licensed sublimits, to be published in Annual Reports; and MAOCARO 1975 (forerunner of current CARO) requiring explicit subjective judgmental statements that broke new ground, augmenting responsibility and chargeable hours to perform extra work, without commensurate rise in fees, because clients saw little benefit to their businesses from that work. Astute, information-hungry bureaucracy had spotted an ideal intermediary to cater to regulator needs at no cost. So, over the years MAOCARO items elongated like the legendary Hanuman tail. One benefit that flowed to the membership from MAOCARO was a formal resuscitation of Internal Audit.

ICAI formed an Audit Committee on 17th September 1982, the date, I entered the Council. The ICAI President retiring on that day had lectured me on book keeping two decades back at college. I wondered if his farewell symbolised departure of quality from those hallowed premises, but was reassured to observe the elders that stayed on in the Council. They were learned men, rather serious, looking as though they would never surrender to any form of mirth, except maybe a twitch of a smile, if elected President.

Accent was as much on redistribution of work as on creation of new work; ‘Tax Audit’ was a notable milestone in creation of new work. Curiously though, the more comprehending minds among the then seniors, were, at least initially, not enthused by this source of perennial new work – it was seen as too risky.

The pet themes in rationing audits were ‘rotation’ which was rumoured tri-annually, and ‘ceiling’ which was mooted more recurrently. The latter was eventually enacted at 20 audits per partner and the former dumped, not because this was a triumph of self preservation by the old guard, but because many rotationists had done so well over the decade, as to see life differently. In the first draft of the new Companies Bill, the proposed ceiling on large audits was misprinted as 2 instead of 20 per partner. The first copies arrived as I was hosting a dinner for a former ICAI President. He had just declined a dessert that I had offered to order. Together we noticed the unexpected steep diminution in the ceiling on large audits at 2 per partner, without realising it was a misprint. He lightened the gloom by announcing that he would change his mind, and have the dessert after all, as this might be among the last occasions that it would be on offer. Obviously I had been wrong about elders not having a sense of humour – they did!

The big scramble in audit was for empanelment to win audits of nationalised banks, insurance companies and PSUs. The appearance of a senior bureaucrat with dispensing powers at any gathering could metamorphose ‘service’ into ‘servility’. This may have been the first dent in a system which had earlier taught members to aspire, but not to grovel.

Hopes about uplifting audit as a deterrent to corporate quixotry, through a convergence of statistical sampling and unprecedented advances in information technology, died early . Technology and sampling were used to boost margins by justifying drastic reductions in work and costs, by many, but almost institutionalised by a large international organisation that collapsed some years ago causing much misery. Given the disability that an auditor can neither issue summons, nor examine on oath, nor disclose the most horrendous client sins except in a court proceeding, auditing is probably destined to veer towards forensic investigations with statutory support. Some international firms have made commendable progress in this, without formal backing.

The Licence Raj also required numerous attestations – there was a boom in what was referred in vernacular as ‘certificate work’. Agents scouted impecunious young CAs even deep into the mofussil to entice ‘certifications’ of illusory end users and fictitious consumptions of the costliest imports.

Fleeing  the  shackles:

Fault lay not with the hapless membership, but in the stagnant economy and archaic regulatory shackles that offered little opportunity, except perhaps through emigration. Thousands went west, and as many gravitated to the Gulf. They did well, and did their country and calling proud.

The Council contained competent and clean professionals. But in a closed economy, an unseemly proportion of time was drained on volumes of disciplinary cases punishing puny sins – no more than tiny ads, minor indirect solicitations, and acceptance of minuscule audits without prior NOCs, mainly by members struggling for the economic necessities of life. Large established wrongdoers, including CAs outside professional practices, were seldom booked.

Tax:

Before the blossoming of other specialisms, the absorption with taxation as a discipline was near total. When established CAs of that era crossed fifty years of age, it would not have been uncommon to see their interest in the finer points of fiscal interpretations sublimated to become the principal passion of existence, replacing all other zests. 1985 broke the tax spell and ushered in Financial Services which were already waiting in the wings to come centre stage.

Finance:

The risks assumed by financial institutions in ex-tending term loans soon brought forth a new breed of CAs to help borrowers satisfy the information needs of lenders. This work quickly extended to an appraisal of justifications for projects before committing funds. The ICAI published the Back-ground Material on Project Evaluation in 1988, but well before that, entrepreneurs increasingly saw CAs as facilitators and procurers of much-needed finance, rather than number crunchers peering at small print, while big picture concerns went unnoticed. The evolution of a learned but backward looking timid lot into a dynamic pack not lacking commercial nous, became agreeably evident.

Industry :

An important lesson the profession was learning; was, that sectors outside traditional audit, especially industry sector, would value as advisors only those professionals who were providers of solutions, not those who stopped short of a solution after finding the root of a problem, howsoever painstakingly researched that finding of the problem root may be. For many of us brought up in the traditional mould, this may have been a bitter pill to swallow. But it is important to bear in mind that if the perceptions of society about us professionals do not coincide with our self perception, then it is we professionals who become irrelevant, not society, nor those who hold the purse strings that generally influence the perceptions of society.

Standards    – ASB,  IASB & IFRS

The Council did take worthy initiatives in line with world trends. Accounting Standards Board was set up in 1977. But contrary to popular impression, our thrust, at least initially, was not market-driven. I was Chairman of ASB for some years, thereafter on Steering Committees of International Accounting Standards (IAS) and finally India’s nominee on the main Board of IAS for a full Term. I worked closely with Sir David Tweedie, later IASB Chairman, and luminaries from US, Europe and Japan. International Standard Setter meetings occurred in exotic places in the world, and at times went on for nearly a week. The scholarship and erudition round the table was so profound as to be intimidating. But the humility was amazing. I once complimented Jim Lisenring, Vice-Chairman of US FASB, that his oration on the subtler aspects of financial instruments was the most brilliant piece I ever heard; and he shot back “that proves you have not been around in the world enough”. Incidentally the divide on debatable issues between the two sides of the Atlantic was at least as wide as between the two sides of the Pacific. The Board included such experienced individuals as could elucidate the most intractable technical problems with astounding clarity using examples of transactions in a small shop. Belying the irrepressibly drab image of beancounters, some delegates regaled us with the wittiest after-dinner speeches.

Installation of IFRS, including in US corporations, may well represent the single biggest opportunity for ICAI members during the next decade.

Capital markets and Bank NPAs:

For much of our formative years, my generation was awed by an authority known as the Controller of Capital Issues that obliged industry to seek our pricey attestation on intricate application forms, designed to obstruct rather than facilitate, the issue of capital or bonus shares. This controller vanished overnight, a little before the new SEBI-sponsored arrangements were fully in place, leaving an interregnum during which a number of adventurous souls including CAs had more than their share of fun.

In one of his famous plays Shakespeare has written an oft-quoted line “let us kill all lawyers”. He was terribly wrong, not only because he exaggerated the foibles and banalities of the calling he named, but because he had never met merchant bankers before he wrote that line. Had he met merchant bankers, he may not have dished out this dire prescription to others.

One of the Managing Directors at Bear Stearns (which folded up later) led the Financial Analysts in the IASB in discussing many issues including derivatives, hedge instruments, options, off-balance sheet items, etc. She would sometimes ask me how she had come through, and I would reassure her that she had not exhibited the characteristics implicit in the sounds of her firm name i.e., ‘neither ‘Bear’ nor ‘Ste(a)rn(s)’. Uncannily though, I had then, and still have today, an instinct against some of the new fangled financial instruments, and particularly their accounting.

I have a foreboding of worse disasters to come, because the malaise is no longer confined to bankers and capital market intermediaries, but includes modern CFOs, some belonging to our own profession. So obsessed are the CFOs with ‘selling’ bankable balance sheets to Analysts and Investors and presenting their Business to audiences from an external perspective, that, an in-depth expertise in specialist areas like Risks including Tax risks, and Regulatory requirements, have become for them the least important areas of their work. This folly is compounded by the cordial assent which these incorrect priorities now seem to receive, even from the more comprehending minds, in Industry and Profession.

If I were asked to muse in retrospect, on who should be regarded as the biggest offender against financial discipline, I would not accuse the business community. On the contrary, given the spate of acquisitions abroad, the Indian businessman must be seen as a defender, not offender, by those who care about the Indian Economy.

Pre-liberalisation era curbed genuine entrepreneurship, denying the scarce foreign exchange to the worthy enterprise, while at times releasing it for the not so deserving. One instance may suffice to illustrate incondite loans in foreign exchange.

A consortium of nationalised banks had lent a humongous sum in US dollars to a project spear-headed from India with some foreign individuals as stakeholders. The project was located in an island in the Indian Ocean. Costs and Interests escalated and were additionally funded. The Banking consortium sent me to investigate. With the benefit of hindsight, it would appear this was done by the lead banker, more to allay the disquiet among some bankers in the consortium, than to ascertain what went on. I turned out to be a bad choice for them. In a show of excessive confidentiality, instead of the easier route via Bahrain, I was flown east-ward and then back on a long flight across the Indian Ocean westward. I think it was intended that I have a whale of a time for a week, and return home with a tutored report. My total rejection of any alcoholic stimulant on the island and a punctilious application of mind to Books and Records soon soured the pitch. As a professional, and as a human being, I was grieved to see an instance of how the scarce resources of a poor country seemed to have been applied by those appointed to guard those resources. On return, unsurprisingly I was cold shouldered, and received only superficial acknowledgement, with just one exception. One bank official had the courage to openly support my findings, and when these ran into a dead end, the grace to orally share his suspicion that the report had been dumped. This outstanding officer later rose to be Chairman of one of the oldest nationalised banks, partially reinforcing my faith in the survival of virtue in an ocean of compromise.

Tenure in Council:

I was re-elected five times to the ICAI Council over 16 years 1982-1998.

In 1994 I became Vice-President solely because, the councillors disenchanted with me were marginally less than the number disenchanted with the other contestant who was actually a far more deserving candidate than I was.

Jack of all:

Every few years, Council resolutions expanded the list of what could be includible as permissible work to be performed by CAs. Like troops attempting to hold more ground than what their supply lines could sustain, the spread became thinnest at the core. Adjacent competencies waxed, while traditional proficiencies may have waned.

Sadly, members in industry gradually saw our Institute activities as somewhat less relevant, and in later years, one was never certain how much of the participation at seminars, was spurred by mandatory CPE.

Weaning away:

Meanwhile tribes that were initially tiny, like Company Secretaries, Internal Auditors, and Financial Analysts made considerable headway. They cultivated, inter alia, better relationships with key officials in Ministries of immense relevance to the Professions. ICAI was more established, but may have been perceived as somewhat insular by those whose opinion mattered most, during critical phases of growth and development. There was a joke that our policy towards competition appeared to be to, first disregard, thereafter ban our members joining those bodies, and after such banning had conferred upon those bodies the halo of martyrdom that ensured their survival, consider mutual exemptions from examinable subjects.

Change:

Elections had always been an undercurrent in the Council, and with exponential growth in the number of members, elective merit loomed larger. Elected councillors, could be seen as outstanding CAs who happened to have good PR, or perceived as outstanding PR persons who happened to be CAs. Fortunately, sufficient numbers of CAs of great merit still obtain on the Council. Only time can tell how many of the challenges that came along – whether it be the electronic age, the growing role of rival disciplines, or more vitallythe avalanche of Foreign Service Suppliers post 1993 – were proactively met with foresight by those at the helm including me.

New Order:

A New Order evolved in which professional services organisations, some of whom are integral parts of international networks, endeavour to offer advice using a multidisciplinary business-focussed approach.

To view the New Order as unwelcome would be an exercise in misinformation and prejudice. The change heralded much that was good and some of it exceptionally good. First of all, the New Order destroyed oligarchies that had existed earlier. Equality of opportunity is a principle far better served by the New Order in the first decade of the 21st century than was ever served during the preceding half century. Equally importantly, aspiring talented CAs unable to flourish in their own practice can now join the very large establishments more easily than they could ever have become part of the erstwhile oligarchies. Besides, it is only the New Order that has made it possible for large numbers of CAs to receive pecuniary rewards far higher than those ever expected in the past. Moreover, under the current new dispensations, the large residue is annually shared locally with remarkable fairness, and reportedly with an equity that contrasts favourably with the skewed slopes for profit sharing ordained in the past. Finally and happily, the local top brass of all the new large CA establishments in India are overwhelmingly members of ICAI.

Shangri-la :

These reminiscences could hardly be complete without a kind word for those who encouraged my drift in a turbulent upheaval from profession to industry. But for this, I would have missed out on the most rewarding and happiest working years 2002 onwards, which at this moment of writing seem to grow richer by the day. From 1966 to 2002, for 36 years, I deprecated my role in Kipling’s words – “those who report on deeds performed by others are not equal to those that perform deeds worthy of being reported”. Now I am performing the deeds, and the uniquely benign Promoter Family I closely work for, have afforded me roles, in exciting realms of modern international business and wealth creation.

Reminiscences of the profession in the Society

Article

In this article for the Special Issue on the occasion of the
Diamond Jubilee of the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society, I have been asked
to write my reminiscences of the profession in the Society. I passed in 1951 and
became a member of the Society, introduced by Ambalal S. Thakkar. I have tried
to cover my experiences, enjoyable moments and the travails undergone by me
during the long period of 57 years. I have also made observations about the
state of the profession from time to time and the manner in which it has changed
during the half century.


My most vivid recollection is of the Study Circle meetings,
which used to be held in the office of M/s. Shah & Co., Chartered Accountants as
the Society did not have its own office and the meetings used to be attended by
stalwarts like late S. P. Mehta, Senior Advocate and Chartered Accountants like
Sarvashri Ambalal Thakkar, Narandas Shah, Dhirubhai Bhatt, the first President
of the Society and others. The discussions were very useful and knowledgeable
for a beginner like me.

In those days, the important meetings were felicitation of
the President of the Institute, which were normally held at Radio Club in
informal atmosphere and constituted important source of information about the
Institute and its activities. The other annual feature was the talk on the
Budget by late N. A. Palkhivala. These meetings were held at the Greens Hotel,
which is now no more there. The attendance by the members was large but can-not
be compared to the meetings held in later years at the Brabourne Stadium by
Forum of Free Enterprise.

I also remember the first conference held by the Society at
Taj, which was attended by many senior members of the profession and many
subjects of professional interest were discussed at the conference. The meetings
were also addressed, amongst others by R. P. Dalal, who was earlier the member
of the Income Tax Appellate Tribunal and who humorously introduced himself as
out-standing member of the Tribunal after retirement from the Tribunal. The main
characteristic of the Study Circle and Lecture meetings was the informal
atmosphere in which they were held.

But the more notable feature of the Society was that normally
the President was selected by the Committee of the past Presidents taking into
consideration the erudition and leadership qualities of the person and was
respected by the members except on one or two occasions. This healthy tradition
is continued till today. There was scope for aspiring members of the Society to
work in honorary capacity as Committee members, Secretary and Treasurer and also
without being members of the Committee. The seeds of democracy and
responsibility as good professionals were sown by the members during their work
for the Society.

Another landmark stage was reached when the Society hired the
Office of Circle Literaire for its Study Circle and lecture meetings usually
held on Wednesdays. It was not necessary to know a single word of the French
language to attend the meetings there ! ‘60, Forbes Street’ became the famous
address of BCA Society for a number of years. The larger space gave a boost to
the Study Circle and lecture meetings and the publication of the Journal of the
Society, which was issued in cyclostyled form and which was the precursor of the
present ‘The Bombay Chartered Accountant Journal’ of the Society. One cannot
forget the services of Shyam Argade, as the editor of the Journal for a number
of years. The Study Circle and Lecture meetings gave opportunity, encouragement
and confidence to the new members to participate in the meetings. The meetings
of the Managing Committee were usually followed by dinner of the Committee
members and Past Presidents, which was frequently held at Ripon Club, Opp.
Bombay University.

But the real contribution of the Society to the profession
was by its leading role in representation to the authorities concerned on tax
matters and other professional problems relating to the Companies Act,
Partnership Act, etc. and the educational programmes like Seminars, Residential
Refresher Course, Workshops, etc., I remember the stormy meeting held at the
Greens Hotel to oppose tooth and nail the introduction of Rule to certify Income
Tax Return of the clients, a move fraught with danger to the professional filing
his clients’ Tax Returns.

One of the interesting features of the social activities was
the annual picnic of the members to Mahableshwar and Matheran, Lonavala, Pune,
Malavali Fort, etc. The present generation will not be able to believe that one
of the courses organised by the Society was at Mahableshwar for a charge of Rs.6
per day including boarding. Likewise, the annual social held more or less
regularly every year provided musical programmes including veteran Music
Directors like Naushad, not to mention the Qawali programme of Shakila Banoo
Bhopali on the boat cruise. A memorable event in one of these programmes was the
failure of the brakes of the car on ‘Ghat Road’ of Homi Banaji, one of the
amiable members and President of the Society. Likewise, the distinguished
gallery of the Presidents included personalities like late S. V. Ghatalia, S. N.
Desai, and E. C. Pavri besides the trinity of Shri Dinubhai, Shri Ambalal and
Shri Narandas.

The Society was the first to organise a Residential Refresher Course at Matheran under the Presidentship of P. N. Shah, which was inaugurated by S. P. Mehta whom the Society had accepted as the Hon. Member. The faculty included Bansi Mehta and I had the opportunity to write my first paper at the RRC on the evergreen subject of depreciation, which never depreciated in its value. Since then the Society has organised the course every year and is one of the most popular programmes, for which the enrolment is full within hours of the commencement and faster than some of the listed companies’ issues. This pioneering activity was followed by other professional bodies including Western Indian Regional Council of Chartered Accounts, Chamber of Tax Consultants and All India Federation of Tax Practitioners. It was in one of such programmes that I had contributed a paper on Public Trusts, which was repeated in sub-sequent courses and became a monograph on the subject, of which revised editions were brought out from time to time, the later ones being with Shariq Contractor and Gautam Nayak.

I had the good fortune to work as Treasurer and Secretary, and finally the President of the Society in the year 1963-64 along with R. J. Damanwala as Secretary, who was very meticulous about various activities. These positions gave me the basic training of presiding over the meetings of the members and various committees, the number of which was not very large at that time.

The growth and development of the Society compelled it to acquire the larger office at Dol-Bin-Shir. The bigger office but with a smaller lift gave boost to the meetings and library activity. One interesting feature of this office was that the office of that witty, principled Chartered Accountant, late Jal Dastur was in the same building involving greater participation by him. With the holding of Residential Refresher Courses at Bangalore, Pune, Aurangabad, Goa, Jaipur, Agra, Mount Abu and Indore, the Society became an All India Society which brought in new talent from younger members like Pinakin D. Desai, Kishor Karia and seniors like Y. H. Malegam, M. L. Bhakta, K. H. Kaji and others. The special invitees or the chief guests included the President of the Institute and persons from academic field like Prof. Rege of Bombay University. The scope of the subjects was extended to Indirect Taxes, Company Law, Computers, etc., so that the RRC became the hallmark of the Society. Another first was the RRC held at Dubai, which was participated by many local members also and meetings with Government officials and fol-lowed in the evening by Harbour visit, socials and dinners in Desert Safari.

The annual budget lectures were given by S. P. Mehta for a number of years and after his demise, are being given by Soli Dastur, Senior Advocate, whose popularity is evidenced by the fact that even the Birla Hall proved too small, compelling the Society to shift the venue to the architecturally beautiful hall of Swaminarayan Sanstha with a ca-pacity of more than 2000 persons. This was followed by annual half-day meeting on the Finance Act, after it was passed in Parliament. The mile-stone programme was the Silver and the Golden Jubilee conferences, the last being inaugurated by the President of the Institute and valedictory address by Shri Chidambaram, the present Finance Minister.

The next milestone in the Society’s history was the acquisition of new office premises at Churchgate Chambers, ‘A’ Road, Mumbai, further expanded by two premises in the same building. The larger office gave a further boost to the activities of the Society led by Narayan Varma, past President of the Society, with originality and number of new ideas for the growth of the Society and vision. The Society adopted the vision with the implementation of the goals set therein as its foundation. On his initiative the Society started educational programmes with the first such programme for management training jointly with Jamnalal Bajaj Institute. The success of this programme led to the launching of several new courses one after the other, namely, Professional Accountant, Internal Audit, Corporate Directors, Arbitration, etc. and also enhanced the value of the Chartered Accountants by giving them certificate for the training, approved by the University of Mumbai.

Shri Varma also gave a thrust to the activities of the BCA Foundation, a public trust established for help to the Chartered Accountants and the stu-dents, by very large collection for the Tsunami victims, by helping them to restore the schools in Tamil Nadu and development of computer programmes. Last but not the least, on account of his interest and enthusiasm, the foundation also devoted itself to the activities under the Right to Information Act, which proved to be a very pow-erful instrument in the hands of the people.

The publication activity received a big fillip with issue of marathon tax audit manual by five joint authors, Narayan Varma, Kishor Karia, Dilip Lakhani, Sunil Kothare and myself which helped the Chartered Accountants engaged in the task of carrying out tax audit. Likewise, many other publications were brought out on the subject of various aspects of Income Tax law, Accounting Standards, Auditing’ Standards, Service Tax, International Taxation, Computers, FEMA, Indirect Taxes, etc. The fantastic utility of more than fifty publications, revised from time to time enhanced the image of the Society as educational body.

The pre-budget and post-budget representations assumed great importance and were even followed by visits to Delhi for meeting with the Chairman and members of the CBDT and officials of the Finance Ministry. Similar representations were made on Company Law, Indirect Taxes, etc. The Society was recognised for appearance before the various committees appointed by the Government for ‘simplification’ and rationalisation, like the Choksi Committee, the Committee for Rationalisation of Tax Laws, the Kelkar Committee, Vanchoo Committee, etc.

The Society also organised Press Conferences when very serious problems were involved in Tax Laws and also participated in T. V. programmes after the presentation of the Finance Bill. The can-cerous corruption did not escape the attention of the Society, resulting in appointment of a small group comprising representatives of other professional bodies to provide machinery for fighting corruption, but unfortunately, due to inherent limi-tations, the group could not make much headway.

With the liberalisation and opening of the economy to international trade, FEMA and International Taxation became very important and Study Circles and other groups made special study of the subject with a view to equip the members to deal with issues arising therefrom and the need of foreign companies for attending to their work in India. Transfer pricing was not ignored and Conferences and special programmes were annually held to discuss the various issues.

The latest development in the field of education is to develop several modules on different subjects like Service Tax, TDS, etc., for the distant education programme and though, it may face teething trouble, it will succeed ultimately in its goal of educating Chartered Accountants as well as others. The idea has been picked up by other professional bodies also.

The role of the Society for the professional development has to be considered in the context of co-ordination and rapport with the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India, our official body governing the profession. In the early 50s the Society was asked to consider whether it was necessary to continue and expand the Society and whether it was duplicating the work of the Institute. However, the majority of the members did not subscribe to this view, as they considered that the Society is performing useful role to supplement the activities of the Institute and not to supplant the official organisation, some of whose Presidents and Council members also were actively involved with the Society. Hence, every new President and Vice-President was invited to visit the Society for be stowing felicitations and discussing the professional problems with them. In addition, in some cases the President of the Institute also inaugurated the technical programmes or gave talks on current issues like Accounting & Auditing Standards. Thus, the rapport of the Society with the parent body has been excellent throughout the years.

The clinics started by the Society for guidance of members and the public for Charitable Trusts, Accounts and Audit, and Right to Information have been doing excellent work in the education of professional as well as others who attend the clinics and take advantage thereof to solve their difficulties. The other way of public education is to bring out booklets for exposition of the changes brought in by the Budget within three days in not only English but also Hindi and Gujarati languages, so that more than 40,000 copies are circulated to professionals as well as members of the public. likewise, the education of students is not overlooked by starting revisional classes for them and lower subscription for journal of the Society and attending other programmes at concessional rates.

The last lap of expansion has been acquiring the present premises at New Marine lines, equipped with facilities for library, computers, Conference Hall for about 100 persons over an area of about 2500 sq. ft.

I have been associated with the Society in different capacities as member of the Managing Committee and Core Group and Invitee as past President over more than 50 years and have been member of the various committees including Taxation, International Taxation, and Accounting & Auditing. life is an unending educational process, so that I continue to contribute to the activities of the Society by participating in its Seminars, Conferences, Brains Trust, RRC, etc. I had therefore, the opportunity to overview the growth and development of the Society from seven members to more than 8,000 members today. There is difference in professional life in the 50s and 60s of the last century when the laws and the practice were very simple, though effective. But today with the increasingly important role of the Chartered Accountant in the core subjects of Taxation and Auditing and the new fields of International Accounting & Auditing Standards, IFRS and International Taxation, FEMA, audits of Public Sector Companies, Banks and Insurance, with greater expectation by the C&AG and the new pastures of Government Accounting, Local Bodies and the whole gamut of Indirect Taxation covering Excise & Customs Duties, Modvat and Service Tax – the list is endless and the ever-increasing need for continuing professional education is amply served by the Bombay Chartered Accountants’ Society.

In view of the knowledge required on several fronts, the need of the hour is specialisation and bigger firms rendering services in all directions under one roof. This has witnessed even the amalgamation and mergers of the big eight firms into big four firms today and merger of other middling firms to cope with the need of the professional services, raising a question whether there is scope for proprietary or small firms of two or three members. But my observation of the small firms in U.S. and even European countries leads me to conclude that even the smaller firms have the scope for practising with the advantage of greater personal attention and intimate rapport with the clients and specialisation by the firms and partners only in some subjects. Time alone will show whether this prediction will turn out to be right or wrong.

Clause 49 — The road ahead

Introduction :


It’s been some time now since Corporate Governance became
mandatory for listed companies in India vide Clause 49 of the Listing Agreement.
The post-Enron era has evidenced significant development in Corporate Governance
across the globe, though it is still evolving. The raison d’etre of
‘governance codes’ is the Agency Theory on which, the edifice of companies is
built. To what extent the existing model of Clause 49 has been successful in
addressing this Agency theory in India, is yet to be seen. However, there are
still certain areas where there is scope of improvement.

This article identifies and highlights areas wherein Clause
49 is in variance with international governance practices and also tries to
bring out certain inherent limitations in the existing clause. It tries to
highlight potential areas of improvement and articulate the next stage which
Clause 49 needs to embrace in order to improve the governance practice in India.

Splitting the roles of Chairman and CEO :

The basic objective of corporate governance is to segregate
the functions of governing the company and managing the company. This is done by
establishing a governing body (alias the Board) and giving it adequate
independence to direct and supervise the actions of management. To strengthen
its independence, the governing body is constituted through a mix of internal
and external parties. Board’s independence is a sine qua non for
effective governance.

Clause 49 does make demarcation between Governing Body and
Managing Body; this ensures independence to an extent. But at the end of the
day, the leader of both the bodies is the same person i.e., the CEO.
Unlike the Combined Code in the UK, Clause 49 does not mandate splitting of
roles of Chairman and CEO. So in effect, the person responsible for managing the
company is also responsible for managing the Board — which further implies that
the functions of managing and governing are effectively in the hands of the same
person, thereby violating the basic principle of independence and concept of
corporate governance.

In theory, the Board and the Chairman are responsible to
critically evaluate and challenge the actions of the management and the CEO. But
in a scenario where the Chairman of the Board and CEO of the company is the same
person, the Chairman becomes responsible for evaluating his own performance and
challenging his own decisions, which at first instance sounds grotesque, if not
impudent. Albeit, there are other members also on the Board along with CEO, who
are responsible for ensuring independence — combining or not splitting two roles
does jeopardize and weaken the Board’s independence, particularly in Indian
context, where the Board Meetings are largely influenced and driven by its
Chairman making Board Meetings person-driven instead of process-driven. It has
been often evidenced that such meetings are largely led by the Chairman,
undermining and suppressing the roles of other independent directors who often
are fairly new on the Board and thereby putting the Chairman-cum-CEO in further
advantageous position.

Clause A.2 of the Combined Code succinctly provides that
‘There should be a clear division of responsibilities at the head of the company
between the running of the Board and the executive responsibility for the
running of the company’s business. No one individual should have unfettered
powers of decision’.


It further states — The division of responsibilities
between the chairman and chief executive should be clearly established, set out
in writing and agreed by the Board. A chief executive should not go on to be
chairman of the same company. If exceptionally a Board decides that a chief
executive should become chairman, the Board should consult major shareholders in
advance and should set out its reasons to shareholders at the time of the
appointment and in the next annual report.


While the UK law makers do endorse that splitting of roles is
an indispensable component of Board’s independence, they further go to criticise
the consolidated model on the grounds that management might be more tempted, and
more able, to withhold information (which generally means bad news) from the
Board, thereby reducing its ability to assess the company’s performance.
Independence apart, many argue that one person can’t carry out two such
increasingly difficult jobs. Separating them frees the CEO to focus on running
the business and the Chairman to discharge the board’s expanding
responsibilities.

In the United Kingdom, about 95% of all FTSE 350 companies
adhere to the principle that different people should hold each of these roles.
In the United States, by contrast, nearly 80% of S&P 500 companies combine them
— a proportion that has barely changed in the past 15 years.

Clause 49 partly addresses the issue of independence by
mandating that if the Chairman is an executive director, at least fifty percent
of the Board members shall comprise of ‘independent directors’. In case, the
Chairman is a non-executive director, then the minimum number of independent
directors shall be one-third. However, the clause does not mandate that only an
independent director shall be chairman of the Board and that there should be a
clear division of responsibilities between the running of the Board and running
of the company’s business.

Suggestive prescription :

Separating the two roles in itself, is not the panacea for
making Boards more effective and even after such separation there is no
guarantee of improvement in the Board’s performance; however, such separation
will indubitably add to the Board’s independence and empower it to critically
challenge the actions of management and CEO. Clause 49 should mandate the
separation of the two functions; in other words, the Chairman of the Board and
CEO of the company shall be two distinct persons.

Mandating whistleblowing and empowering whistleblowers :

Whether one agrees or not, whistleblowers have a
crucial role to play in corporate governance and can save a corporate
titanic from hitting an ice berg by striking the bells at the right
time. The Enron saga and its downturn started with whistleblowers.

Clause
49 does have a provision for a whistleblower policy, but the provision
is recommendatory in nature. While many of large cap companies have
voluntarily formulated a whistleblower policy, not many companies listed
on stock exchange have a ‘whistleblower’ policy.

Even in those
companies which have implemented a ‘Whistleblower’ policy, it is evident
that the Policy, akin to many other policies, becomes a mere paper
document posted on company’s website. The Policy therefore, is
implemented in letter and not in spirit. There are very few instances on
record wherein the policy has been able to bring out the issues buried
underground and take apposite actions. In majority of companies, the
employees are either oblivious of such a policy or are not willing to
take its recourse and have selected silence as an option.

To boil down, there are two reasons for whistle-blowing not being effective in the Indian scenario

Firstly, having a formal whistleblowing policy is still not mandatory.

Secondly,
the existing corporate culture does not support or rather empower an
employee to stand up and blow the whistle – it is cultural and other
soft factors that impede an employee from coming forward and blowing the
whistle despite formal protection available under the policy.

Whistle
blowers normally lose their jobs and find difficult to get employment
elsewhere. Even in the U.S. Government, whistleblowers get shunted
(source: Financial Express, 12-5-2008).

The cultural deficit
exists because there is lack of adequate commitment and communication
from the Board and management who are reluctant to empower its employees
– in some cases, the reluctance is deliberate while in other cases it
is due to the fact that implementing such a policy requires change, and
any change, particularly cultural change, is difficult to implement.
While latter cases can be pardoned, the former cannot be; deliberate
reluctance from management and Board might be due to fear that such a
policy may act as a key to ‘Pandora’s Box’ and may become’ Achilles
Heel’ of the management by exposing its wrong deeds.

Suggestive prescription:
Following is the suggestive prescription to make whistleblowing an effective tool of corporate governance in Indian scenario.

Giving regulatory hue:
At
the outset,’ prescribing a ‘whistleblower’ policy should be made
mandatory. This will at least initiate formal adoption of the policy and
its implementation, at least in letter, if not in spirit. The auditors/
company secretary, while issuing certificate on corporate governance,
should be required to comment on the adequacy of such a policy.

Allow Anonymous Whistle Blowing:
Despite
the existence of formal policy and conducive culture, employees don’t
consider this tool as a preferred option to highlight wrongdoing within
the organisation. One way to overcome this impediment is to allow
anonymous whistleblowing. Under anonymous reporting, the whistleblower
is not required to disclose his/her identity at the initial stage. Being
anonymous provides an innate protection to the complainant.

This
mechanism however has a risk of impudent issues being reported to Board
and the Board may find itself being mingled among trivial issues which
could have been easily resolved by the management. Also, anonymous
whistleblowing is feasible only at the initial stage of screening of the
issue; once the investigation begins, the anonymous whistleblower
should be willing to come out and testify as a witness. As a matter of
fact the anonymous whistleblower in an anonymous complaint should offer
to do so. In the absence of his willingness, unless a prima facie case
exists, it is likely that the enquiry would be dropped.

Allowing external whistleblowing :
Enact
a law as in the Philippines, where there is a separate law called
‘Whistleblower Protection Act’, which provides legal protection to
whistleblowers for voicing against corruption practices within an
organisation.

Raise the issue with external independent agency,
like company’s auditors who whilst conducting their audit would take
cognizance of such an issue. However, the problem with the above model
is – once a fraud/corruption issue is reported to an external agency, it
becomes rhetoric and has the risk of sabotage to company’s reputation.

Extending Whistleblower policy to other stakeholders:
Whistleblowing,
as a tool to disclose misconduct and graft, is used in a restrictive
sense and embraces only employees within the company including
directors. Under the existing model of whistleblowing, it is only the
employees who are empowered to blow whistle.

An organisation
constitutes of several other stakeholders apart from employees and
includes suppliers, customers, government and local community. Quite
often these stakeholders are confronted with an act of corruption or
misconduct while dealing with the company, especially the suppliers and
customers. Such transactions are not reported by internal employees to
conceal their unscrupulous deeds. In such a scenario the external
stakeholders, say, suppliers or customers should have an opportunity to
disclose such scheming conduct to company’s governing body. There should
be some mechanism whereby even the external stakeholders have an
opportunity of blowing whistle to the Board of Directors.

The
mechanism suggested is akin to ‘grievance cell’ found in many companies,
where the customers have a right to file a complaint in case of any
dis-satisfaction. However, unlike a grievance cell, under this mechanism
an external stakeholder has the right to report any misconduct on the
part of company to the Board of Directors.

It is hoped that
extending the whistleblower mechanism to other stakeholders will promote
greater transparency in company’s conduct of business and improve its
value among the stakeholders at large.

Cons of the idea:

Despite
its benefits, the idea of extending whistle-blowing model to other
stakeholders has not been widely acclaimed. One contention is – what
would an external stakeholder gain by whistle blowing particularly when
he himself has benefited from such fraudulent conduct. However, the
argument against this contention is that corporate governance is meant
to protect interest of all the stakeholders and not just the
shareholders or employees; by disclosing solecism conduct he not only
benefits the company, but also protects his own interest and long-term
value; in fact, it becomes his ethical responsibility to make such
disclosure, as he is also economically associated with the organisation.

It
is also argued that the above mechanism may lead to trivial issues
being escalated and may in fact become a mode to express dissatisfaction
rather than expose misconduct. Embedded therein is also the risk of it
being deliberately misused by external stakeholders whose relationship
with the company has soured.

Evaluating performance of non-executive and independent directors:

The
primary role of non-executive and independent directors on the Board is
to critically challenge the actions and decisions of Executive Board
and management. Apart from maintaining independence and integrity, they
are also expected to provide fresh insights and bring their
competencies, thereby enhancing the value to stakeholders.

Evaluation of NED under Clause 49 is currently recommendatory. Such evaluation is necessary for the following reasons:

1. To determine whether a non-executive director has delivered on his/her expectations.
2. To determine whether he has contributed to enhance overall effectiveness of the Board.
3. To determine whether a particular director should continue on the Board.
4. To link remuneration of non-executive directors to their performance.

In
the current scenario, majority of the Indian companies do not have a
formal process in place to evaluate performance of non-executive
directors. The primary reason is that:

  • having a formal evaluation process is not currently mandatory
  • it is difficult to define/prescribe performance criteria objectively.


Suggestive prescription:

The
evaluation can be done by establishing a peer review committee which
should consist of Board members other than the director whose
performance is being evaluated. The peer review committee can meet on
periodic basis (say, on bi-annual or annual basis) to evaluate
performance of directors.

The following are the suggestive
criteria for evaluating performance of non-executive and independent
directors. The criteria are only illustrative and may vary depending on
requirement of each Board:


Practical Case: Infosys Technologies Limited
Currently,
there are very few companies in India which have voluntarily instituted
a formal mechanism for evaluation of non-executive members. For
instance – In Infosys, the performance of NED is evaluated through ‘peer
evaluation process’, wherein each external Board member is required to
present before the entire Board on how he has performed or added value;
the performance is evaluated on a scale of 1 to 10 based on set
performance criteria. The criteria used by Infosys are:

  • Ability to contribute to and monitor corporate governance practice

  • Ability to contribute by introducing international best practices to address top management issues

  • Active participation in long-term strategic planning

  • Commitment to fulfilment of director’s obligations and fiduciary responsibilities – this includes participation and attendance.

Conclusion:
The
aspects covered present potential pitfalls and areas of improvement in
existing Clause 49. While the suggestive prescriptions are not foolproof
and exhaustive, the purpose is to trigger a thought process and
initiate ‘deliberation’, which can lead to strengthening of corporate
governance.

Worldwide Tax View — Substance over form : Where is the limit ?

Article

Introduction :


Laws and regulations are the intentions of legislators
captured in words. The challenge is to choose a formulation that captures such
intentions in a way that it is clear and covering exactly those situations that
are desired to be covered. The subjects to the law should be able to understand
the rules, and also to trust that once the rules are interpreted in the
appropriate way, it is clear which situation is covered by the rules and which
one is not. Thus, the subjects can accordingly structure their behaviour or in
other words : Choose the right form for their actions.

To ensure non-discriminatory enforcement of laws and
regulations, choosing a formal approach is very logical. It rules out
arbitrariness or at least mitigates the same. In other words, the form of a
situation — a transaction, determines the legal consequences. For long, most
countries have used the formal approach.

However, more and more countries have come to the realisation
that taxpayers were choosing forms for their transactions that led them to a
beneficial tax treatment. This may and does in practice, lead to undesired
behaviour. Especially in cases where the form of the transaction has no or
little connection with its actual substance and such form is chosen merely to
get a better tax result, the ability to look beyond the form may be justified.
An example could be where a parent company provides funding to its 100 percent
loss-making subsidiary company, without a repayment obligation, and without
charging interest. Calling such funding a loan, and not (quasi) equity, would
not do justice to the substance of the transaction.

What should be avoided, however, would be a requalification
of any transaction to a form that puts the taxpayer in the worst position.
Striking the balance is not easy.

The approach of a few countries towards the issue of
substance over form has been reflected below, to provide a better framework for
understanding the issue.

Country overview :

United States of America (US) :

The US has included several rules in its legislation to
codify the substance-over-form concept. Illustrations include : The rule on
conduit financing and on domestic reversed hybrid entities.

The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) is permitted to re-characterise
cross-border conduit financing transactions, including back-to-back loans which
are undertaken for tax avoidance purposes. Specifically, the IRS is authorised
to disregard an intermediate company in a multiparty financing arrangement if
the company is used as part of a tax avoidance plan, for example, if the company
is put in place to take advantage of reduced withholding under a US tax treaty.
In that case, the overall transaction will be analysed without recognition being
given to the conduit entity and the US domestic withholding rate or that of
another tax treaty will be applied.

The Domestic Reversed Hybrid rules, finalised in 2002,
provide a check on certain abusive double-dip financing arrangements between
related parties. If a payment from a domestic entity to a related Domestic
Reversed Hybrid entity is treated as a dividend under either US or foreign law,
and if the Domestic Reversed Hybrid entity makes a payment to a related foreign
interest holder which is deductible in the US and entitled to a reduced treaty
rate, then the payment by the Domestic Reversed Hybrid entity is treated as a
dividend. Thus, there will be no deduction and the treaty withholding rate will
be governed by the Article relating to dividends.

The IRS in the US and the US courts have consistently taken
the view that transactions are to be taxed according to their economic substance
rather than their legal form (Goldstein v. Commissioner, 364 F.2d 734 (2d
Cir. 1966).

In the matter of Burger King v. State Tax Comm’n, (416
NE2d 1024) (NY Ct. Apps. 1980), the Tax Commission assessed a restaurant sales
tax on purchases of packaging material. The assessment was based on the fact
that the restaurant did not charge its customers a line item on the receipt for
packaging. Based on this, the state argued, the packaging was not being ‘resold’
as required for exemption from sales tax. In ruling for the restaurant, the
court overlooked the form of the transaction (i.e., the absence of a line
item for packaging on the customer receipt) and looked to the substance to
determine if a resale had occurred.

The Supreme Court, in F. & R. Lazarus & Co., (308 US 252)
(1939)
, summarised the doctrine as follows : In the field of taxation,
administrators of the laws and the courts are concerned with substance and
realities, and formal written documents are not rigidly binding.

China :

The tax authorities introduced general anti-avoidance rules
effective from January 1, 2008. The Chinese tax authorities are authorised to
make adjustments to arrangements that can result in a reduction of tax payable
and which are made without any justifiable commercial or business reason.
According to the draft administrative regulations on special tax adjustments,
the following may result in the involved enterprise becoming a target of an
investigation : abuse of tax incentives; treaty shopping; abuse of form of
organisation; frequent trading with companies located in a tax haven; and any
other business arrangements without bona fide commercial purposes.

The form and substance of an arrangement will be reviewed.
The tax authority may redefine the arrangement based on the business substance,
cancel an enterprise’s tax benefits, and re-identify or reallocate revenue,
costs, income, losses and tax deductions between the involved parties. An
anti-avoidance case must be reported to the State Administration of Taxation
(SAT) for its approval.

Germany :

Under the German law (S. 42 of the AO – Tax Procedure Act) substance over form is applied if an in-appropriate legal structure is chosen that leads to a tax advantage for which the taxpayer cannot provide significant non-tax reasons.

A legal structure is considered inappropriate if the taxpayer or a third party generates a tax benefit that is not intended by the law. The amended Section also includes a clear hierarchy, i.e., specific anti-abuse rules according to applicable tax laws have to be applied on a step-by-step basis, after which the general anti-abuse provision can become applicable.

As the legal definition of ‘abuse of form’ is some-what vague, the German tax courts had established a long-term practice based on numerous cases regarding ‘base companies’ which are placed in a low-tax jurisdiction and have no or only insignificant substance.

The recent German anti-treaty-shopping rule (5. SOd EStG) increases the substance requirements for non-German companies to benefit from withholding tax relief, in particular with respect to dividends or royalties provided for by the double tax treaties (DTT) or EU directive. A foreign company is in general entitled to neither full nor partial tax relief if:

  • there are no economic or other relevant reasons for its interposition,

  • not more than 10% of its aggregate gross revenue for the relevant financial year is generated from the company’s own economic activities, or

  • it fails to participate in the open market place with business operations that are adequately equipped for the business purpose pursued by the company.

United Kingdom (UK):

In Furniss (H.M. Inspector of Taxes) v. Dawson, House of Lords, (55 TC 324) (1984) (AC 474), the case involved a disposition of shares by family members, who disposed of shares in two family companies to an investment company incorporated in the Isle of Man. The shares were subsequently sold to another company. The reason for interposing the Isle of Man company was to provide capital gains tax relief. On the question whether the two transactions were in substance a single transaction, it was held that: In ascertaining the substance of a transaction, the courts must look at the entirety of a composite trans-action if it appears that it was designed and intended to be carried through as a whole. The court is not bound to take each step in isolation in order to ascertain the legal rights and liabilities of the tax-payer at the beginning and end of each step. The court can and should have regard to the result which the transaction as a whole was designed to achieve. Further, the court may disregard a transaction and treat it as fiscally a nullity even though there is a change in the legal position of the parties before and after the scheme is carried through, if that change can be regarded as a mere change of form with no enduring legal consequences.

In  Commissioners    of Inland    Revenue    v. Duke    of Westminster (19 TC 490, 520,524) (1936) (AC 1), it was held, as is commonly used as supporting comment in various commentaries on substance-over form matters, that: Every man is entitled if he can to order his affairs so that the tax incidence under the appropriate Acts is less than it otherwise would be. If he succeeds in ordering them so as to secure this result, then, however unappreciative the Commissioners of Inland Revenue or his fellow taxpayers may be of his ingenuity, he cannot be compelled to pay an increased tax.

In WT Ramsay Ltd. v. Commissioners of Inland Revenue, (54 TC 101) (1982) (AC 300), it was held that: If it can be seen that a document or transaction was intended to have effect as part of a nexus or series of transactions, or as an ingredient of a wider transaction intended as a whole, there is nothing in the doctrine to prevent it being so regarded. It is the task of the court to ascertain the legal nature of any transaction to which it is sought to attach a tax or a tax consequence, and if that emerges from a series or combination of transactions intended to operate as such, it is that series or combination which may be regarded.

The above ruling provides a logical summary of addressing the legal nature of each transaction in a series of transactions.

First, it established that there is nothing in the Westminster principle which compels a consideration of individual transactions separately from a preconceived chain or series of transactions of which they form merely a part.

Secondly, it established that where one finds a series of preconceived transactions which are entered upon solely for fiscal purposes and are clearly interconnected and mutually dependent upon one another, one should look at the overall transaction to ascertain what has been and what was intended to be achieved.

Thirdly, it established that if what one finds on such a consideration is that nothing whatsoever has been achieved because the individual steps taken cancel one another out, one is entitled then to ignore the fiscal consequences which might otherwise have resulted from each of those individual steps considered in isolation. That represents the substance of the general principle deducible from the decision.

In conclusion, the fact that transactions may be circulating or are merely paper transactions is further not conclusive. Thus, where no commercial purpose in relation to the transactions is evident apart from tax avoidance which in the absence of the transactions would have been payable, the series of transactions should be looked at as a whole in relation to intention and motivation.

Netherlands:

It is generally accepted that artificial or simulated transactions may be ignored by the tax administration and the Courts of Appeals through a determination of the facts rather than the form (substance over form).

In addition, there are two specific provisions to combat tax avoidance or evasion (i.e., transactions the main purpose of which is avoidance or evasion of tax) :

The just levying provision (richtige heffing), under which the legal act in dispute may be ignored for tax purposes. This procedure is subject to prior approval by the Ministry of Finance and involves a lot of administrative work. Therefore, this procedure is not commonly used.

The abuse of law doctrine (jraus legis), which is not laid down in tax law but is an interpretation method developed in case law. Under this provision, the spirit of the law is decisive, rather than the exact wording. The transaction in dispute may be converted to the closest equivalent which does not give rise to an abuse of law. The abuse of law procedure can be used only as a last resort.

In general, the results of both  procedures are the same for the taxpayer.

In the recent Supreme Court decision (HR 17-10-2008,42954), the merger exemption for capital duty payment was denied, as it was held that interposing an English company for a short period of time, and based on a pre-determined step plan, lacks a real function.

From a series of Supreme Court decisions it can be deduced that abuse of law is present when the chosen structure is predominantly or exclusively motivated by tax savings and also is in contradiction with the meaning of the law. If the motivation is exclusively to save tax, and no commercial justification for the chosen structure exists, abuse of law can be present as well. However, if the legislature has recognised a tax-saving route, but deliberately did not close this route, the courts are not inclined to apply the abuse of law doctrine.

India:

The most important Indian case addressing the substance-over-form question is without doubt McDowell and Co. Ltd. v. Commercial Tax Officer, (154 ITR 148) (SC). The case was about a mitigation of sales tax by having the buyers separately pay the excise duty, whereby such excise duty would not be included in the taxable basis for sales tax.

The Commercial Tax Officer was of the view that the excise duty paid directly to the Excise authorities or deposited directly in the State Exchequer in respect of Indian liquor by the buyers before removing the same from the distillery could be said to form part of the taxable turnover of the appellant distillery for the purpose of the Sales Tax Act.

The Court, however, came to the conclusion that excise duty did not go into the common till of McDowell and did not become a part of the circulating capital. Therefore, the Sales Tax authorities were not competent to include in the turnover of the appellant the excise duty which was not charged by it but was paid directly to the excise authorities by the buyers of the liquor.

The Supreme Court took the view that tax planning was legitimate so long as it was strictly within the four corners of the law and any ‘colourable’ device or dubious methods to minimise tax incidence were not legally permissible.

The Court reaffirmed the view of English cases while examining a legally valid transaction, and held that the Revenue should proceed objectively and not hypothetically attribute ‘motives’ behind the taxpayer’s action.

In the case of the Commissioner of Income-tax v. A. Raman and Co, (67 ITR 11,17) (SC), it was stated that: The law does not oblige a trader to make the maximum profit that he can get out of his trading transactions. Income which accrues to a trader is taxable in his hands. Income which he could have, but has not earned, is not made taxable as income accrued to him. Avoidance of tax liability by so arranging commercial affairs that charge of tax is distributed is not prohibited. A taxpayer may resort to a device to divert the income before it accrues or arises to him. Effectiveness of the device depends not upon considerations of morality, but on the operation of the Income-tax Act. Legislative injunction in tax statutes may not, except on peril of penalty, be violated, but may lawfully be circumvented.

In the case Bank of Chettinad Ltd. v. Commissioner of Income-tax, (8 ITR 522), it was stated that: The tax authority is entitled and is indeed bound to determine the true legal relation resulting from a transaction. If the parties have chosen to conceal by a device the legal relation, it is open to the tax authorities to unravel the device and to determine the true character of the relationship. But the legal effect of a transaction cannot be displaced by probing into the ‘substance of the transaction’.

In Simon in Latilla v. I.R.C. (11 ITR Suppl. 78, 79) (HL), it was stated that: Tax planning may be legitimate, provided it is within the framework of law. Colourable devices cannot be part of tax planning and it is wrong to encourage or entertain the belief that it is honourable to avoid the payment of tax by resorting to dubious methods. It is the obligation of every citizen to pay their taxes honestly without resorting to subterfuges.

In CIT v. Abhayananda Rath Family Benefit Trust, (255 ITR 436) (Orissa HC), the assessee set up a trust for his minor son’s benefit. The income of the minor child from the trust was to be accumulated during his minority. In other words the income of the minor child from the transferred assets was not includible in the total income of the assessee. However, the contention of the Revenue that the trust has been created by the assessee for the purpose of avoidance of tax was rejected by the Court, as ‘Evading payment of tax’ is quite different from ‘tax planning’.

According to the Orissa High Court, a person may plan his finances in such a manner, strictly within the four corners of the tax statute that his tax liability is minimised or made nil. If this is done and observed strictly in accordance with and taking advantage of the provisions contained in the Act, by no stretch of imagination can it be said that payment of tax has been evaded.

In the context of payment of tax, ‘evasion’ necessarily means, ‘to try illegally to avoid paying tax’. But, as in the instant case, a trust has been created in accordance with law and creation of such a trust is not hit by any of the provisions contained in the Act.

Analysis:

It appears from the above, that there is no single approach towards the issue of substance over form. A clear tendency exists for tax authorities to try and counter any kind of undesired outcome (in their eyes) of a certain piece of legislation by applying the substance-over-form doctrine. This puts, more than in many other situations, a strong responsibility on the shoulders of the judicial system to protect the rights of the taxpayer.

The following common denominator can, however, be found in most countries: If a taxpayer has multiple avenues available to structure his transaction, he is free to choose the most tax-efficient avenue, provided a certain level of commercial justification for the choice exists, and tax considerations are not the only reason.

The OECD leaves it to the individual countries to introduce anti-abuse legislation, legislation that can be applied without interference by the OECD model convention (and vice versa). The OECD does subscribe to the concept of (economic) substance over (legal) form.

Looking at the current situation in India, the Indian tax authorities are clearly exploring the limits to the substance-over-form concept with their secondary line of argumentation in the Vodafone case, which involves an attempt to lift the corporate veil of the companies that were interposed between the Hong Kong ultimate parent and the Indian operating company. This seems to indicate that the tax authorities want to go beyond the earlier decision in the Union of India v. Azadi Bachao Andolan, (263 ITR 706) (SC), where the existence, and beneficial ownership for claiming benefits under the treaty between India and Mauritius, of a Mauritian group company were respected based on a valid certificate of residence of that company issued by the appropriate Mauritius authorities. From Mukundrary K. Shah v. Commissioner of Income tax, (143 Taxman 743) (Calcutta HC)t and Deputy Commissioner of Income tax v. GVS Investment (p) Ltd, (92 TTJ 706)( Delhi ITAT) a principle emerges that the corporate veil can be lifted only where the transaction is found to be sham, bogus or contrived. The corporate veil can be lifted so as to expose any person to liability, who has committed a fraud upon the public from their sheltered position. In addition, from Mafatlal Holdings Ltd v. Additional Commissioner of Income-tax, (85 TTJ 82) (Mumbai ITAT)1 and Additional Commissioner of Income-tax v. Nestle India, (94 ITJ 53) (Delhi ITAT), it is clear that the onus is on the tax authorities to prove that a transaction is sham or bogus, before resorting to lifting the corporate veil.

Conclusion:

The substance-over-form doctrine is used most often in an anti-abuse context by the tax authorities. This implies that it should be applied with care. It should also be applied in a consistent way. A requalification of only certain elements of a transaction, to come to the maximum tax cost for the tax-payer, will not do. The substance of the total trans-action structure should be reviewed. Only when the chosen form is illegal or legal, but lacking commercial reality and just aimed at receiving a beneficial tax treatment, a challenge based on the substance-over-form doctrine should succeed. And, also the tax authorities are required to stay within the four corners of the law.

Gaps in GAAP – Guidance Note on Accounting for Employee Share-based Payments

Accounting Standards

The Guidance Note allows either the fair value method or the
intrinsic method to account for employee share-based payments. The manner in
which the Guidance Note is drafted is based on the fair valuation principle
(more or less on the basis of IFRS). The intrinsic method is inadequately
covered by a sweeping paragraph (see below), without thought to the unintended
consequences that it may cause.

“Accounting for employee share-based payment plans dealt with
heretobefore is based on the fair value method. There is another method known as
the ‘Intrinsic Value Method’ for valuation of employee share-based payment
plans. Intrinsic value, in the case of a listed company, is the amount by which
the quoted market price of the underlying share exceeds the exercise price of an
option. For example, an option with an exercise price of Rs.100 on an equity
share whose current quoted market price is Rs.125, has an intrinsic value of
Rs.25 per share on the date of its valuation. If the quoted market price is not
available on the grant date, then the share price nearest to that date is taken.
In the case of a non-listed company, since the shares are not quoted on a stock
exchange, value of its shares is determined on the basis of a valuation report
from an independent valuer. For accounting for employee share-based payment
plans, the intrinsic value may be used, mutatis mutandis, in place of the
fair value.” (paragraph 40 of the Guidance Note)

When the above oversimplified paragraph is applied in the
context of some aspects of ESOP, it could result in certain unexpected results.
Let’s explain this with the help of a small example where a share settlement is
changed to cash settlement on vesting.

Now, let’s say one ESOP is granted that will vest at the end
of 3 years at an exercise price of Rs.90. At the date of grant the fair value of
the share is also Rs.90. The value of the option is estimated to be Rs.30. In
this example, if the fair value model is applied, Rs.10 will be charged in each
of the next three years. If the intrinsic model is applied, there will be no
charge.

So far so good, but now things will get a little complicated
as we move from a share-settled ESOP scheme to a cash-settled ESOP scheme. As
per the Guidance Note, “if an enterprise settles in cash, vested shares or stock
options, the payment made to the employee should be accounted for as a deduction
from the relevant equity account (e.g., Stock Options Outstanding
Account) except to the extent that the payment exceeds the fair value of the
shares or stock options, measured at the settlement date. Any such excess
should be recognised as an expense.” (paragraph 28 of the Guidance Note)

Assume in the above example, the share price is Rs.150 at
vesting date (end of the third year). The Company collects exercise price Rs.90
from the employee and pays Rs.150 (cash settlement). As already discussed above,
for accounting of employee share-based payment plans, the intrinsic value may be
used, mutatis mutandis, in place of the fair value. The requirement of
the Guidance Note will be changed as follows (if intrinsic rather than fair
value method is used) : “if an enterprise settles in cash, vested shares or
stock options, the payment made to the employee should be accounted for as a
deduction from the relevant equity account (e.g., Stock Options
Outstanding Account) except to the extent that the payment exceeds the intrinsic
value of the shares or stock options, measured at the settlement date.
Any such excess should be recognised as an expense.”

The payment of Rs.150 does not exceed the intrinsic value of
the shares at the settlement date, i.e. Rs.150. Hence the strange
conclusion is that there is no excess which needs to be recognised as an
expense.

This is strange because had the ESOP been a cash-settled
employee share-based payment plan from inception, the Company would have
charged Rs.60 as per the Guidance Note over 3 years of the scheme (see Appendix
IV of the Guidance Note). However, it appears that if a company has a
share-based plan to start with, but is then eventually settled in cash, no
charge is required in the profit and loss account.

The above dichotomy has arisen primarily because of an
unintended interplay between paragraph 28 and paragraph 40 of the Guidance Note,
which was predominantly written to provide guidance on fair value accounting of
ESOP, with the intrinsic method being inadequately addressed by a sweeping
paragraph (paragraph 40), which has caused a GAP in GAAP.


This issue needs to be immediately addressed by the Institute of Chartered
Accountants of India.

 

levitra

Gaps in GAAP – Reverse acquisitions

Accounting Standards

In some business combinations, commonly referred to as
reverse acquisitions, the acquirer is the entity whose equity interests have
been acquired and the issuing entity is the acquiree. This might be the case
when, for example, a private entity arranges to have itself ‘acquired’ by a
smaller public entity as a means of obtaining a stock exchange listing. Although
legally the issuing public entity is regarded as the parent and the private
entity is regarded as the subsidiary, the legal subsidiary is the acquirer if it
has the power to govern the financial and operating policies of the legal parent
so as to obtain benefits from its activities. Commonly the acquirer is the
larger entity.


Example :

A Ltd. a big private company wants to become a public entity,
but does not want to register its equity shares. In order to accomplish that, A
Ltd. gets itself acquired by B Ltd., a smaller public entity.

A
Ltd.  

B
Ltd.

Private company Legal
subsidiary Accounting acquirer
Public company Legal
holding Accounting acquiree

Under International Financial Reporting Standard-3, in a
reverse acquisition, the cost of the business combination is deemed to have been
incurred by the legal subsidiary (i.e., the acquirer for accounting
purposes) in the form of equity instruments issued to the owners of the legal
parent (i.e., the acquiree for accounting purposes). If the published
price of the equity instruments of the legal subsidiary is used to determine the
cost of the combination, a calculation shall be made to determine the number of
equity instruments the legal subsidiary would have had to issue to provide the
same percentage ownership interest of the combined entity to the owners of the
legal parent as they have in the combined entity as a result of the reverse
acquisition. The fair value of the number of equity instruments so calculated
shall be used as the cost of the combination.

Example


Balance sheet before business combination

  C (CU) D (CU)
Net
Assets
1,100 2,000

Total
1,100 2,000

Equity
100 shares 300
  60 Shares 600

Retained Earning
800 1,400

Total
1,100 2,000

C issues 2.5 shares in exchange for each ordinary share of D.
Therefore C issues 150 shares in exchange of all 60 shares of D. Therefore,
legally C is the acquirer. However, C is in substance an accounting acquiree
(assume). Fair value of one equity share of D at date of acquisition is Currency
Units (CU) 50. Fair value of C’s identifiable net assets as at date of
acquisition is CU1,300.

Response :



  •  In the exchange, D’s shareholders own 60% of the combined entity (150/250).
  • If the business combination would have taken place in the form of D issuing equity to shareholders of C, in the same exchange ratio, it would have issued 40 shares (i.e., 100/2.5).
  • Thus, cost of business combination would be CU2000 (40 X CU50).
  • Goodwill = CU2000 — CU1300, i.e., CU700.
  • Consolidated Balance sheet of C Limited & Group after the acquisition:
Consolidated financial statements prepared following a reverse acquisition shall be issued under the name of the legal parent, but described in the notes as a continuation of the financial statements of the legal subsidiary (i.e., the acquirer for accounting purposes). Because such consolidated financial statements represent a continuation of the financial statements of the legal subsidiary:

(a)    the assets and liabilities of the legal subsidiary shall be recognised and measured in those consolidated financial statements at their pre-combination carrying amounts.

(b)    the retained earnings and other equity balances recognised in those consolidated financial statements shall be the retained earnings and other equity balances of the legal subsidiary immediately before the business combination.

(c)    the amount recognised as issued equity instruments in those consolidated financial statements shall be determined by adding to the issued equity of the legal subsidiary immediately before the business combination the cost of the combination. However, the equity structure appearing in those consolidated financial statements (i.e., the number and type of equity instruments issued) shall reflect the equity structure of the legal parent, including the equity instruments issued by the legal parent to effect the combination.

(d)    comparative information presented in those consolidated financial statements shall be that of the legal subsidiary.

As can be seen from the above, the accounting for reverse acquisition under IFRS is based on identifying the true acquirer. Goodwill is determined on the basis that the accounting acquiree is fair valued, considering the accounting acquirer has paid the consideration. Indian GAAP does not recognise the concept of reverse acquisition at all, and hence it is high time that Indian GAAP adopts IFRS-3 standard on business combination.

Risk Management

Article

Introduction :


1.1 Over the years, risk and its management have been the
focus of human activity. Risk coexists with change, and it has been a facet of
human life whether it is culture, race, religion, personal life, political,
economic or social activities . . . . risk is an inseparable part of all human
endeavour.

1.2 However, depending on the prevailing attitudes and the
ground situation, in terms of the environment, setting, context and background,
risk has had a lesser or greater importance depending on the role it had to
play. In times of prosperity, growth and wellbeing, risk was and still often is
the farthest from human thought. That it applies equally to the modern world is
evidenced by the severe turbulence and swings and the consequent losses
witnessed in the stock market in the recent past when risk was not top of the
mind for the players in the financial market.

1.3 The current heightened interest and importance of risk
assessment is due to the unique situation that the world is in. Unlike in the
past, in times of the industrial revolution, which had its fair share of risks,
the modern world in the era of Information and Communication technology is a
globalised and networked world where the forces of disintermediation,
virtualisation, convergence, knowledge management and empowerment are at play.
The scope, scale and speed of operations in modern times are far beyond what was
even thought of in the past, the shortened fuse wire of decisions and the
worldwide impact of local actions and reactions are extremely difficult to
predict.

1.4 This transformation has on the one hand magnified
rewards, but on the other hand, has also enhanced risk. Enhanced risk is the
price we pay in this modern globalised world.

Concept of risk :

2.1 The concept of risk has been attempted to be captured in
many ways, but the basic definition still is relevant.

2.2 Webster’s defines risk as — possibility of loss
or injury (peril), someone or something that creates
or suggests a hazard, the chance of loss or the perils of the subject matter of
an insurance contract, the chance that an investment will lose value.

2.3 The word entered the English Language circa 1661 from the
French word ‘risqué’ and the Italian word ‘risco’.

2.4 Risk is imbedded when there is an event with more than
one possible outcome, that is, resulting in either desirable or undesirable
consequences. Each outcome has a probability of occurrence depending on the
circumstances. It is thus a potential event and not the loss itself.

2.5 In fact what may be perfectly normal and beneficial to
one in a given set of circumstances may be fraught with danger and risk to
another in the same or different setting. Thus we have the probability of early
bird catching the worm, and the possibility of early worm getting caught, but
the decision whether to be early or late depends on whether you are the ‘bird’
or the ‘worm’.

Attitude to risk :

2.6 Risk, hence, is a word of many meanings. It means
different things to different people. This perception of risk as a source of
‘threat or peril’, or as a ‘challenge and an opportunity’, depends on one’s
attitude to life and risk — that of a ‘risk averter’ or a ‘risk taker’. Risk
comes in all sizes and shapes from getting caught in rain without an umbrella
and catching pneumonia, — sickness- facing life-threatening situations like
natural calamities and of course normal and abnormal business risks involving
loss of money and reputation.

Types of risk :

3.1 An organisation faces many types of risks. These risks
range from strategy and directional risks at the one end to risks in day-to-day
operations at the other.

3.2 If one were to look at the enterprise as a whole, one is
faced with strategic risks that cover strategic issues, business
decisions and the business environment. Macro issues like political, economic,
social situation and competitor activity often affect and influence these risks.
Operational risks deal with operational issues including manufacturing
and service provision, execution, people issues, administration, communications,
etc. At a different level there are other external risks that exist in
the business environment that relate to markets, availability of finance and
changing value of money – forex. A chart showing an overview of these risks is
given in Appendix 1.

3.3 There are thus many ways of classifying risks — according
to their type or even as Systematic Risk and Unsystematic Risk.

3.4 Systematic risk covers interest rate, reinvestment rate,
purchasing power, market exchange rate and political risk, whereas unsystematic
risk covers business, financial, default, credit, liquidity and event risks.

3.5 Apart from these, risk can be physical, psychological,
social/economic, legal and even risk involving confidentiality.

4. Risk — its importance :


Risk has been with us since the beginning of time. Why is it that addressing, comprehending, analysing and managing it has become so important today? The most important reason for the increased importance of risk is that we have started appreciating the fact that uncertainty and its resultant negative impact on business is increasing with globalisation. Risk is becoming more important than ever before, because changes are rapid and all pervasive that it requires preparedness and quick reflexes to launch pre-emptive moves to counter emerging, altered, scenarios. At the same time both stakes and expectations are increasing. A time has’ come when Gandhiji’s words of wisdom, “there is enough for every man’s need, but not for every man’s greed” are palpable today.

Contributing factors – Some  examples:

5.1  Legislation is  becoming tougher:

  • Legislation is now more  extensive  – from compensation to environmental laws, third-party liability to PIL’s, and laws granting compensation for corporate wrongs are becoming stricter.

  • Legislation is more stringent – Corporate Governance – clause 49 of the listing agreement and SEBI rules are continuously reviewed and often amended. In the U.S.A. it is the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

  • Labour  Laws :

Risk assessment is necessary to avert legal liability – esp. in areas of health and safety.

5.2 Insurance is more expensive and difficult to obtain:

  • Insurance  is no longer  cheaply  available.

  • Open-ended  cover  is not widely available.

  • Insurance companies expect and require clients to manage risks on their own and do not offer a blanket cover.

  • Insurer does not compensate full loss even if the claim is accepted.

  • Insurance payouts are slow and difficult to obtain.

  • Many risks are not covered, such as intangibles like loss of goodwill, reputation and brand equity.

  • Insurance ultimately is reactive and not a proactive way of mitigating risk.

5.3 Customer – Attitudes:

  • Clients want to pass on risks to suppliers and service providers and want to de-risk their own business.

  • Business is more aware of consumer awareness and this has led to claims and litigation.

  • Shareholders are more aware of risks – affecting business value and therefore increased risk reflects in lower stock values.

5.4  Public awareness:

People and the society at large expect higher standards of probity in corporate behaviour, which means that companies have to manage ‘corruption risk’.

6. Response  Management’s attitude:

  • Professional and pro active managements promote risk management.

  • Managements are wiser, from past incidents and want risk management practices in place.

  • With the advent of Global Corporation, risk has become internationalised. Corporations face global concerns and short fuse wire of decisions have a greater impact on corporate bottom lines.

  • Privatisation – high-risk infrastructure sectors are also now in the private domain leading to greater understanding and provisioning for related business risks.


The source of risk:

7.1 Risk arises due to imperfect knowledge stemming from lack of complete or perfect information about certain facts and events on the one hand and the uncertainty and unpredictability of results of specific inputs and actions, on the other. Risk is contextual and its impact varies depending on the underlying situation and ground realities obtaining in a given situation. It also increases if you are dealing with third-party assets.

7.2 Risk is also determined by actions and moves of the associate and/or adversary, for example, in a zero sum or similar game. The well-known game Prisoner’s Dilemma is an example.

Prisoners’ dilemma:

The game known as the Prisoner’s Dilemma got its name from the following hypothetical situation : imagine two criminals arrested under the suspicion of having committed a crime together. However, the police do not have sufficient proof in order to have them convicted. The two prisoners are isolated from each other, and the police visit each of them and offer a deal: the one who offers’ evidence against the other one will be freed. If none of them accepts the offer, they are in fact cooperating against the police, and both of them will get only a small punishment because of lack of proof. They both gain. However, if one of them betrays the other one by confessing to the police, the defector will gain more since he is freed; the one who remained silent, on the other hand, will receive the full punishment, since he did not help the police, and there is sufficient proof. If both betray, both will be punished, but less severely than if they had refused to talk. The dilemma resides in the fact that each prisoner has a choice between only two options, but cannot make a good decision without knowing what the other one will do. The problem with the prisoner’s dilemma is that if both decision-makers were purely rational, they would never cooperate. Indeed, rational decision-making means that you make the decision which is best for you whatever the other actor chooses. Suppose the other one would defect, then it is rational to defect yourself: you won’t gain anything, but if you do not defect you will be stuck with a loss by way of being punished when the other goes scot-free. Suppose the other one would cooperate, then you will gain anyway, but you will gain more if you do not cooperate, so here too the rational choice is to defect. The problem is that if both . actors are rational, both will decide to defect, and none of them will gain anything. However, if both would ‘irrationally’ decide to cooperate, both would gain by being let off with minimum penalty. Thus this well-known game representing the Prisoner’s Dilemma – “If both prisoners cooperate (do not blame each other) they both benefit each being let off. However if one blames the other and the other cooperates (does not blame the first), then the blamer is let off and the one who cooperates gets arrested for a long term and vice versa. If both blame each other, both suffer a sentence but for a shorter term. Though logically it is best to cooperate, since the prisoner is not sure if the other one willget greedy, they settle blaming the other, just to be on the safe side and minimise potential risk/loss.

7.3 While risk arising from deficient information can be mitigated and reduced by gaining more information albeit at a cost, the risk arising from uncertain outcomes can only be controlled to some extent either by developing better mechanism at predicting the outcomes or better still by controlling the outcomes as much as possible.

7.4 Risk as we have seen, originates from vulnerabilities and threats and results in an adverse impact when it occurs. It is a function of threats, vulnerabilities and their impact. Vulnerabilities produce weaknesses that increase risk. Threats are external adverse factors that have a chance of occurrence. The Greater the threat, the greater the risk. The impact is adverse consequences and damages that can flow from the materialising of the threat. The greater the impact, the higher the risk. Thus minimising the chance of the threat materialising, reducing vulnerabilities and minimising the damage or impact helps to mitigate risks.

7.5 If one addresses risk with preconceived notions about its probable causes, it can lead to disastrous results as the real threat often lies else-where. What is required is clear perspective, correct approach and quick response.

7.6 Both predictive and responsive courses of action have an associated cost. The manager has to develop a strategy that ensures that the returns always exceed the cost of risk mitigation. The right way to tackle, deal with and manage risk is to adopt strategic risk management. In the absence of satisfactory definition of Risk Management …. for practical purposes, the emphasis of risk management tends to be on risk awareness, assessment and mitigation. However, strategic risk management involves :

  • The process by which executive management, under board supervision, identifies the risk arising from the business and establishes the priorities for control The Cadbury Report, 1992.

  • Basically altering in a desirable manner where something missing in the system may cause a probable damage or manage its conse-quences.

7.7 The road map to risk management can be summarised as :

  • Risk awareness – Management must be aware of the hazards and their impact on the business, and how they could be avoided, prevented and reduced.
  • Risk analysis and  assessment.
  • Assessment – Monitor threats, assess vulnerabilities, and estimate impact.
  •  
  • Prioritisation – Analysis into acceptable, unacceptable and tolerable – Middle of the road risks.
  • Planning  for the  future.
  • Prevention  of occurrence.
  • Strengthening the system against vulnerabilities.
  • Minimising damage.

7.8 Requirements for successful risk management?

  • Availability of appropriate facilities and equipment.
  • Availability of appropriate systems and procedures, including monitoring and auditing performance.
  • Availability of appropriate organisation, existence of sufficient level of competence, with suitable communication and training arrangements.
  • Availability of appropriate arrangements for detecting and handling emergency situations.
  • Availability of a system of active and continuous system of review of risk throughout the organisation.

7.9 Tools used for effective risk management, are:

  • Control
  • Insurance
  • Loss prevention
  • Technological  innovation
  • Learning,  information,  distribution
  • Robustness.

8.    The Mantra for success in risk management thus seems to be to ‘bear, share and insure’. Bear what you can yourself, given your risk appetite. Share risk within the industry by creating risk sharing, using averting mechanisms and finally insure what cannot be controlled and pass on the risk to insurers. Lastly, ‘monitoring and planning’ for the future involves a continuous process to adopt a ‘Plan, Do, Check and Act cycle’, in order to de-risk your business to the extent possible.

9.1 Managing risks the proactive way thus involves:

  • Having strategy that is : creating and putting in place proper ownership structure, carrying on your business on sound premises based on risk policies which minimise exposure to uncertainties.

  • Managing people is another way of managing risk. This involves:

»    Setting  standards  from the top

»    Quick adaptation  to change

»    Balance and experience – multitasking employees, and

»    Allocate responsibility for risk management.

  • Manage processes: this is the nuts and bolts of risk management and involves developing and putting in place sound policies, best practices, adequate procedures, easy to implement guidelines, sufficient documentation, drills, safer solutions, isolation of threats and active protection of assets.

  • Spreading the risk by: outsouring processes, sharing risk, using hedging option, swaps and derivatives. Risk can also be spread by insuring for loss of profit.

  • Finally having a disaster recovery plan and business continuity plan to minimise the effects of the damage caused due to the adverse impact of threats materialising into reality – for example – strikes, lock-outs and natural calamities.

9.2 In short, Continuous Risk Management (CRM) is a structured plan. CRM provides a disciplined environment for proactive decision making to:

  • Assess continually what could go wrong (risks)
  • Determine which risks are most important to deal with
  • Implement strategies to deal with those risks
  • Measure and assure effectiveness of the implemented strategies.

9.3    For CRM refer Appendix 2

The  effective  use and  implementation of CRM results in a paradigm shift in the way businesses plan, implement and operate.

Risk and the Accountant:

10.1 We have examined risks and risk management as applicable to business and industry in general. Let us now consider the risks that accountants face at the professional, strategic, operational as well as at micro level. Risk has been with the profession since its advent, because accountants certify either ‘correctness’ or ‘true and fair’ state of affairs.

10.2 The accounting profession has passed through turbulent times post Enron and World – Com abroad and our own GTBs and cooperative banking seams in India, and has reached a stage of crossroads. The message is loud and clear, the profession has to improve if the financial system and trust and faith in the profession are to survive. All concerned stakeholders – the government, the key players, the profession itself has moved with alacrity to rectify the situation. New accounting and audit standards have been adopted, the world is moving towards one set of uniform financial reporting standards. A lot has been done; a lot needs to be done. It is in this context we need to look at risk from the perspective of accountants and auditors.

10.3 Accountants play the role of score keeping and reporting. Reporting involves providing information to managements for decision making and to other stakeholders for investment, rewards, taxes, etc. From an accountant’s perspective risk is closely associated with governance, compliance and performance. Every organisation in its attempt to achieve its business objectives needs governance, compliance with laws and measurement of performance – that is profit.

10.4 The issue we will examine is : what is the role and relevance of accounting and the accounting professional, whether as an accountant or as an auditor, in the context of risk and what are the risks an accountant faces.

10.5 The accounting professional’s role in risk is on one side as the person in charge of the accounting and reporting process – the chief financial officer (CFO), and on the other side as a professional, independent auditor or internal auditor who expresses opinion on the financial statements and internal controls, etc. respectively. This is brought out in Fg.1 below.

10.6 The CFO, post SOX in the US and clause 49 and other corporate governance initiatives in India, is responsible for maintaining proper records and accounting for transactions, selection and application of proper accounting standards, computation and extraction of financial statements, true and fair reporting of the profit/loss and the state of affairs and also ensuring safeguarding of assets, control over operations and vouching for the verification and veracity of records. The CFO has thus become ‘owner’ responsible for accounting and reporting function. His liability is thus now two-fold. One of due care to the best of his skill and ability to his employer, and the second of proper service (that is not deficient) to the stakeholders. Failure to do his job using due care, diligence and professional expertise would attract action and liability.

11.    Risk as Score  Keeper:

The accountant as a score keeper maintains records of financial transactions. Books of accounts and accounting and financial records provide the basis for all decision making within the organisation. It is an analysis of this data using various tools and techniques that helps organisations take decisions. Decisions that are strategic like export or not, expand or shut down, diversify or continue, decisions that are operational like working in the second shift, increasing the work force, double the productions, hold stocks, as well as day-to-day decisions like accept an order, increase the price in the local market, etc.

The information provided by the CFO has to be correct, accurate, timely and relevant. In this role as a management accountant providing inputs he is part of the decision-making team.

Risk as reporter:

12.1 Financial statements provide key information to stakeholders. It is the business scorecard that gives vital information about net worth, assets and liabilities, profitability, growth, stability, liquidity, solvency, gearing and turnover.

12.2 The information provided by the accountant – CFO – who is a critical member of the management team is expected to be independent (unbiased), transparent, true and fair – that fairly represents the position of the business from the stakeholders’ perspective. In this role, the accountant faces the risk of application of wrong principles and standards, wrong accounting estimates, errors, mistakes and frauds, inaccurate particulars, window dressing and creative accounting – that is – unfair presentation, off-balance sheet items, unaccounted transactions, unprovided liabilities,watered capital, issues of capital versus revenue, deferment of revenue expenses, under-provisioning or over provisioning for expenses and liabilities, the list is endless.

12.3 Any lapse in the discharge of this responsibility can involve civil, criminal and professional action.

Risk in Audit and Assurance:

13.1 The risk in this role is twofold. The first as an internal auditor having organisational independence and the other as the independent external/ statutory auditor.

Internal Auditor:

13.2 As an internal auditor, the accountant deals with reporting on: existence and effectiveness of controls, adherence to policies and procedures, safeguarding of assets, compliance with laws and regulations, existence of appropriate and adequate documentation and MIS, fraud and error, deviations from established and prescribed procedures and at times on proper utilisation of physical and human resources.

13.3 The risks faced by the accountant as internal auditor arise from the sheer volume and complexity  of transactions and  are:

  • failure to detect lapses and weak in procedures
  • failure to identify areas  of fraud
  • failure to detect  frauds
  • maintain his independence whilst being an employee of, the company.

External Auditor:

13.4 As an external auditor the professional accountant deals with financial statement reporting, fair presentation of the position of its assets and liabilities, and true and fair reporting of its profit and loss for the period. This involves verifying the books of accounts, with supporting evidence, proper application of accounting principles and standards, verifying existence and efficacy of controls and following the set of professional audit and assurance standards developed over the years. All this enables him to express an opinion on the financial statements prepared and submitted by the management.

13.5 The external auditor can do precious little to address risks inherent in a business activity. He is not an insurer of results, but what he can and must do to the best of his professional ability is to address the risk of detection of misreporting.

He needs to display independence and professional competence, use the concepts of materiality, prudence and professional skepticism, whilst dealing with error and fraud to provide sufficient assurance to the users of financial statements that the financial statements are ‘true and fair’.

13.6 The days of the Kingston Cotton Mills’ case where the auditor was not responsible for reporting frauds and other delinquent acts of managements are gone.

13.7 A professional accountant owes a duty of care to the person who has engaged him for the work of auditing and reporting, arising out of the contract and terms of engagement and the governing laws and regulation.

13.8 The liabilities of professionals especially ‘auditors’ who do not discharge their responsibilities are broadly divided into four types. These are:

  • civil liability for negligence,
  •  statutory liabilities under the Companies Act, 1956 and other statutes,
  • liability under  the  Indian Penal Code
  • liability for professional misconduct under the Chartered Accountants Act, 1949.

14.    Auditors were not considered to owe a duty of care to third parties or individuals belonging to a group in the absence of a direct contractual relationship even if these third parties had relied on his report. The decision in the cases of De Savory vis Holden Howard & Co, (TLR) 11-1-60 and Candler vIs Crane Christmas & Co Court of Appeal, 1951 Z. K. B. 164, absolved the auditor from such responsibility. However, the dissenting judgment of Lord Denning in Candler vis Crane Christmas & Co is worth perusing. He observes :

“The accountant, who certifies the accounts of his client, is always called upon to express his personal opinion whether the accounts exhibit true and correct view of his client’s affairs, and he is required to do this not so much for the satisfaction of his own client, but more for the guidance of shareholders, investors, revenue authorities and others who may have to rely on the accounts in serious matters of business. If we should decide this case in favour of the accountants, there will be no reason why accountants should ever verify the word of the one man in a one-man company because there will be no one to complain about it. The one man who gives them wrong information willnot complain if they do not verify it. He wants their backing for the misleading information he gives them and he can only get it if they accept his word without verification. It is just what he wants so as to gain his own ends. And the persons who are misled cannot complain because the accountants owe no duty to them. If such be the law, I think it is to be regretted for it means that the Accountants’ Certificate, which should be a safeguard, becomes a snare for those who rely on it. I do not myself think that it is the law. In my opinion, accountants owe a duty of care not only to their clients, but also to all those whom they know will rely on their accounts in the transactions for which these accounts are prepared.”

This liability of owing a duty to third parties was established by the decision of Hedley Byrne and Co Ltd. vis Heller and Partners. (1964) Act 465.

15.    I would refer to two Indian cases:

1.    The decision of the Bombay High Court in Trisure’s case No. 1377 of 1978, dated 211 24 October 1985 re-emphasised that an auditor need not proceed with suspicions unless the circumstances are such as to arouse suspicions in a professional man of reasonable competence. The judgment also upholds the use of sampling for testing internal controls and use of sampling to complete the audit where controls are found satisfactory .

2.    The observation of Justice P. T. Raman Nair in the decision in the case of “The Official Liquidator, Palai Central Bank Ltd. vis Joseph and Other, (App. No. 247 of 1963 in BCP No. 11 of 1960) are relevant:

“So far as the 8th respondent, the auditor for 1946 onwards is concerned, very lengthy arguments have been addressed regarding the duties of a familiar bloodhound as opposed to watchdog lines. But this much I suppose one would not deny and counsel for the 8th respondent has not been disposed to deny it namely, that even the tamest of watch-dog has duty not to connive with the thief.

16.1 Let us consider the present situation in which chartered accountants and auditors are viewed by the public and stakeholders as service providers. Service provided includes accounting, audit & assurance, taxation, consultancy, investment advisory, valuation and/or many other services including at times opinions and management consultancy. The issue is: Is there any exposure under the consumer protection laws for other similarly-placed professional service providers – for example – doctors and lawyers who have been recently exposed? The decision of the National Consumer Disputes Redressal Commission and later the Supreme Court of India in the case of Indian Medical Association v. V.P. Shantha, (AIR 1996 SC 550) has held that the services rendered by the medical practitioner is included and covered under the definition of ‘services’ in S. 2(1)(0) of the Consumer Protection Act, 1986. This covers not only the treating doctors but also the consultants.

This reflects the view that the watchdog bodies of the profession are not perceived to be adequate to provide justice to consumers. In its judgment dated August 6, 2007, in the case of D. K. Gandhi v. M. Mathias, the National Consumer Redressal Commission made it clear that all professionals, including lawyers, should come under the ambit of the Consumer Protection Act. If doctors can come under the fold of the Act, lawyers and all other providers of services like chartered accountants, architects and property dealers will come under the Consumer Protection Act too. This case marks a departure from the established law that professionals can be penalised only by the established Discipline procedures under the law governing the profession. Thus in the changed environment claims for deficient services will not be restricted to be dealt with by the disciplinary committee or an in-house forum of the Institute, but could be agitated before and decided upon in other fora like the consumer forum and Civil and Criminal Courts.

16.2 The accounting is changing and facing challenges like fair value accounting, inflation, intangibles, growing dependence on information systems, ERP, and last but not the least, convergence with International Financial Reporting Standards – IFRS. All these challenges are areas of risk.

The  current  financial  crisis :

17.1 The current financial crisis beginning with the sub-prime crises in US, followed by economic meltdown, reckless investment and products, right up to the recent string of bankruptcies, near-collapse situation in the United States and the last minute bail-out has brought to fore immense risks in the world of finance.

17.2 What has caused this current crisis? Is it bad economics? Bad mathematics? Bad logic? Poor judgment? Is it a failure of rating agencies, failure of merchant bankers, investment analysts and consultants, failure of banks and financial institutions in their due diligence and homework and failure of auditors in expressing their opinion ? Failure of monitoring and regulatory bodies and government agencies, failure of Boards in their oversight? Failure in record keeping and reporting . . .. probably it is all of this in some measure. I suspect all have failed.

17.3 What would be the fallout and impact of the ongoing crises like the turbulence in the forex market and where derivative products have been sold by leading banks to mature corporates and investors with neither displaying the maturity, the seriousness, the understanding and the capacity of going through such transactions? Can this be called ‘risk’ management? The conclusion is in the negative.

18.    A person can always be wiser in hindsight. But one fact that comes out glaringly out of this is that every situation, every strategy, every move, every operation, every action, every transaction, every receipt and payment, every contract, every assurance, every deal, every agreement, every statement, every acceptance …. has a financial footprint that the accountant captures, records and reports and the auditor verifies, vets, vouches, audits, comments and expresses an opinion on. Does that mean that all this is too onerous and that accountants should hide behind disclaimers, subject tos, not withstandings, ifs and buts, and the law as it stands? Professional accountants, be they CFOs, accountants or auditors, need to understand the situation and the task before them, and equip themselves to go forth and discharge their role. To quote William Shedd

“A ship in harbour is safe, but that is not what ships are built for.”

This is the challenge.

19.    I repeat the way forward for accountants to counter this risk is to equip themselves with knowledge through continuing professional education, improve assurance function supported by peer review, and above all maintain independence coupled with professional skepticism and adherence to ethical standards. The need of the hour then is to convert vulnerabilities and weakness into strengths and threats into opportunities to manage change. Let us accept the challenges of change.

Appendix    1

Overview of different  types  of risks faced by an Enterprise :

(A) Strategic risks:

  • Strategy and business environment risk
  • Event risk, group risk, legal risk
  • Regulatory  risk, competition  risk
  • Management  risk, organisation  risk
  • Human  resources  management  risk
  • Capital  inadequacy  risk
  • Disaster  risk/Force  majeure
  • External  credit  rating

(B)    Operational risks: Manufacturing/Service Risks

  • Manufacturing failure
  • Service failure
  • Project management risk
  • Compliance risk
  • Accounting/Taxation  risk

Risks in  Operations

  • Audit compliance  risk
  • Booking  error
  • Business  process  design
  • Customer  relationship  management
  • Counter  party  failure
  • Confidentiality  risk
  • Distribution  channel
  • Documentation  risk
  • Execution  risk
  • Information  communication  risk
  • Information  security  risk
  • Methodology  error
  • Model error
  • Money laundering
  • Product  complexity
  • Settlement  error
  • Security risks
  • Training gaps
  • Volume risks


Risks in  Human Resources

  • Fraud
  • Keyman
  • Human  error
  • Training gaps
  • Negligence

Risks in Communications

  • Communication  interface  risk
  • Connectivity  failure
  • System  customisation risk
  • Telecom failure
  • Third-party/vendor failure for non-IT outsourcing

(C)    Market Risks:

  • Commodity risk
  • Country risk
  • Equity position  risk
  • Limits risk
  • Price volatility

(D)    Credit Risks:

  • Counter party risk
  • Credit appraisal
  • Credit investigation
  • Exposure  risk
  • Monitoring  gaps
  • Recovery  risk
  • Sector  downturns
  • Security realisation  risk

(E)    Finance Risks

 Liquidity Risk

  • Funding risk
  • Market conditions
  • Time risk

Interest Rate Risk

  • Basis risk
  • Prepayment risk
  • Re-pricing  risk
  • Yield curve risk

Forex  Risk

  • FX rate
  • Gap  risk
  • Settlement risk

Appendix    2

Continuous Risk Management (CRM)

1.    CRM requires formulation of :

  • Develop Risk Management Plan
  • Perform risk assessment during systems analysis sub-process
  • Establish an initial set of risks (simplest technique is brainstorming)
  • RM plan and risk profile evaluated and base-lined in evaluation sub-process.

2. Implementation  of CRM plan requires:

  • Implement risk management process defined in the plan
  • Implement risk tracking  system
  • Use risk management continuously to control and mitigate risks
  • Use risk assessment to identify and analyse risks.

Warren Buffet. Is this statement valid ?

Article

In his annual Chairman’s letter to shareholders of Berkshire
Hathaway Inc for year 2001, Warren Buffet set out his perspective on financial
derivatives — particularly credit derivatives1, and concluded that “We try to
be alert to any sort of megacatastrophe risk, and that posture may make us
unduly apprehensive about the burgeoning quantities of long-term derivatives
contracts and the massive amount of uncollateralised receivables that are
growing alongside. In our view, derivatives are financial weapons of mass
destruction, carrying dangers that, while now latent, are potentially lethal”
.


The 2008 US Financial Crisis :

An overview :

Indeed, Warren Buffet’s words of wisdom in his 2001 letter to
shareholders seem almost prophetic in the wake of the catastrophic financial
meltdown that is redefining the landscape of global finance at the speed that
perhaps makes Hurricane Ike look like a minor high tide. The historic US
government takeover2 of twin mortgage buyers — Fannie Mae3 and Freddie Mac4 on 7
September, 2008, bankruptcy of the 158 years’ old Lehman Brothers5, acquisition
of the 94 years’ old Merrill Lynch6 by Bank of America on 15 September, 2008, US
Fed and US government $ 85 billion loan bailout of American International Group7
(AIG) on 16 September, 2008, and scrambling for capital or other survival kits
by the remaining two independent investment banks and financial brokerages in
the US market, namely, Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley, all in a matter of two
weeks, is unprecedented in the US — the sacred land of capitalism, where
nationalising private investors’ losses through taxpayers’ bailouts has been
sacrilege, ever since the establishment of the US Fed system after the Great
Depression in the 1930s.

And yet even this did little to stave off the financial storm
whose end is nowhere in sight. Much like the stages of a scenario of systemic
financial meltdown associated with this severe economic recession that Professor
Nouriel Roubini of the Stern School of Business at New York University outlined
in February 2008: “A vicious circle of losses, capital reduction,
credit contraction, forced liquidation and fire sales of assets at below
fundamental prices could ensue leading to a cascading and mounting cycle of
losses and further credit contraction. In illiquid market actual market prices
are lower than the lower fundamental value that they then have given the credit
problems in the economy. Market prices include a large illiquidity discount on
top of the discount due to the credit and fundamental problems of the underlying
assets that back the distressed financial assets. Capital losses then lead to
margin calls and further reduction of risk taking by a variety of financial
institutions that are then forced to mark to market their positions. Such a
forced fire sale of assets in illiquid markets leads to further losses that
further contract credit and trigger further margin calls and disintermediation
of credit. The triggering event for the next round of this cascade is the
downgrade of the monolines and the ensuing sharp drop in equity markets; both
will trigger margin calls and further credit disintermedia-tion . . . . . A
near-global economic recession could ensue as the financial and credit losses
and the credit crunch spread around the world. Panic, fire sales, cascading fall
in asset prices will exacerbate the financial and real economic distress as a
number of large and systemically important financial institutions go bankrupt.”


US Treasury Secretary Henry Paulson watched aghast on 17
September 2008 as his dramatic actions of rescuing Fannie Mae, Freddie Mac, and
AIG were met by worldwide stock market panic while inter-bank lending remained
stubbornly frozen. Running out of alternatives, on 21 September 2008 the Bush
administration led by Henry Paulson sent a draft of proposed legislation to the
US Congress asking for $ 700 billion in taxpayer money to get bad mortgage
assets off the books of troubled US financial institutions in a bid to end the
U.S. economy’s worst financial nightmare since the Great Depression. As a
measure of its relative size, this mother of all financial bailouts in modern
history, at $ 700 billion is approx 7.2% of the current outstanding US national
debt of $ 9.67 trillion9, about 24% of the 2008 US government budget outlay of
$ 2.93 trillion10, a tad over 5% of US GDP at $ 13.67 trillion (2007 est)11,
nearly 64% of India’s GDP at $ 1.09 trillion (2007 est)12, and 1.29% of World
GDP at $ 54.31 trillion (2007 est). Ironically, Henry Paulson, who previously
ran the world’s most powerful investment bank Goldman Sachs as its
free-marketeering former chairman now finds himself leading a nationalisation
programme that would make both Fidel Castro and Hugo Chavez blush ! Can the
government really take on the notorious financial instruments tied to sub-prime
mortgages, whose unfathomable loss of value has made the US credit crisis
self-perpetuating, and bury them in a vault funded by the taxpayer ? Time will
tell.

The on or off-balance sheet obligations of Fannie Mae and
Freddie Mac, the two independent government-sponsored enterprises (GSEs) is just
over $ 5 trillion. Together, Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac own or guarantee about
half of the $ 12 trillion of mortgages in the U.S.13 The government accounts for
these GSEs as if they are unconnected to its balance sheet. Notably, their
obligations at over $ 5 trillion exceed 50% of current US national debt14. The
net exposure to US taxpayers is difficult to determine at the time of the
takeover and depends on several factors, such as declines in housing prices and
losses on mortgage assets in the future. Over 98% of Fannie’s loans were paying
timely during 200815. Both Fannie and Freddie had positive net worth as of the
date of the takeover, meaning the value of their assets exceeded their
liabilities16.

As Domnic Rushe17 points out, two things seem to be clear :
First, the economic influence of American presidents is severely limited.
Secondly, US financial markets have become so complex and reliant on highly
technical trading instruments that even some of the country’s best-known
economists declared themselves bewildered by the head-spinning turn of events.
“As an economist, I am supposed to have something intelligent to say about the
current financial crisis”, said Professor Steven Levitt, the author of
Freakonomics, a best-selling guide on the way markets work. “To be honest,
however, I haven’t the foggiest idea what this all means”18.

Corruption — The scourge of India

Article

Corruption is the lack of integrity. This could be lack of
financial integrity, moral integrity or intellectual integrity. When we talk
about corruption in our country we are generally referring mostly to the lack of
financial integrity.


The world bank defines corruption as ‘the use of public
office for private gain’. In this sense only the holders of public office can be
corrupt. The Prevention of Corruption Act, 1983 also defines corruption only in
the context of cases of public servants who hold public office. Corruption in
the private sector is legally considered to be cheating u/s.420 IPC or criminal
breach of trust. Corruption exists in the private sector and the public sector.
It is the root and cause of suffering practically in all spheres of our life
today. Corruption is therefore a scourge of India.

The word scourge is defined by the Oxford Dictionary as
follows : ‘scourge’ as a noun means : a whip for flogging or a person or thing
regarded as the cause of suffering. As a verb it means flog with a whip :
afflict greatly, punish. In short, ‘scourge’ is an act of causing suffering and
inflicting punishment. Our country is being punished by corruption by way of
lack of progress.

When Ms. Indira Gandhi was asked about the problem of
corruption, she qualified that it was a global phenomenon and avoided a direct
reply. Even if we look at corruption as a global phenomenon which is seen in
every society and country, the level of corruption varies from country to
country.

The latest report of Transparency International has focussed
on the sad fact that even the programmes for ‘aam admi’ and those who are
involved in these programmes are prone to corruption.

The Transparency International India Centre for Media Studies
conducted Indian corruption study 2007, a national survey of graft patterns
affecting BPL — ‘below poverty line’ households, categorised the States into
four levels to explain the extent and level of corruption — alarming, very high,
high and moderate. While levels of corruption were deemed alarming in Assam,
Bihar, Jammu & Kashmir, Madhya Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Goa, & Nagaland, it was
very high in TN, Rajasthan, Meghalaya and Sikkim. It was deemed high in
Chhattisgarh, Delhi, Gujarat, Jharkhand, Kerala, Orissa, Arunachal Pradesh,
Manipur. If it is any consolation, corruption levels were moderate in the Union
Terrorities of Chandigarh and Puducherry and the nine States Andhra Pradesh,
Haryana, Himachal Pradesh, Maharashtra, Punjab, Uttaranchal, WB, Mizoram and
Tripura. The survey covered 22,728 randomly selected BPL households across the
States between 2007 and January 2008.

The Below Poverty Line (BPL) households in India paid Rs.883
crore as bribe to avail basic needs during the last one year, according to
Transparency International India (TII) — CMS corruption study 2007. The Police
Department tops the chart with total bribe paid by the BPL households to the
tune of Rs.215 crore, while land records and service comes second at Rs.123.4
crore and housing comes third with a total bribe of Rs.156.6 crore.

The press report gives the details :

Corruption is not new to India, but what is shocking is
that the situation is getting worse, if a global watchdog is to be believed.
India has this year been ranked worse than China on a corruption scale devised
by Transparency International, compared to the last year when the two
countries were on par.

In a report that was released simultaneously in cities
worldwide, the organisation said the marginal slide could have had something
to do with television images of currency notes being displayed in the
Parliament during the recent debate on the trust vote.

India is ranked 85 on the corruption perception index-2008,
while China is ranked 72. Last year both the countries were ranked 72. The
index is prepared on the basis of surveys conducted in 180 countries by 13
international agencies that are associated with the organisation.


The index puts India’s integrity score at 3.4 as against 3.5
in 2007. China on the other hand has a marginally higher integrity score 3.6
this year, while Pakistan with a 2.5 integrity score has been ranked at 134 in
the list and Sri Lanka is ranked at 92 with integrity score of 3.2.

Corruption in our country is a vicious cycle starting with
political corruption, leading to bureaucratic corruption, resulting in
criminalisation of politics.

The question is whether India can continue to live with this
level of corruption. Corruption is anti economic development, anti-nation and
anti-poor. Can something be done to eliminate corruption or at least drastically
reduce the level of corruption in our day-to-day life ?

There is a silver lining that even our worst politicians so
far have not come out openly and said that corruption is good.

Information technology and communication has recorded a
healthy development in recent times. The availability of camera mobile phones
and 24X7 news channels always on the look out for sensational news has increased
significantly.

The most important tools of combating corruption are the
judiciary, the Election Commission and the media.

On the issue of remedial measures we can begin with banning all political candidates against whom criminal charges have been framed in courts from contesting elections, we can certainly stop ‘law-breakers becoming law-makers’. The media and photo camera phones can be used to catch the corrupt and punish them. The RTI Act can be used to expose corruption. I believe the use of RTI Act and use of technology will bring in greater transparency in government and semi-government organisations. Other measures would involve the following:

  • Inculcating value-based education.
  •  Educating the citizens of their rights.
  • Increased use of our judicial system and institutions like the Election Commission and the Ombudsman.

Corruption challenges us, let us confront corruption rather than accept corruption.

TDS is highly tedious

Article

Terminology used in this Article :


TDS is Tax Deducted at Source. This is a
misnomer. This is not a tax at all.

TDS is only a Tentative Deposit of Sum
which is later refunded or appropriated towards tax assessed and levied on
another. Till such time this is not tax and this is not Government’s money.

AT is Advance Tax. An assessee knows and estimates what he is
earning in the current year, for which he pays estimated tax. This is a tax
payment but TDS is not a tax payment, but only a Tentative Deposit
of Sum.

HIC is abbreviation for Honest Innocent Citizen.

Payee is the assessee on whose behalf a Tentative Deposit of
Sum is made with a bank.

The basic assessment procedure under the IT law is — an
assessee has to file the Return of Income, the computation of which is made by
deducting the expenditure from the income and the net income is to be taxed. A
net loss may also arise. It is the duty of the Department to make the
assessment, levy tax and collect the same.

The Department also envisages collection by way of Advance
Tax on the estimated income the assessee is earning in the current year.

The Income-tax Department is maintained to do the exercise of
assessment, levy of tax and collect. This governmental agency is expected to be
efficient in the matter of levy and collection of such taxes. Inefficiency and
lethargy should not be there and the governmental agency cannot shirk its
responsibility and shift such responsibility on the HIC.

Further, S. 269 mandatorily has made payments above Rs.20000
to be made only by cheques. Even though this is much against the law of ‘legal
tender’, when payments are made by cheques, the recipient automatically
discloses it in his accounts, which is to come to the notice of the I.T.
Department. It is difficult to suppress the same. If in spite it is suppressed,
the I.T. Department is to unearth the same.

‘Bonded Labour’ under the Bonded Labour System (Abolition)
Act, 1976 means ‘forced or partly forced labour under which a debtor enters into
an agreement with the creditor’. HIC is declared an ‘assessee in default’ and
thereby presumed legally a ‘debtor’ and the Government a ‘creditor’. Such a law
is against the Constitution and would be ‘bonded labour’ under the Bonded Labour
Abolition Act, 1976.

The following questions and answers would give a proper
appraisal of the issue :

(1) Can a HIC be mandatorily forced to undertake the work/labour
of collecting and remitting TDS into the bank much against his will and consent,
and that too without any consideration or remuneration ?

Whether such enforcing of work/labour is bonded labour which
would infringe the personal freedom and liberty of a HIC guaranteed under the
Constitution ?




Ans. : HIC are mandatorily forced and made responsible to
collect TDS and deposit in a bank, failing which such HIC is deemed an ‘assessee
in default’.

An HIC is to make payment for services and utilities availed
by him, which is his expenditure and liability. Unless such liability is timely
cleared, his business and business relationship suffers.

The provisions relating to TDS in the Income-tax Act run to
35 pages and the IT Rules to some pages. These are cumbersome and an HIC cannot
understand and follow them. Qualified auditors do not undertake this table work
as this is considered a clerical work. Clerks may be appointed, but they are not
trained and well versed. Moreover, it is not a work for a full-time clerk. If
part-time freelance clerks are employed, the business secrets cannot be kept.

Forcing a person and making him responsible to do a
particular work, namely, collecting and remitting TDS is practically an
‘enforced bonded labour, which infringes on one’s personal freedom and liberty
assured in the Constitution of India. No person could be compelled by any law to
undertake a particular work against his will and consent. This is against the
Constitution.

(2) What are the cumbersome procedures and services to be
complied with by such HIC ?



Ans. :

(a) Refer Income-tax Reckoner and determine how much tax has
to be deducted from each kind of payment made by HIC. Different services with
different tariffs need a competent assistant who can rightly understand them.
Several services fall under two categories and any decision becomes debatable.

(b) Two cheques are to be written, one for the payment less
TDS and the other for the TDS amount. If the magnitude of the business is more,
the volume of cheque writing multiplies.

(c) The TDS cheques have to be rightly entered in the TDS
challan. Writing of challans is now laborious and meticulous care is necessary,
as the computer Forms are cumbersome.

d) When the deduction  is made as per law, many recipients do not furnish their PA No. Either they have not obtained it or they have misplaced it. The HIC deductor has no power or authority to insist on their giving the PA No. Even if he discharges the responsibility of collecting and depositing in bank, the HIC is punished for the lack of PA No. of the recipient. This is not the mistake of the HIC, but punishment is provided u/s.206. This is ridiculous. The Government is keen to get the TDS money. The HIC collects and deposits it and discharges his function. The Government must be satisfied with such money deposited. The HIC should not be punished if the recipient does not furnish his PA No. when the address is given.

e) The TDS cheque written has to be sent to the bank with the challan filled and an assistant is to go to the bank.

f) When the cheque is received by the bank, acknowledgement is never given immediately, but deferred till the cheque gets encashed. An assistant has to go to the bank several times to collect the challan acknowledged. If the collection of the challan is forgotten, no proof will be available. Monitoring this is a cumbersome responsibility. When the challan acknowledgement is given by the bank, they scribble in the challan No., and it is not decipherable many a time. The assistant going to the bank is helpless.

g) The challan has to be collected and it is to be rightly placed in the file and safeguarded. ThIS requires a filing assistant. If this challan is missed, nuisance entails.

h) Within one month individual certificates have to be prepared and the number of forms for such purpose are so many and the right form and updated form has to be used. Such forms have to be purchased from the printers as and when required. An assistant has to go to buy this form and many a time the form is not readily available. Filling up this form is not easy by an assistant unless he knows his job.

i) In such certificates the Director or a responsible person has to sign even though he cannot be made to check the particulars contained in the form. This is to be counter-checked by another assistant. When the signatory of the certificate is authorised is another issue.

j) Once in three months the Quarterly Return manually with all the deduction details referring to each and every transaction is to be prepared, which is an elaborate and meticulous work.

k) The Quarterly Return details have to be fed in computer, which requires a software and a data programmer and the accuracy has to be checked. For any typographical mistake of the data programmer, the HIC is punished.

1) The acknowledgement for having filed the Quarterly Return has to be preserved. The Department on many occasions sends notices for not having received the same. Jurisdictional changes and jurisdictional clashes arise and notices are received, which have to be replied.

For so much of honorary work done by HIC incurring enormous expenses, he is always cornered as ‘Assessee in default’ – an irony of fate.

The fact remains, the Sections, the nature of transactions, the procedures, the multifarious forms, are so cumbersome, even the Income-tax Officials find it difficult to understand.

Irrespective of the onerous difficulties  unduly cast on the HIC, the writer suggests a simple remedy. TDS stamps can be sold in post offices. When payments are made by cash/ cheques, TDS stamps will also be issued along with, duly endorsed. Such stamps will be pasted in the Returns. Even this the Department will misplace. The assessee should always send a xerox and obtain acknowledgment from the Department. Cumbersome procedures can be avoided. If TDS stamps are not issued in time, interest is to be charged automatically by the Department at the time of assessment.

3) When such services are honorarily rendered, whether the HIe can be punished/penalised for any lapses?

Ans. : Rendering service in the interest of the country is to be appreciated and honoured. The TDS provisions and especially the recently introduced Section 40(1)(ia) are draconian and against all can-nons of law, justice, equity and fair play. Legally such laws cannot be sustained.

If the IT Department is not efficient to collect rightful taxes from an assessee, it cannot make an HIC ‘assessee in default’ in the place of the defaulting tax-payer who only has to be punished. Thereby, this provision amounts to letting off defaulters, Department and the assessees and punishing an HIe. There is no justice and equity in penalising HIe.

4) Whether such punishment or penalising be more than the punishment prescribed under law for the real defaulter or evader of taxes?

Ans. : Cases have now arisen that the punishment on the HIC is much more than the punishment prescribed for the real defaulter. The defaulter commits the crime, but the punishment prescribed for the defaulter is much less than the punishment prescribed for the HIC for failure to deduct Tentative Deposit and remit to the bank.

If an HIC makes a payment, and if he does not deduct tax at source, such payment is considered as income in the hands of the HIe. When the payment is made, the payee deducts his expenditure and pays income tax only on his net income. If the payee evades taxes, the punishment on this is very much less than the punishment given to the HIC when the total payment is considered as income in the hands of the HIC for no fault of him, which gets assessed at about 33%.
 
Several instances have come to light when agents, under law of agency, collect money and remit to their principal. Over-zealous officers consider that on such collection and payment by agents, tax should be deducted, failing which the entire payment made to their Principal is treated as income in the hands of such agent. All these penalties and punishments are not equitable as HICs are forced with such work and responsibility due to the indolence and inefficiency of Governmental agency in preventing tax evasion. Such an attitude by the over-zealous officers is driving HIC to the roads.

5) When taxes have been paid on the income by the payee, whether punishment for non-deduction of tax be imposed on the HIC ?

Ans. : When an honest payee has paid his taxes on all his income less his expenditure and given valid proof for the same, the proceedings and actions under law should be dropped. Duplication of payment of taxes arising on the self same transaction is unethical. The deductor should not be punished when the rightful payee has paid his taxes if this is proved by the payer. There is no legal sanction for such duplication in tax levy and collection.

6) Whether the payment made to the payee can be deemed as income of the HIC by any stretch of imagination?

Ans. : Agents render services for their principals, The law of agency applies between them. Some agents are authorised to collect by their principals. They collect in their name, on behalf of their principals. The principals receive the same and disclose in their accounts. The principals incur various expenses which are deducted from the receipts from their agents. Over-zealous officers insist that such agents should deduct tax at source from payments made by them to their principals. While there is no need for such tax deduction, the officers assess the sum total of amounts paid as income in the hands of the agents. While the principal is to pay tax on his net income, the agent is forced to pay tax on the gross income of the principal. This is totally ridiculous. The gross receipt of the principal cannot be deemed to be the income of the agent. The Section 40(1)(ia) has to be reconsidered.

Concluding, the Constitutional validity, equity and justice of the law relating to TDS needs a judicial review.

Sale deed is chargeable with stamp duty on market value of property, consideration fixed by Court in compromise decree is irrelevant : Stamp Act 1899, S. 47A.

New Page 1

18 Sale deed is chargeable with stamp duty
on market value of property, consideration fixed by Court in compromise decree
is irrelevant : Stamp Act 1899, S. 47A.


A sale deed was presented to the Sub-Registrar
(Registration), whereby a land was transferred for a consideration of Rs.8,000
to the respondent being legal heir of Smt. Dayalaxmi Sanghi. The sale deed was
executed pursuant to the compromise decree passed by the Civil Court between the
parties in a suit.

 

The registering authority proposed to value the property at
Rs.8,79,000. The Collector of Stamps issued a show-cause notice u/s.47A of the
Indian Stamp Act, 1899. The respondent had submitted that the sale deed has been
executed in compliance of decree, hence the provisions of S. 47A not applicable.
The Collector of Stamps after considering total facts and circumstances, valued
the property at Rs.7,83,000 and directed the respondent to pay the deficit stamp
duty.

On appeal by the respondent the Board of Revenue held that
the stamp duty and registration paid by the respondent was in accordance with
law.

The stamp authorities challenged the aforesaid order an the
ground that the stamp duty and registration fee were payable on the market value
of the property on the date of registration of the sale deed and this had no
concern with the date of agreement or consideration paid therein.

The High Court held that the sale deed is covered under the
definition of conveyance u/s.2(10) and stamp duty is chargeable as applicable to
such instrument as per Item No. 23 of Schedule I-A on the market value of the
property.

In facts of the case, there was a difference between market
value and the price as agreed in the agreement or subsequently fixed in the
compromise petition. The suit was decided on the basis of compromise arrived at
between the parties and as per compromise decree, consideration as settled
between the parties was to be paid by the vendee to the vendor. For
consideration, the aforesaid amount is binding between the parties, but for
payment of stamp duty, market value on the date of execution of the document was
a decisive factor and the stamp duty was payable on the market value of the
property at the time of registration of the sale deed and not as per the price
fixed under agreement to sell or in the decree of the Court.

The valuation of the property for the purpose of stamp duty
is the market value at the time of its execution. The Indian Stamp Act is a
taxing statute and is to be construed strictly. In the case of a decree of the
Civil Court, it may be on the basis of compromise; for the purpose of payment of
stamp duty, provision of S. 3 of the Act shall be applicable, which specifically
provides that stamp duty shall be chargeable with duty of the amount indicated
in the Schedule. Therefore on the sale deed, stamp duty was payable as per
market value and it had no concern with the consideration shown or paid to the
vendor.

 

In view of the aforesaid, the order passed by the Board of
Revenue was not sustainable under the law.

[ State of Madhya Pradesh v. Dilip Kumar Sangni, AIR
2008 Madhya Pradesh 133]

 


levitra

Transactions with Associated Enterprises — A new category of service tax payers ?

Article

Service tax law is amended from 10-5-2008 for casting
liability on transactions of taxable services with associated enterprises to pay
service tax even before the actual payment is received by the service provider.
For this purpose, Explanation (c) to S. 67 of Chapter V of the Finance Act, 1994
is amended and an Explanation is inserted in Rule 6(1) of the Service Tax Rules,
1994.

An attempt is made in this article to highlight the effect of
these provisions and the onerous responsibility cast on the taxpayers to
identify the transactions of taxable services between the Associated
Enterprises, a new category of taxpayers being introduced under service tax.

Service tax was hitherto payable on receipt of the value of
taxable service by the service provider. Even in case when the liability to pay
service tax is cast on the recipient of service, the amount actually paid by
such recipient triggered the liability. This means that so far, the liability of
service tax crystallised on what is known as ‘cash basis’ as distinguished from
‘accrual basis’ in accounting parlance.

Now, from the day the Finance Bill received assent of the
President i.e., from 10-5-2008, the liability is cast on the associated
enterprises to pay service tax even if the actual payment of value of taxable
service is not received/paid, as the case may be. ‘Associate Enterprises’ are
defined to take meaning from the Income-tax Act, 1961. This is a major deviation
in case of transactions between specified persons called as ‘Associated
Enterprises’ (AE) under the law. This amendment is introduced as anti-avoidance
measure, as the Government thought that tax avoidance takes place in case of
transactions of taxable services between the associated enterprises as service
tax is not paid, though it is recognised in the books of account as revenue or
expenditure by the concerned parties. This is clear from the clarification
issued by the Tax Research Unit (TRU) of the Government of India, dated 29th
February 2008. For better understanding the relevant portion of the said TRU
Letter is reproduced as follows :

“6. Transactions between Associated Enterprises


6.1 Service tax is levied at the rate of 12% of the
value of taxable services (S. 66). S. 67 pertaining to valuation of taxable
service for charging service tax states that value shall be the gross amount
charged for the service provided or to be provided and includes book
adjustment. As per Rule 6 of the Service Tax Rules, 1994, service tax is
required to be paid only after receipt of the payment.


6.2 It has been brought to the notice that the
provision requiring payment of service tax after receipt of payment are used
for tax avoidance especially when the transaction is between associated
enterprises.
There have been instances wherein service tax has not been
paid on the ground of non-receipt of payment even though the transaction has
been recognised as revenue/expenditure in the statement of profit and loss
account for the purpose of determining corporate tax liability.


6.3 As an anti-avoidance measure, it is proposed to
clarify that
service tax is leviable on taxable services provided by the
person liable to pay service tax even if the amount is not actually received,
but the amount is credited or debited in the books of account of the service
provider. In other words, service tax is required to be paid after receipt
of payment or crediting/debiting of the amount in the books of accounts,
whichever is earlier.
However, this provision is restricted to transaction
between associated enterprises. This provision shall also apply to service tax
payable under reverse charge method (S. 66A) as taxable services received from
associated enterprises. For this purpose, S. 67 and Rule 6(1) are being
amended.
(emphasis supplied)

In this context, let us examine the actual amendments :

Explanation to S. 67 (as amended) :

Gross amount charged’ includes payment by cheque, credit
card, deduction from account and any form of payment by issue of credit notes or
debit notes and book adjustment and any amount credited or debited, as
the case may be, to any account, whether called suspense account
or by any other name in the books of account of person liable to pay
service tax, where the transaction of service is with any associated
enterprise.”
(emphasis supplied).

Prior to the amendment, the explanation read as follows :

‘Gross amount charged’ includes payment by cheque, credit
card, deduction from account and any form of payment by issue of credit notes or
debit notes and book adjustment.”

Further, an Explanation to Rule 6(1) is introduced to bring
in line with S. 67, as a machinery provision :


ExplanationFor the removal of doubts, it is hereby
declared that where the transaction of taxable service is with any associated
enterprise, any payment received towards the value of taxable service, in such
case shall include any amount credited or debited, as the case may be, to any
account, whether called ‘Suspense Account’ or by any other name, in the books of
account of a person liable to pay service tax.”


It can be seen from above that the definition of ,gross amount charged’ u/ s.67 is expanded in case of transactions with AE to include debit or credit to any account including a suspense account, in the books of the person liable to pay service tax. Under the erstwhile provisions as amended by the Finance Act, 2006, the liability to service tax was attracted upon issue of debit note or credit note in the context of payment of consideration in relation to provision of taxable service. For example, if there already existed a deposit in the books of A in favour of B, and A renders a taxable service to B, the liability of payment of service tax would arise when a book entry of adjustment of deposit is passed to-wards the value of taxable services provided. However, if A and B are associated enterprises, then the liability to service tax arises the moment a bill is issued, irrespective of the fact that whether there existed any deposit or not. This is because issue of a bill would result into credit to an income head and the liability would trigger on accrual basis of accounting. Thus the concept of book adjustment in relation to transactions between AE is of much larger import than in case of unrelated parties. Thus an onerous responsibility is cast on an enterprise providing service to its associated enterprise. Further illustrations of such onerous responsibility of this amendment are given elsewhere in this article.

Let us now examine whether such amendment was absolutely necessary to curb the incidence of avoidance of tax as made out by the Government. Firstly, the Service Tax Law is designed to cast liability on receipt of payment. This only means that the liability not necessarily arises even as transaction is recognised as revenue/expenditure in the books of account. Secondly, the purported avoidance is already taken care of by introduction of Explanation to S. 67 and valuation rules by the Finance Act, 2006. As can be seen from the Explanation before the amendment, the gross amount charged included payment by way of issue of credit/debit note or accounting adjustments. Further, even supposing that someone tries to avoid the tax (not actually avoid but delay) by raising debit note to a sister concern’s account instead of the recipient of service (assuming that all three are AE), it will not only raise questions from audit and other compliances, but also service tax and penalty from 100% to 200% can be levied u/ s.78 for fraud, collusion, etc. with intent to evade payment of service tax and the limitation period extends to five years. Thus, enough provisions exist under service tax to take care of the situations envisaged by the Government to deal with tax avoidance.

The effect of the amendment is that in case of a transaction of taxable service with AE, all debits or credits or adjustments in the account shall be regarded as the payment received towards the value of taxable service. This means that the liability to service tax triggers immediately upon issue of a bill for taxable service in case of AE. The payability of service tax on such transaction then falls due on the immediately following due date. It can thus be said that the amendment results only into preponement of liability. The amendments can therefore be said to be not addressing the issue of tax avoidance, but effectively preponing the liability in case of transactions between the AE.

Issue  of identification of AE :

The taxpayer community in this country has heard of the concept of associated enterprises under Income Tax from 1-4-2002 when the special provisions relating to avoidance of tax were introduced to levy tax on international transactions on Arm’s-Length Price (ALP), in line with international practice by the Finance Act, 2001. Under Income Tax, the umbrella of coverage is confined to international transactions involving one or more non-resident parties amongst the parties to the transaction. However, in case of service tax, even the domestic transactions are covered and also there is no need of any non-resident person to be a party to the transaction of taxable service.

AE is very widely defined under S. 92A of the Income-tax Act. and takes into its ambit an enterprise which participates through one or more persons, directly or indirectly, or through one or more intermediatary in the management or control or capital of other enterprise and also one or a set of persons who commonly participate directly or indirectly or through one or more intermediaries in the management or control or capital of the other AE. In the following cases, one enterprise is deemed as Associated Enterprise in relation to other enterprise as it appears from S. 92A(2)

  • One enterprise holds directly or indirectly 26% or more percentage of voting power in other enterprise.

  •  One person or enterprise holds directly or indirectly 26% or more percentage of voting power in each of such enterprises.

  • When loan from one enterprise to the other enterprise constitutes not less than 50% of the book value of such other enterprise.

  • One enterprise  guarantees  not less than  10% of the total borrowings  of the other  enterprise.

  • When one enterprise or one or a set of persons appoints more than half of the board of the directors or the members of the governing board or one or more executive directors or executive members of the governing board of the other enterprise.

  • When manufacturing or processing or any business carried out by one enterprise is wholly dependent on the other enterprise on use of know-how, patent, copyright, trademark, licence, fran-chise or any other business or commercial right of similar nature or any data, documentation, drawing or specification relating to any patent, invention, model, design, secret formula or process belonging to the other enterprise or within the exclusive right of the other enterprise.

  •  90%  or  more  of  the  raw  material   or  the consumables  required  for the manufacture   or processing of the goods or articles carried out by one enterprise are supplied by the other enterprise or by such persons as specified by the other enterprise and the prices and the other conditions relating to the supply are influenced by such other enterprise.

  • Where the goods or articles manufactured or processed by one enterprise are sold exclusively to the other enterprise or to such persons as specified by the other enterprise and the prices and conditions related thereto are influenced by such other enterprise.

  • Where one enterprise is controlled by an indi-vidual and the other enterprise is also controlled by such individual or his relative or jointly by such individual and his relative.

  • Where one enterprise is controlled by HUF, the other enterprise is controlled by a member of such HUF or a relative of the member of such HUF or by such a member and his relative.

  • Where one enterprise is a firm, AOP or BOI, not less than 10% of interest in such firm or AOP or BOI is held by the other enterprise.

  • Where there exists between the two enterprises, any relationship of mutual interest as may be prescribed 1.

The word, ‘enterprise’ is defined under the Income-tax Act as a person including a permanent establishment of such person.

The word, ‘permanent establishment’ is defined u/s. 92F which includes a fixed place of business through which business of enterprise is wholly or partly carried out.

The term ‘relative’ is not defined under Service Tax or under Central Excise Act. However, the Income-tax Act defines ‘relative’ as ‘in relation to an individual, means the husband, wife, brother, or sister or any lineal ascendant or descendant of the individual’ [5. 2(41)].

From the above definition, it is clear that the coverage under these provisions is wide. However, under income-tax, only international transactions are relevant to capture the transactions between the AE and it is not difficult to establish such a relationship in the context of international transactions. Applying this principle in the context of domestic transactions, is a Herculean task. Had such transactions been confined to import or export of services, it would have been simpler to take recourse to transfer pricing regulations to determine who should be regarded as an AE in relation to the transactions of taxable service.

It therefore follows that the first issue would be to identify any enterprise being regarded as AE in relation to transaction of taxable service. In the context of domestic coverage, it may lead to absurd results, for example, a loan advanced by a bank, the amount of which exceeds 51% of the book value of the total assets of the borrower, such bank becomes AE of the borrower. We are all aware that normally the borrower’s margin is 30% while the bank borrowing can be to the extent of 70%. It is equally difficult to come out of the criteria under many other clauses and one is unknowingly and unintentionally roped in as AE of the other enterprise.

The provisions pertaining to AE are applicable to all kinds of entities i.e., not only companies but also to non-companies like individuals, HUF, partnership firms, AOP, Ba I, etc. In case of a partnership firm, BOI or AOP, in most of cases an individual or more than one individual holds more than 10% each. In case of an HUF, one or more individuals having control is very common. In such cases, all such entities will be covered as AE in relation to the other and will require payment of service tax on ‘accrual’ basis.

Let us take a case of a private or a public company, in which case also it is equally difficult to identify associated enterprise. Accounting Standard AS-IS issued by K’Al, requires every company to disclose their transactions with related parties. However, here we find that the persons covered under AS-IS are much more restricted than S. 92A of the Income-tax Act. This can be seen from the ‘relationship’ covered under AS-IS, a relevant portion of the Standard is given below:

“2. This Statement applies only to related-party relationships described in paragraph 3.

3.    This Statement deals only with related-party relationships described in (a) to (e) below:

(a)    enterprises that directly, or indirectly through one or more intermediaries, control, or are controlled by, or are under common control with, the reporting enterprise (this includes holding companies, subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries);

(b)    associates and joint ventures of the reporting enterprise and the investing party or venturer in respect of which the reporting enterprise is an associate or a joint venture;

(c)    individuals owning, directly or indirectly, an interest in the voting power of the reporting enterprise that gives them control or significant influence over the enterprise, and relatives of any such individual;

(d)    key management personnel and relatives of such personnel; and

(e)    enterprises over which any person described in (c) or (d) is able to exercise significant influence. This includes enterprises owned by directors or major shareholders of the reporting enterprise and enterprises that have a member of key management in common with the reporting enterprise.

4.    In the context of this Statement, the following are deemed not to be related parties:

(a)    two companies simply because they have a director in common, not with standing paragraph 3(d) or (e) above (unless the director is able to affect the policies of both companies in their mutual dealings);

(b)    a single customer, supplier, franchiser, distributor, or general agent with whom an enterprise transacts a significant volume of business merely by virtue of the resulting economic dependence; and

(c)    the parties listed below, in the course of their normal dealings with an enterprise by virtue only of those dealings (although they may circumscribe the freedom of action of the enterprise or participate in its decision-making process) :

(i)    providers  of finance;

(ii)    trade  unions;

(iii)    public  utilities;

(iv)    government departments and government agencies including government-sponsored bodies.”

The Accounting Standard defines control as a related party controlling more than half of the voting power in the other party. Significant influence is defined as one individual owning, directly or indirectly, 20% or more in voting power of any enterprise. It thus appears that the coverage is much more limited under the Accounting Standard than what is envisaged u/s.92A of the Income-tax Act. Therefore, the companies will have to devise a separate set of modalities to identify an AE for the purpose of payment of service tax.

Similarly, since the liability of service tax arises once the receipt of provision of taxable service crosses Rs.I0 lakhs, even small and medium enterprises shall have to formulate modalities to identify the AE in relation to the transactions of taxable services with them. Further, persons other than provider of output service, who are liable to pay service tax, like GTA service, also will have to formulate suitable modalities for identification of the AB.

As per one estimate, about 50% of the service tax payers have transactions of taxable service with AE. Such assessee may also have transaction of taxable services with other than AE. These assessees will have to make two kinds of computation in the same month or quarter, as the case may be, (i) for service tax payments in case of transactions of taxable service with AE, and (ii) in case of transactions of taxable service with other than AE.

The new provisions for carving out associated enterprises for such differential and harsh treatment have thrown up certain interesting questions for which no clarification is offered and no solution is in sight. Such issues are listed hereinbelow as brain-stormers.

(a) Export  of Service:

For the purpose of exemption under the Export of Service Rules, one of the conditions required to be satisfied is of receipt of the value of taxable service in convertible foreign exchange. In case of AE, the liability arises at the time of raising the bill and debit or credit to any account. In a case when the payment is received subsequently, though in convertible foreign exchange, it will be difficult for the person providing otherwise exempt service as export of service, to satisfy this condition. Urgent clarification for mitigating this genuine hardship is required.

(b) Cenvat    credit :
(i) In case of international  transactions:

A person liable to pay service tax on taxable service provided from outside India and received in India (import of service) from overseas AE, is required to pay service tax once he passes debit or credit or adjustment entry in the books of account. Such an assessee may not be required to pay for the value of import of service to his AE immediately upon provision of service (based on the terms of contract). However, mere payment of service tax without payment of value of service, may not entitle him claim of credit of input service tax paid, even though it is used for providing taxable output service or in manufacture of excisable goods, as the condition laid down in Rule 4(7) of the Cenvat Credit Rules 2004 is not satisfied.

(ii) In case of domestic  transactions:

ABC is having transaction of taxable  service with XYZ (AE) in July 2008 and pays service tax on that transaction. The amount of invoice issued to XYZ was adjusted in the running account of XYZ, as payment was not required to be made in view of credit balance lying in the account of XYZ.

In such circumstance, it will be difficult to claim Cenvat credit for XYZ in view of the fact that payment of taxable service is not made. For this purpose, ABC and XYZ may have to take extra precautions as follows:

(a)    ABC to inform XYZ about book adjustment in their account

(b)    XYZ to show corresponding adjustment in their books

(c)    XYZ will have to convince the CEO about this constructive payment.

May be for this purpose, it has to obtain ‘receipt’ from ABC or even a certificate of his Chartered Accountant.

(c) Memorandum entries for monthly closing of accounts:

In this fast-moving era, not only Indian subsidiaries of foreign companies but also internally related Indian companies are required to report their monthly results of profit or loss. In case of listed companies, quarterly results are required to be disclosed. In the process, such entities have to pass book entries of income/expenditure, whether called memorandum entries, suspense entries, etc. on the last day of the month. Such entries are reversed on the first day of the immediately following month. Whether such entries would also trigger the liability to pay service tax is a moot question.

(d) Invoices cancelled/amended on re-appraisal before payment:

An assessee provides taxable service to AE and issues an invoice for the value of taxable service. However, subsequently the value is re-appraised or negotiated and finally a lower amount bill is issued by the service provider. The whole exercise is over before making the payment of consideration. However, the payment of service tax is already made on the basis of invoice issued. Whether there is any recourse to adjust such excess payment of service tax in case of reduction in bill amount. It is a moot question, whether Rule 6(3) of the Service Tax Rules can be of any help in this regards.

(e) Amendment to the amount charged on the basis of change in Arm’s-Length Price (ALP) under the Transfer Pricing Regulations:

It may so happen that the amount charged for service provided is not accepted by the Transfer Pricing Officer for a similar service rendered in earlier year. On this account, it becomes necessary to change the current year’s pricing, and the invoice amount is altered (e.g., cost plus 15% model from cost plus 10% adopted earlier). Whether this kind of change will trigger service tax liability on additional amount charged and when service tax becomes payable on such additional amount.

Conclusion:

From the detailed analysis of the new provisions pertaining to the transactions between associated enterprises, it can be seen that they will add more complexities to the already controversial provisions of service tax. It will result in undue hardship for the taxpayers, particularly small companies, individuals, HUF, partnership firms, BOIs, AOPs, etc. On the other hand, the Department is ill-equipped to track such transactions, which is so difficult for even an honest taxpayer to do, so much so that a taxpayer may not mind paying service tax under the new provisions (on accrual basis), but may find it difficult to identify AEs in relation to the transactions of taxable service. So far, under the service tax, there were two types of assessees, one the provider of service and two, the recipient of service. Now, these provisions have introduced one more kind of person liable to pay tax, on what we call accrual basis.

Above all, the intended benefits appear to be far lesser as compared to the exercise the assessee and the Department have to undertake.

It appears that without realising the implications, the Government has in its overenthusiasm, imported the provisions from the Income-tax Act, which are of widest import and essentially framed for different purpose altogether. This only adds to the woes of the taxpayers under already overcomplicated service tax. Had the provisions been applied for international transactions, it would not have raised much dust. But by applying the same analogy to the domestic transactions, the Government has gone much overboard.

The Great Financial Meltdown and the Accounting Profession 139

Article

The last thirteen months have been witness to the unfolding
of an unprecedented crisis in the international credit and equity markets
resulting in the ultimate demise of the large independent multinational
Investment Bank as a business. It all started with the onset of a correction in
the US real estate prices in mid 2007 leading to the sub-prime crisis which in
turn brought about the near seizure of the mortgage backed securities market
ending with the ‘guided’ absorption of Bear Sterns and Merrill Lynch, the
well-respected Wall Street Investment Banks, by two large commercial Banks — JP
Morgan and Bank of America, respectively. The US financial services business
model has truly been shaken at its roots with the bankruptcy of the iconic
Investment Bank, Lehman Brothers, the US Government bail-out of the mortgage
majors Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac, as also the largest insurance company,
American International Group and the conversion of the illustrious Investment
Banks Goldman Sachs and Morgan Stanley to commercial banks. To unfreeze the
international interbank money markets that had become virtually non-functional
on account of the fear of the imminent collapse of counterparty Banks, the US
Government has come up with the largest ever bail-out, the US $ 700 billion
Troubled Asset Relief Program (TARP) under which the troubled assets of the
banking system would be bought over by the US Treasury to enable banks to clean
up their books and hopefully resume business as usual. The size of the troubled
assets in the US banking system could be at least five times the planned bailout
and hence it is possible that more bail-outs and recapitalisations will become
necessary before the markets come back to normalcy. While the crisis has
substantially dented the fortunes of the US $ 14-trillion US economy, the
bail-out package and its possible successors may just about manage to pull
through the US economy from a further catastrophe. On the other side of the
Atlantic however, the size of the banking crisis is disproportionately large,
relative to the size of the host country economies. Consequently, the banks once
considered too big to fail have now become too big to save for individual
countries. Hence the process of European bank bail-outs would require more than
one country to chip in and a virtual Government takeover of the ownership of the
banking system is currently in progress.


It is worthwhile examining how the problem assumed such
gigantic proportions without some corrective action being initiated sufficiently
early in the cycle. Mortgages offered by banks and housing finance companies are
subject to the capital adequacy norms prescribed by regulators, which requires
them to back the risk in lending with certain minimum capital. The growth in the
mortgage business of a company is hence limited by the quantum of capital
available. Pursuing a more aggressive growth path would entail new capital to be
raised periodically, which limits the attractiveness of the company in the
equity market. To overcome this problem, companies started selling the loans
that they had originated through a process called ‘securitisation’. This
consists of carving out pools of housing loans with different risk and return
characteristics and selling the same through innovative structures to new
investors in the same way a bond is sold in the debt market. Certain new
attributes were added to the pool of housing loans to make the pool more
marketable by offering credit enhancement — by providing that say the first 5%
of default in the pool will be paid for by the seller — or by a third party
offering credit insurance. Such pools — known as collateralised debt obligations
(CDOs) — are rated by credit rating agencies based on the past repayment history
and the value of the underlying house properties that are mortgaged. The
mortgage companies by becoming originators of mortgage loans who sell the assets
at a profit to other investors — typically mutual funds, insurance companies,
hedge funds, etc. — enhance their return on equity without having the need to
constantly raise capital. The CDOs are generally sold at a yield less than the
contracted yield with the individual mortgagees, thus deriving a profit
approximately equal to the difference between the net present values of the cash
flows at the two yields. The system represents the best form of specialisation
with the mortgage companies concentrating on finding credible borrowers to
originate the loan and the ultimate buyers deploying their large resources in a
pool of assets with reasonable yields. Typically the CDOs are divided into
tranches ranging from investment grade — representing borrowers with a good
credit history and loans with high security coverage — to less than investment
grade, also called sub-prime CDOs and sold at varying yields to investors with
different risk appetite. The risk that a mortgage will not be serviced has
certainly not gone out of the system, but is shared between the originator and
the credit insurer to the extent they are liable and the ultimate holder of the
CDO for the balance amount.

The sub-prime woes in the US are a result of the excesses in the system caused by pushing the balance between risk and return beyond prudent levels. Aggressive US Banks were offering attractively priced mortgages to sub-prime borrowers in the hope that the boom in the real estate market will continue and the security cover will be more than adequate when repossession and sale becomes essential on loan default caused either by rising un-employment or firming interest rates. The prospect of being able to quickly sell these loans as COOs at a profit certainly prompted banks to lower lending standards. The continuing bullishness in the real estate market lulled credit enhancers and insurers to take on risks at a price that they would otherwise have not taken and the ultimate investors – frequently high-yield funds promoted by the very banks who originated the mortgages – to hold securitised assets at low yields emboldenedby credit insurance and softening interest rates. Once the real estate prices started correcting and interest rates firmed up, the holders had to mark-to-market the asset-backed securities incurring considerable losses and the credit enhancers/insurers who had taken leveraged bets while underwriting these risks had to suffer huge losses. Aggressive repossession of housing assets and subsequent sale in an already weak housing market caused a further slide in real estate prices, thus jeopardising the asset coverage of CDOs. This chain of events finally left the Wall Street bankers holding billions of dollars of COOs and other asset-based exotica that represent – variously sliced and diced – home loans made out to sub-prime borrowers. With the supply of these securities exceeding natural demand, when they found that there are no real buyers for these securities, they created buyers called structured investment vehicles (SIVs) who would borrow short-term money from the commercial paper market – based on good credit rating from friendly credit raters – and use the money to buy the long-term mortgage assets from these banks. The catch however is that for this game to continue, the commercial paper would need to be rolled over every few months. With the correction in real estate markets getting worse by the day, the sub-prime borrowers started defaulting in servicing their loan obligations and the value of the mortgaged homes could not cover the outstanding loans. With this, the asset-backed commercial paper market dried up, thus denying the SIVs their primary source of funding.

Under these circumstances, the’ SIV could either liquidate the mortgage securities on a forced sale basis or plead with the sponsoring bank to extend their credit lines. The problem with the first option is that the sale at distress prices will force banks to mark-to-market their holdings of similar illiquid securities worth several billion dollars causing huge losses to be booked. Banks therefore preferred the second option, so that they could continue to value their illiquid securities at ‘fantasy’ prices without providing for mark-to-market losses. In a well-functioning capital market, the SIVs would reflect the real-world prices of their underlying assets and on this basis there would be enough funding available from hard-nosed capitalists through the market mechanism. The mark-to-market valuation would necessarily reflect the distressed nature of these assets and the risk appetite of the capital providers. Some help was at hand from the US Financial Accounting Standards Board in this regard with the adoption of FASB 157 from mid-November 2007, which sought to standardise ‘fair value’ accounting. Under this dispensation, assets are classified into three levels, with the first level involving assets with prices quoted in active markets and the second level involving less-traded securities which are valued using the prices of similar assets. At the third level are securities like COOs that are not traded and are valued with the help of financial models based on a series of assumptions, known as the mark-to-model method. The accounting standards require institutions to classify securities such that the mark-to-model method is kept to the minimum and as far as possible, to value level-3 securities based on a gridded or extrapolated level-2 value. Appropriate disclosures of the methods used to estimate the fair value of assets is a requirement. Avoiding the use of market prices or proxies for market prices in preference to mark-to-model methods became increasingly difficult where the accountants sought to strictly implement the provisions of the accounting standard. If truth be told, the implementation of these standards was not uniformly strict.

One of the aspects of the problem that should concern the accounting profession is the fact that the large banks affected by the sub-prime mortgage meltdown had to take on obligations beyond what were considered contingent liabilities and factored into capital adequacy calculations. Bailing out bank-sponsored off-balance sheet vehicles such as conduits, structured investment vehicles and even money market funds beyond the formal legal ob-ligation of the sponsoring bank was at the root of the massive write-downs. This was indeed necessitated by the need to protect the hard-earned reputation of the sponsoring banks, much beyond the scope of enforceable contracts. This development has far-reaching implications for shareholders, the accounting profession, as also bank regu-lators. For shareholders, this was a risk that they never bargained for, but still had to pay for in terms of value erosion. The accounting profession would do well to revisit the level of disclosures and consider putting in place a reporting standard that requires disclosure on such qualitative and unquantifiable risks. Regulators would need to have a rethink on the adequacy of risk capital that may need to factor the financial consequences of banks opting to take on such unenforceable obligations. The dilution of the credit creation function of banks that would be the inevitable consequence of any deleveraging prescription would need to be balanced with the potential benefits of a healthier banking system.

Another lesson that is worth learning from the ongoing credit crisis and is again relevant to the accounting profession is the inappropriateness of leaning too heavily on complex risk and valuation models. The basis of the high credit rating of pools of sub-prime mortgage loans was the assumption that mortgage defaults were essentially independent of each other. This enabled credit raters to use risk models on the basis of the ‘Law of Large Numbers’ that allowed large portions of these pools to be rated AAA on the premise that the probability of a default of more than 20% of principal was very small. The reality however is that defaults in sub-prime mortgages are not independent events when confronted with a steep interest rate rise or a nationwide housing price collapse. Moreover, the dimension of market liquidity is not factored into financial models because there is no agreed method to value liquidity. Regulators need to be concerned that the soon-to-be-enforced Basel II prescriptions rely largely on the use of such discredited complex risk models. The risks to the financial system on the back of reduced capital adequacy norms based on third-party credit rating of risk assets merits a careful evaluation in the light of recent events.

Worldwide tax review — Limitation of Benefits Provisions in Income Tax Treaties

Article

Based on recent news reports, it appears that the Indian
Government is in the process of renegotiating the India-Cyprus Income Tax Treaty
and would like to hold talks to renegotiate the India-Mauritius Income Tax
Treaty. A key change that the Indian Govt. may push for during the course of
renegotiation is to add a Limitation on Benefits (‘LOB’) provision in the tax
treaties.

An LOB provision is an anti-abuse provision that sets out
which residents of the Contracting States are entitled to the treaty’s benefits.
The purpose of an LOB provision is to limit the ability of third country
residents to obtain benefits under the said treaty. This type of use of the
treaty, where third country residents establish companies in a Contracting State
with the principal purpose to obtain the benefits of the treaty between the
Contracting States, is commonly referred to as ‘treaty shopping’.

The introduction of LOB provisions in recent Indian treaties
is indicative of a policy to discourage treaty shopping. Recently, India
renegotiated the India-Singapore Income Tax Treaty (Singapore Treaty) and the
India-UAE Income Tax Treaty (UAE Treaty) through separate Protocols that add LOB
provisions in each, effective in 2005 and 2008, respectively. Although it is too
early to tell how extensive this shift in policy will become, for now India
seems to be following a similar path taken by the United States starting in the
early 1980s when it began renegotiating its income tax treaties and insisting
that treaty partners agree to having LOB provisions in the renegotiated
treaties. For the U.S., it believes that such provisions are effective in
stopping aggressive international tax planning that uses its treaties for the
benefit of third country residents.

A look at the LOB Provisions in the

India-Singapore and India-UAE Treaties :

The recent LOB provision added to the Singapore Treaty is
illustrative of India’s new direction. The India-Singapore Comprehensive
Economic Co-operation Agreement (‘CECA’) was signed on June 29, 2005. As part of
the CECA, Singapore and India agreed on a Protocol and the tax treaty was
amended. The amendments introduced by this Protocol came into force from August
1, 2005.

The Protocol provides that capital gains arising to a
resident of a Contracting State from the sale of property and shares (other than
immovable property or property forming part of a permanent establishment) in the
other Contracting State would be taxed only in the Contracting State where the
alienator is resident.

In other words, when the Singapore company divests its
interest in the Indian company, it will be exempt from Indian capital gains tax.
However, to prevent third country residents from misusing the capital gains
exemption by establishing a holding company in Singapore, an LOB provision was
also added to the treaty.

The LOB provision is very limited in scope, in that it only
impacts capital gains tax and not other benefits provided by the treaty. Under
the LOB provision, a resident company of Singapore will not be entitled to the
capital gains exemption if the primary purpose for the company’s establishment
was to obtain the capital gains exemption. In addition to this test that looks
at a taxpayer’s motive for its holding structure, the provision includes a
second test which provides that companies (referred to as ‘shell’ companies)
that have no or negligible business operations, or with no real or continuous
business activities in Singapore, would not qualify for the capital gains
exemption under the treaty. Under a safe harbour rule, a Singapore company would
not be a shell if : (1) it was listed on recognised stock exchanges of India or
Singapore, or (2) its total annual expenditure on operations in its state of
residence is equal to or more than S$ 200,000 or Rs.50,00,000, as the case may
be, in the 24 months immediately before the date its capital gains arise. It is
not entirely clear whether the Singaporean company still has to satisfy the
motive test even if it passes the safe harbour rule.

In contrast to the Singapore Treaty, the LOB provision added
to the UAE Treaty is broader in scope in that it applies to all benefits
under the treaty. The LOB provision provides that a company would not be
entitled to treaty benefits if “the main purpose or one of the main purposes of
the creation of such entity was to obtain the benefits . . .” of the treaty.
Once again the intention behind the provision is to curb the use of holding
companies that do not have bona fide business activities in India/UAE
from being granted treaty benefits. However, unlike the Singapore Treaty, the
UAE Treaty does not give any guidelines on what is required to prove that a
company has sufficient business activities to obtain treaty benefits. As a
result, this LOB provision will surely create unnecessary uncertainty as to the
application of the treaty. The treaty partners may need to provide some guidance
on this at some point.

From a policy standpoint it appears that India will continue
to request some form of an LOB provision to be added in its treaties in future
treaty negotiations, including renegotiations of existing treaties (such as
Cyprus and Mauritius) where it perceives misuses taking place, making
tax-efficient inbound investment planning for foreign companies more
challenging.

Overview of LOB Provisions in U.S. Treaties :

With the growth of Indian companies, more and more such
companies are seeking to expand overseas and in this regard the United States is
the largest market for expansion. The United States is a high-tax jurisdiction
and has one of the most complex tax systems in the world. As a consequence, an
Indian company expanding into the United States should understand the U.S. tax
system and the tax costs to a foreign investor.

A foreign investor in a U.S. company will generally receive
return on his investment in the form of capital gains from the divestment of the
U.S. business, or the receipt of dividends, interest, royalties and other types
of investment income. As the United States does not tax capital gains on the
sale of capital assets, such as stock in a company (unless the company has
certain U.S. real property assets), foreign investors will not generally have to
concern themselves with U.S. capital gains tax issues on divestment of U.S.
stock.

On the other hand, dividends, interest, and royalties and
other types of investment income would be subject to a relatively high 30% U.S.
withholding tax. Thus, an Indian company would have to focus on how to reduce or
eliminate the 30% U.S. withholding tax on such U.S. investment income.

Finding ways to reduce or eliminate this tax cost is challenging from a U.S. perspective. The best way of lowering the 30% U.S. withholding tax is to access the benefits of a U.S. income tax treaty, which can provide reduced rates from 0% to 25%, depending on the treaty. In this regard, the U.S. has gone through many challenges over the years as a result of foreign investors creating elaborate schemes designed to lower this tax by accessing one of its many income tax treaties by treaty shopping. To counter treaty shopping, the U.S. has negotiated to have LOB provisions included in its treaties including the US-India Income Tax Treaty-(‘India Treaty’). The LOB provisions limit the treaty residents who may be granted treaty benefits. Importantly, the United States has also made changes to its domestic tax laws that complement the measures taken with its income tax treaties, such as, promulgating anti-conduit regulations, and interest earning stripping rules, and through a rich history of case law and rulings have developed substance over form, economic substance and business purpose doctrines that serve to curb tax transactions that are viewed as abusive. For purposes of this discussion, we will focus only on the U.S Treaty LOB provisions.

1. U.S. LOB provisions:

Broadly, the LOB provisions of most U.S. income tax treaties provide that resident companies of the two Contracting States are entitled to treaty benefits (such as reduction or elimination of the 30% US withholding tax rate on investment income) only if they satisfy one of the tests under the LOB provision of the treaty in question. Although each treaty is unique, there are generally at least three objective tests found in most U.S. income tax treaties, namely: (1)the Publicly Traded Company Test, (2) Ownership /Base-erosion Test, and (3) the Active Trade or Business Test. Further, the LOB provisions will typically have a clause providing that benefits may also be granted if the competent authority of the Contracting State from which benefits are claimed determines that it is appropriate to provide treaty benefits in that case. This little used clause gives the Competent Authority of the Contracting State involved discretion to grant treaty benefits in cases where even though the treaty resident cannot satisfy any of the objective tests, it should nonetheless be granted treaty benefits.

We have seen that without the benefit of a U.S. income tax treaty, an Indian investor would be subject to a 30% U.S. withholding tax on its U.S. sourced investment income. Fortunately, the tax treaty with India (‘India Treaty’) provides relief by reducing the 30% U.S. withholding tax rate for dividends, interest and royalties to 15%, 15% and 15/ 10%, respectively. There are also other U.S. income tax treaties that provide even better benefits, such as the UK Treaty, which can provide zero withholding tax on these three types of income if certain other requirements are met. The key to obtaining these reduced rates though is qualifying for treaty benefits under the respective LOB provision.

 2. The U.S.-India Treaty LOB Provision – Article 24 :

The current tax treaty with India (‘India Treaty’) entered into force in December 1990. As with its other treaties, the United States wants to ensure that under the ‘India Treaty’, only ‘qualified residents’ of either treaty country obtain treaty benefits. The paragraphs of Article 24 (LOB) that relate to companies are intended to guarantee that only Indian or U.S. resident companies that have substantial substance and strong business connections or activities in India or the United States may be entitled to use the treaty.

In this regard, Article 24, paragraph 1, provides an Ownership /Base-erosion Test that is a two-prong test, both of which must be satisfied. Under the first prong of the test, more than 50% of each class of an Indian company’s shares must be owned, directly or indirectly, by individual residents who are subject to tax in either India or the United States, or by the government or government bodies of either Contracting State. Under the second prong of the test, the Indian company’s gross income must not be used in ‘substantial’ part, directly or indirectly, to meet liabilities (such as interest or royalties liabilities) in the form of deductible payments to persons, other than persons who are residents, U.S. citizens or the government or government bodies of either Contracting State. The term ‘substantial’ is not defined under the treaty, however, deductible payments that are less than 50% of the company’s gross income will generally not be considered substantial. This provision is generally focussed on stopping situations where third country lenders or licensors use the treaty to obtain the reduced 15% and 15/10% U.S. withholding tax rate for interest and royalty payments, respectively.

Paragraph 2 of Article 24 provides that an Indian company will qualify for treaty benefits, regardless of its ownership (as is required under the Owner-ship/Base-erosion Test), if it is engaged in an active trade or business in India and the item of income for which treaty benefit is being claimed is connected with or incidental to such trade or business. A company in the business of managing investments for its own account will not be treated as carrying on an active trade or business, unless it’s in the banking or insurance business. This treaty does not define the term ‘active trade or business’, but as discussed below, some guidance is available in the U.S. Treasury Technical Explanation to the ‘U.K. Treaty’ (which is the official guide to the U’K, Treaty by the United States) which provides a definition that the U.s. would likely apply consistently to all its treaties. This test is applied separately to each item of income of the Indian company, compared to the Ownership/Base-erosion Test and the Publicly Traded Company Test (discussed below), where if these tests are satisfied, then all the income of the treaty resident is entitled to all treaty benefits.

The third test under Article 24 is the Publicly Traded Company Test under paragraph 3. Under this test, a publicly traded Indian corporation can qualify for treaty benefits if its principal class of shares is sub-stantially and regularly traded on a recognised stock exchange (e.g., the NASDAQ or New York Stock Exchange in the United States or the National Stock Exchange in India).

3. The U.S.-U.K. Treaty LOB Provision – Article 23
:

The current tax treaty with U.K. (‘UK Treaty’) entered into force in March 2003. It is illustrative of the United States’ more recent policy towards its income tax treaties, which is to extend significant tax breaks to its treaty partners. In this regard, the UK Treaty can provide zero withholding tax on dividends (0%, 5%, or 15%), interest (0%) and royalty (0%) payments if certain requirements are met. These reduced rates generally make it a very desirable treaty to access. Under its LOB provision, however, the U.S. has ensured that only certain categories of residents are granted these treaty benefits. The LOB provision is more extensive than the ‘India Treaty’; providing more tests under which a resident may qualify for treaty benefits, but in all cases it provides a high bar requiring that only those companies with significant substance and business activities or connections in the United Kingdom qualify.

Under paragraphs 2(c), 2(f),and 4 of Article 23, there is a Publicly Traded Company Test, an Ownership / Base-erosion Test, and an Active Trade or Business Test, respectively.

Although these LOB tests are similar to the LOB tests under the ‘India Treaty’, there are some important differences under the Publicly Traded Company Test. Under this Publicly Traded Company Test, a publicly traded company includes companies whose principal class of stock is listed on a ‘recognised stock exchange’, just like under the ‘India Treaty’. However, the recognised stock exchanges under this Publicly Traded Company Test include not only exchanges in the Contracting States, but also the stock exchanges of Ireland, Switzerland, Amsterdam, Brussels, Frankfurt, Hamburg, Johannesburg, Madrid, Milan, Paris, Stockholm, Sydney, Tokyo, Toronto and Vienna. In addition, this Publicly Traded Company Test includes a subsection that allows certain subsidiaries of a publicly traded company to qualify for the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits. Under this part of the test, a company resident in one of the Contracting States that is at least 50% held by vote and value by five or fewer publicly traded companies that qualify for treaty benefits under the Publicly Trade Company Test may also qualify for ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits (e.g., a wholly-owned U.K. subsidiary of a Ll.K, publicly traded company whose shares are regularly traded on the London Stock Exchange). Thus, the Publicly Traded Company Test allows more publicly traded companies and their subsidiaries that are residents of either Contracting State to qualify for UK Treaty Benefits than those under the ‘India Treaty’.

The Active Trade or Business Test in both treaties is substantially the same. However, unlike the ‘India Treaty’, the U.S. Treasury Technical Explanation to the ‘u.K. Treaty’ does provide a definition of an active ‘trade or business’ for purposes of qualifying for treaty benefits under this test. In this regard, from a U.S. perspective, a U.K. company will be treated as carrying on an active trade or business if it carries on a ‘specific unified group of activities that constitute an independent economic enterprise carried on for profit.’ In addition, ‘a corporation will be considered to carryon a trade or business only if the officers and employees of the corporation conduct substantial managerial and operational activities.’ Further, any company whose function is to make or manage investments for its own account will not be treated as carrying on an active trade or business (unless it’s in the banking, insurance or securities business). The Technical Explanation makes clear that headquarters operations are considered in the business of managing investments, and therefore, the United States will not treat such companies as qualifying for treaty benefits under this test.

In addition to the tests above, the ‘U.K. Treaty’ also has Derivatives Benefits Test that is not found in the ‘India Treaty’. This test expands the types of resident companies that may qualify for ‘U’K. Treaty’ benefits. It allows a resident company that cannot satisfy one of the other tests to qualify for treaty benefits if it is owned by third country residents that meet certain requirements. Under this test, a resident company will be entitled to treaty benefits with respect to an item of income, profit or gain if: (1) at least 95% of vote and value of the company is owned, directly or indirectly, by 7 or fewer persons who are ‘equivalent beneficiaries’; and (2) less than 50% of the company’s gross income for the taxable period in which the item of income, profit or gain arises is paid or accrued, directly or indirectly, to persons who are not equivalent beneficiaries, in the form of deductible payments. The treaty defines an ‘equivalent beneficiary’ as a resident of an EU country or of a European Economic Area state (e.g., France, Ireland, Germany, or the Netherlands, etc.) or NAFTA states (Canada and Mexico). The equivalent beneficiary must also be entitled to all the benefits of a tax treaty between an EU country, a European Economic Area state or NAFTA state and the Contracting State from which the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits are claimed (the ‘Third Country Treaty’). Further, with respect to claiming treaty benefits for dividends, interest, or royalties, the equivalent beneficiary must be entitled under the Third Country Treaty to a rate of tax on the income for tvhich benefits are being claimed that is at least as low as the rate applicable under the ‘U.K. Treaty’.

The Derivatives Benefits Test can be illustrated with the following example. A U.K. resident company owns a U’.S. subsidiary and is owned 100% by a publicly traded company in France. The U.S. subsidiary pays a dividend to the U.K. resident company. Under the ‘U.K. Treaty’, the u.K. resident company does not satisfy any of the other LOB tests. Its French parent, however, does qualify for benefits under the U.S.-France Income Tax Treaty, which provides a 5% withholding tax rate on dividend payments. Thus, the U.K. resident company will be entitled to the ‘U.K. Treaty’ benefits for dividend payments it receives from the U.S. subsidiary. The treaty rate will be limited to 5% and not the 0% the ‘Ll.K. Treaty’ provides, because that is the lowest rate its French parent would be granted under the U.S.-France Income Tax Treaty.

4. How to Structure Investments into the United States:

Because of LOB provisions it may be that, the most tax-efficient way for an Indian company to reduce the U.S. tax on dividends, interest, royalties and other investment income is to hold its U.S. investment directly and to try and qualify for benefits under the ‘India Treaty’. However, if the company has extensive operations in another country that has a treaty with the United States which gives better treaty benefits than the ‘India Treaty’, then it may be worthwhile considering using that treaty. The ‘UK Treaty’ is the best example of such a treaty.

Planning    Example:

An Indian corporation in the pharmaceutical business owns 100% of an existing U.K. subsidiary that in turn owns 100% of a U.S. subsidiary. The U.K. subsidiary owns a factory in the United Kingdom that produces a variety of products that are marketed and distributed in a number of European countries by third parties and in the United States by the U.S. subsidiary. The Ll.S, subsidiary regularly makes dividend distributions to the U.K. subsidiary, which it uses to expand in its U.K. manufacturing operations. Assuming certain requirements are satisfied under Article 10 (Dividends), the U.K. subsidiary should be able to qualify for treaty benefits under the Active Trade or Business Test to reduce the U.S. withholding tax on dividends from 30% to zero. This is a better withholding tax result than if the Indian corporation had directly invested in the U.S. subsidiary and obtained a 15% U.S. withholding tax rate on dividend distributions from the U.S.

Conclusion:

The tax environment in India is very challenging from an inbound and outbound perspective today. India is keen to receive its share of the tax revenues available in cross-border transactions. To this end it seems to be heading on a policy path similarly taken by the U.S. years ago to allow only a clearly identified group of persons access to its income tax treaties and the tax benefits they provide. The use of LOB provisions in Indian income tax treaties will be something to take into consideration by foreign investors to avoid being treated as treaty shopping. For Indian companies expanding into the U.S., they will have to take a closer look at its tax treaties and the challenging requirements set out by the LOB provisions within them to effectuate tax-efficient structures for their overseas business operations.

Assessments and Monitored (?)(!) Assessments under the Income-tax Act, 1961

Articl

All taxpayers are assessed u/s.143, u/s.147, u/s.148 and
u/s.153 of the Income-tax Act, 1961. After filing of return, when an assessee is
being assessed by an Assessing Officer, he/she is required to file his/her
submissions before the respective authority during the course of assessment. All
these assessments are popularly known as ‘Scrutiny’ assessments. In case of
these assessments, the authority before whom these proceedings are going on is
supposed to form his opinion after verifying books of accounts, documents,
submissions, proofs, evidences, statement of cross-examination of the parties
concerned, etc. by bringing on record all or some of these things from the
assessee, his/her representative and also by collecting independent evidences,
proofs, documents, etc. To collect information, the assessing authority also can
call outsiders by taking his/her statement on oath u/s.131 or u/s.133. After
doing this exercise in full or in part, if the assessing authority is satisfied
on issues arising out of the assessment proceedings, he records his findings in
respect of the said assessment and he passes an order known as assessment order.


The following information is necessary in the assessment order :

(i) Section under which the assessee is being assessed,

(ii) Assessment year for which he is being assessed,

(iii) Dates of hearing,

(iv) Date of filing return by the assessee,

(v) Amount of income at which he has assessed him,

(vi) Amount of income declared by the assessee in his
return of income,

(vii) Why the assessing authority is making addition, if
any ?

(viii) Details of records verified by him during the course
of assessment,

(ix) Date of passing assessment order,

(x) Demand, if any, arising after the assessment
proceedings. While raising the demand he will have to give proper credit of
the taxes paid by the assessee as advance tax, self-assessment tax and TDS/TCS,
if any.


While forming his opinion, he will have to give proper
consideration to the submissions made by the assessee during the course of
scrutiny. He has to consider the proofs, documents, evidences, etc. produced by
the assessee. He may verify the statements, trading, Profit & Loss A/c, balance
sheet & relevant schedules with the books of accounts of the assessee. He may
take relevant extracts of one or more accounts from the books of accounts of the
assessee. He may further cross-examine the account extract given by the assessee
with those of the extracts he has called from the relevant parties from their
own books of accounts. Such parties may be the debtors, creditors, suppliers or
customers of the assessee concerned. The Assessing Officer is supposed to know
the following important things :

(i) The nature of business,

(ii) All important characteristics of business,

(iii) Nature of transactions being carried out in the
business,

(iv) All uncommon terms used in the business under
assessment before him.


The Assessing Officer must know the following things before
starting the assessments of some uncommon types of assessees. The Assessing
Officers are generally conversant with the way of common transactions of
trading, manufacturing and professional income and its assessments, but many
times are found non-conversant with the following types of assessees and the
terminology being used in these types of businesses.


For example :

A. In lottery business :


(i) Prize Winning Tickets : In case of lottery
business, the stallholder from whom the customer purchases lottery tickets makes
the payment to the buyer of the winning lottery ticket, which has got prize. The
stallholder in turn, while making his payment to his supplier (wholesaler) makes
payment partly in terms of cash/cheque and partly in terms of these winning
tickets. This chain of payment continues till end to the govt. under which the
lottery is monitored. The amount seen on the assets side of any balance sheet of
lottery dealer (whether wholesaler, retailer, distributor, stockist or sole
stockist) is the balance of such tickets held by him on the particular day
received by him from his customers in discharge of their liability of price of
tickets. These are awaited for sending to the supplier in the chain as payment
of his cost of tickets.

(ii) Cost of Participation in Draw (CPD) : While
framing a scheme of lottery, the expenses on cost of printing tickets, royalty
payable to govt., local taxes (sales tax, octroi, etc.), profit of the parties
involved in the chain including sole distributor, cost of transport, cost of
distribution, etc. are taken into account for deciding the amount available for
distribution by way of winning, to the people taking part in the lottery. This
is termed as Cost of Participation in the Draw i.e., CPD.

(iii) Cost towards Prize Fund (CPF) : While forming a
scheme of lottery after allowing the expenses referred above which are termed as
CPD, whatever is kept for distribution by way of various prizes of lottery is
collectively termed in lottery business as Cost towards Prize Fund (CPF). This
amount remains unchanged from the govt. till the final consumer. The amount of
CPD goes on changing at each point due to addition of expenses and margin of
profit of each party involved in the chain.

(iv) Unsold Loss : After the scheduled time of draw of
a particular lottery, if some tickets remain in balance with the seller, these
tickets become non-saleable and are required to be scrapped. Amount paid as
purchase price of these tickets is known as unsold loss.

(v) Unsold Winnings : After the scheduled time of draw
of a particular lottery, if some tickets remain in balance with the seller,
these tickets become non-saleable and are required to be scrapped. Out of these
scrapped tickets if some ticket wins some prize, it is known as unsold winnings.

B. In case of a labour contractor :


(i) Mess Charges : Amount paid by the labour
contractor towards food charges of the labourers and their families is termed as
mess charges and deducted as expenditure from the income of the labour
contractor.




ii) Tent charges: Amount paid by the labour contractor towards lodging and accommodation facilities of labourers and their families is termed as tent charges and deducted as expenditure from the income of the labour contractor.

For giving proper justice to the assessment, it is necessary that the Assessing Officer should know the terms used by the assessee in his business in detail; otherwise, he cannot do proper justice to the work of assessment entrusted to him. The above detailed examples are given to elaborate the essence of knowledge of these terms to an Assessing Officer in respect of uncommon terms used in such uncommon businesses.

Many times before the higher forums of appeal, it is seen that the Assessing Officer has:

  •     Not given proper justice to the submissions made by the assessee,


  •     Not understood the nature of transaction and therefore misinterpreted it and added it to the assessee’s income,


  •     Not understood the exact nature of business of the assessee,


  •     Acted beyond  his authority,


  •     Not given proper time to the assessee for proving his case,


  •     Misinterpreted the facts brought before him by the assessee,


  •     Not called for information independently, ‘-which he could have otherwise collected easily, for want of proper justice,


  •     Not allowed the opportunity of cross-examination


  •     Not given the assessee the opportunity of natural justice,


  •     Not given the assessee the opportunity of being heard,


  •     Decided the case only with oral directions of his higher authorities without giving thought to the interpretations made by such authorities, whether the same are correct or otherwise.


  •     Decided the case on the basis of some irrelevant papers, proofs, records, etc. not related to the case.

For giving justice to the assessee, for want of proper interpretation ‘of facts of each case, for helping the Assessing Officer to interpret the facts in a proper manner, thereby to avoid the loss of revenue as well as loss of assessee, to avoid scenario of apparent mistakes or errors of facts in assessments, the system of monitored assessments must have been introduced in the statute. The intention of the statute behind introducing the above system must be to reduce unnecessary paperwork, reduction in appeals and proper justice to the assessee at the assessment stage only, due to wrong interpretation, if any which may take place because of misunder-standing of facts of each case by the assessing officer at assessment stage only. Though the intention of the statute was genuinely to help the assessee, what is the present position? The present position is not as the statute has expected at the time of its introduction, but is totally different.


The Assessing  Officer is required to act on the directions of the senior authorities. During the course of assessment, the Assessing Officer generally presents views of his senior official to the assessee or his representative in respect of a point of disagreement that, though he is satisfied with the explanation given by the assessee or his representative, the Additional Commissioner or the Administrative Commissioner to whom he has to report, is in dis-agreement with the view. He may say that the senior authorities are hardpressing for making addition on some point or the other on any of the grounds for the various reasons.

In such a situation,  generally  the assessee  or their representatives  try to narrate  the case orally before the senior authority  with or without  the consent of the Assessing Officer. In fact, such type of oral representation  has no legal standing.  In some cases, it may have helped the assessee to avoid the proposed addition.  But as opposed  to the few times the assessee  may  have  got justice  by  this  exercise  of meeting  senior  authorities  and  explaining  before them the case, in majority  of the times  the senior authorities   may  put  the  ball  in the  court  of the Assessing Officer by giving  some oral reply which is not legally binding  on them. At the same time, they direct their junior  regarding  their  own interpretation  and ask him to pass an assessment  order as per their oral directions,  which  in their opinion is the correct interpretation  of facts. On such inter-pretation,  the Assessing  Officer is bound  (though not legally) to pass the assessment  order as per the interpretation  of the senior  authority.  But, in such situations,  we tax professionals  should  not  choose this path  of meeting  and  explaining  orally  to the concerned senior authority the facts of the case, but we should choose the legal available path to come out of the situation at the assessment stage only. This gives us a legal tool for avoiding the situation of appeals and thereby avoiding expending of time, money and man-hours.


The following steps can be taken:

In case an Assessing Officer during the course of assessment is in disagreement with the views taken by the assessee and puts it that the view is not taken by him but is a directive given by his senior (Additional Commissioner/Administrative Commissioner), if an assessee or his representative finds that a particular interpretation of facts in a case is not being correctly done by the Assessing Officer, then the assessee can present his case by giving the facts in detail in writing to such senior authority (generally, an Additional Commissioner or Administrative Commissioner) of the Assessing Officer and ask him his view of the matter in writing u/s.l44-A. S. 144-A of the Income-tax Act, 1961 is a very important legal tool in our hand in the situation narrated above. In present situation, when there are a number of cases being selected for scrutiny, occurrence of such a situation may be so frequent.

S. 144-A of the Income-tax Act, 1961 reads as follows:
“A Joint Commissioner may, on his own motion or on a reference being made to him by the (Assessing) Officer or on the application of an assessee, call for and examine the record of any proceeding in which an assessment is pending and, if he considers that, having regard to the nature of the case or the amount involved or for any other reason, it is necessary or expedient so to do, he may issue such directions as he thinks fit for the guidance of the (Assessing) Officer to enable him to complete the assessment and such directions shall be binding on the (Assessing) Officer.

Provided that no directions, which are prejudicial to the assessee shall be issued before an opportunity is given to the assessee to be heard.

Explanation: For the purposes of this Section, no direction as to the lines on which an investigation connected with the assessment should be made, shall be deemed to be direction prejudicial to the assessee.”

Interpretation of the above Section clearly shows that an Additional Commissioner is bound to answer the application made under this Section. If the senior authority agrees with the view taken by the assessee, then on getting the answer in writing the lower authority is bound to accept that view in respect of the assessment and frame his assessment by considering the same. At the same time, we may file a letter in writing to the assessing authority that he may wait till the reply of application made by the assessee to the senior authority u/s.144-A is received.

The above-referred situation to the best of my knowledge, in present times, is only a theoretical situation. In day-to-day practice, neither the practitioners nor the assessees use this Section, and in effect do not use an important weapon in the hands of the assessee. This Section is a very important tool, which the assessee and practitioners may use for their benefit and thereby reduce the wastage of time and energy to some extent.

In fact, neither. the senior officers in the Income-tax Department in capacity of Administrative Commissioners or Additional Commissioners want to give their opinion in writing. What is going on practically is the hybrid mix of the Section, whereby the assessee and practitioners are put into trouble and the Departmental senior officials are not bound by anything directed by them to their juniors, as they are neither giving anything in writing to the junior officer, nor to the assessee, who is finally becoming the victim of such wrong directions. At the same time, the senior officer in the Department is not bound by any of his directions. The present practice of monitored (!) (?) assessments is therefore wrong, impractical and hence required to be immediately changed with the use of available tool of S. 144 by the assessee as well as by the tax professionals.

I sincerely feel that the present system of monitored assessments is wrong for reasons given above. The submissions made by the assessee are, in his absence, being interpreted by the Assessing Officer to his senior authorities or the senior as per his own understanding. He may interpret the submissions made by the assessee, without going into the details of the case from the assessee or his counsel. The interpretation of the senior authorities may be different if the assessee himself or his counsel explains the fact to the authority. On explanation by the assessing officer in the absence of the assessee, the senior forms his views and gives his opinion to the Assessing Officer, who in turn raises the views of the senior before the assessee, and the assessee is required to answer the questions so raised. In this system, there is every possibility of misinterpretation of facts by the senior authority, non-consideration of an important fact by the authority while forming his opinion and dictating it to his junior Assessing Officer. Also, there is every possibility of improper representation of a case by the Assessing Officer to his senior for various reasons given above, thereby resulting in injustice.

I therefore sincerely feel that the present system of monitored assessments should be changed with the use of available tool of S. 144 by the assessee as well as by the tax professionals. But in cases having higher tax stake, points raised by the higher authorities should be heard by both the Assessing -4. Officer and the monitoring authority simultaneously. Opinion formed by both of them after such hearing will have some sense. Otherwise, the present system of monitored assessments, without using the tool of S. 144-A, will result in assessments without doing proper justice to the asses sees.

Auditing Beyond Compliance

Article

1. Background :


It is a matter of general perception that the role of the
auditor is only to do whatever in order to issue an opinion of ‘true and fair’
on the financial statements of the company under audit. Statutory audit cannot
therefore be perceived to do anything beyond audit of the relevant books of
account, obtaining explanations and representations from management and other
relevant stakeholders such as banks, suppliers and customers.

The role of the auditor together with the duties and
responsibilities are contained in several provisions of the Companies Act. The
said Act and the ICAI’s Code of Ethics are very specific in terms of the roles
and responsibilities of the auditor and the ‘bounds’ within which he should
operate. The Companies Act of 1956 and the Code of Ethics of the ICAI also deal
at length with the issues relating to ‘independence’ and under which, there can
be various penalties for non-compliance.

In addition, the general understanding of the role of audit
on the part of auditors is that it is a compliance function where the auditor is
appointed to audit the books of accounts for a very specific purpose and that is
to express an opinion of ‘true and fair’. More importantly, the perception is,
had it not been for the requirement under the Companies Act, it is possible that
the client would dispense with this service.

The aforesaid factors have, in one manner or the other, had
their impact on the auditor who believes that his role is that of a compliance
officer of the company that he audits.

Companies also share the general perception that audit is
primarily a ‘compliance’ function and therefore, the auditor should restrict his
role to that of a compliance officer. This thinking sometimes also arises on
account of the belief that auditors do not ‘add value’ beyond audit of the books
of accounts; companies perceive that audit as a function exists to meet
requirements prescribed under the Companies Act with regard to proper
maintenance of books of account.

A number of accounting firms also believe that audit is
purely a compliance function and have therefore set limitations on every aspect
of their work. As a result, clients perceive very little ‘value add’ in terms of
the services rendered and whatever doubts that existed in their minds about the
role of audit gets further confirmed. Companies also use this argument whilst
fixing or negotiating auditor’s fees, little realising the services the auditor
renders.

The purpose of the article is to highlight the fact that
‘looking beyond compliance’ is very much within the overall role of compliance,
except that we need to understand the fact that it is important to shed the
traditional thinking that the role of the auditor begins and ends with pointing
out errors in accounting, non-compliance with law and getting them rectified or
reported.

2. Widening the horizon : What does ‘Auditing Beyond Compliance’ mean !


The perception of audit as a compliance function has to start
with the auditors recognising the fact that they cannot be putting ‘fetters’ on
themselves by playing merely the role as ‘compliance officers’. The important
thing to understand at this stage is, what does ‘auditing beyond compliance’
actually mean. Most professionals imagine this entails adding value in terms of
identifying areas for cost reduction and control, process improvements through
the identification of processes that do not add value, etc. Auditing Beyond
Compliance need not always involve going beyond the normal call of duty as an
auditor as one can see in the following paragraphs :

A. Adopting a pro-active approach to audit :


Most auditors fail to recognise the importance and value in
adopting a pro-active approach to auditing. Transparency and proactivity can
build trust and the auditor must recognise that this policy works in almost all
cases. For example, many auditors involve their client personnel in important
decision making such as planning of the audit. Client staff is invited for
sessions where the audit approach is explained at a broad level; what are
auditor’s expectations from the client in terms of information, the timing of
information, etc., providing general guidance to client staff in the preparation
of certain audit schedules without getting into ‘conflict of interest’
situations, etc. are some of the simple ways of going beyond compliance. Client
staff becomes very comfortable dealing with auditors who work alongside them and
help them understand and address some of the complex requirements. Helping
client staff in various procedures involved in a simple stock-take can add
value. For example, auditors can provide critical inputs in helping client staff
keep the production area clean and demarcated to facilitate stock-count.
Similarly, many auditors transfer knowledge on important areas such as revenue
recognition to enable client staff to record revenue correctly. Cut-off
procedures invariably pose a challenge and the auditor can provide inputs to
client staff achieve effectiveness of cut-off procedures. The auditor can add
significant value in the process of assisting clients without compromising on
his independence as auditor.

B. Partnering clients :


In addition to assisting clients during course of audit, many
auditors partner clients in many other ways: For example, clients face
difficulties in understanding the implications of new accounting standards and
therefore, get delighted when auditors play a pro-active and partnering role.
Thus, when AS-30 was introduced, many clients were not conversant with the
complex requirements. Auditors provided the much-needed knowledge on how to
comply with the requirements relating to ‘hedge accounting’ including
documentation requirements. Clients were advised what needed to be done right
from the beginning, so that they understood the key aspect of ‘hedge
accounting’.

Many auditors recognise the importance of keeping clients informed on all major developments in terms of new laws and accounting requirements, etc. that impact companies in general and a client in particular. As a result of this communication, auditors develop a relationship that results in a ‘no surprises’ audit. This is because, most contentious issues are discussed and resolved prior to year end, particularly with the top management to ensure that nothing is taken to the audit report as a ‘matter of qualification’. All issues that have a reporting implication are discussed well in advance and remedial action taken to ensure closure of issues. It is possible that even after all this, the auditor may decide to go ahead with a qualification in his report. But, this will be seen as clearly the last alternative, as opposed to a feeling that ‘not all options were explored’.

In the past few years, many medium-sized companies have been entering into M & A transactions, collaboration agreements and royalty agreements, etc. These are out of the ordinary transactions and involve complex accounting and other issues where the auditor can play an important role. Many auditors provide clients that are in the process of entering into such transactions, ‘on line’ accounting and other advice, so that accounting implications that have a significant bearing on the transaction can be taken into account before finalising the transaction. Also, it would provide the client with comfort that these transactions will not be subject to accounting review at the year end, since they are already ‘agreed upon’ with the auditors.

Similarly, audit of transactions on a quarterly basis, asking for confirmation of balances during the year or a date close to year end date (without diluting the effectiveness of the audit procedure), etc. are some of the ways in which significant value can be added.

C. Adhering to client deadlines, targets, etc. :

Many auditors believe in the importance of adhering to client deadlines in terms of finalising the accounts. Invariably, board meetings for adoption of accounts are fixed well in advance and cannot be postponed except at great embarrassment and heartburning. In such cases, auditors discuss the entire schedule to finalisation well in advance with the client to ensure that a timeline is drawn up that is adhered to by both parties. In case the timeline is very aggressive, the matter is taken up with management immediately and conveyed. Even in such cases, clients are asked to draw up a schedule to demonstrate that the timelines are workable and realistic. Once agreed upon, there is no question  of ‘backing  out’  at the  last moment.

Fixed timeline audits invariably lead to many arguments and heartburning because the schedule is not adhered to and the ‘blame game’ starts with the auditor invariably being held responsible for the delay. Auditors therefore maintain a very pro-active and open communication with the client where, any potential problems are escalated and thrashed out in advance only, to avoid the blame game. Auditors foresee such issues well in advance and discuss the issue with the client in an open and free manner to save on the ‘last minute’ surprises.

D. Conflict    resolution:

Auditors who do not adopt the ‘Compliance Auditor’ mindset adopt a very positive attitude towards conflict resolution. By adopting an attitude where ‘solutions need to be found if they at all exist’ as opposed to ‘how can solutions be found in such cases’, auditors go beyond the compliance approach to partner clients on a very pro-active basis and in the process add significant value. The auditor perceives his role not merely as a ‘compliance officer’ whose job it is to find mistakes, errors, deviations from accounting practices and non-compliance with law, but looks at such issues with an open mind to ascertain whether solutions exist, before reporting them to the members.

Most auditors believe that finding solutions to problems is not their ‘business’, whereas clients feel delighted when auditors perceive their role as ‘solution finders’ and not merely, ‘fault finders’. As a result, clients see great value even in cases where the auditor is constrained to report such deviations, etc. in his audit report.    .

E.  Mentoring and knowledge sharing:

An auditor gathers Significant amount of business knowledge during the course of audit. In many cases, such knowledge does not get shared and is a waste. However, many auditors share the knowledge they have acquired during course of audit by way of communication to audit committees and boards. In addition to sharing knowledge gathered by him, management letters containing areas of cost reduction, better compliance, etc. are high-lighted and discussed with the client together with a clear plan of action to avoid recurrence. Clients also feel delighted with auditors who identify areas which help remedy faults from recurring. In the process, the auditor adds value that goes beyond the ‘compliance function’.

F. Conclusion:

Adopting the right attitude towards the audit function and working beyond self-imposed constraints are options that are clearly available to the auditor without compromising on any of his duties and responsibilities as the auditor. Auditors need to recognise that playing the role of the ‘compliance officer’ does not mean putting a fetter on one’s ability and attitude towards the role. In fact, the auditor invariable gets an opportunity to play a pro-active, positive role in terms of partnering the client. Assisting the client improve upon his stakes is the best way to transform. As a matter of fact, the only way to transform is to play an active role in helping and mentoring clients change for the better.

If audit is to be given the right place and value, auditors, companies and other institutions need to work towards getting audit its rightful place and that is, it is one of the most valuable and insightful functions that is awarded to an ‘outsider’, who is provided with an opportunity to look at various transactions entered into by the company in a systematic and insightful manner, evaluate at times business risks in addition to various aspects of internal control including assessing the ‘tone at the top’ that is set by the management in the course of business.

The profession of accountancy and audit is on the threshold of significant changes in the wake of the business failures that we are witnessing by the day across the world and if it has to serve its role effectively, it will need to get rid of the shackles it has put itself under and work towards expressing itself constructively, in a pro-active manner. An auditor should work as a partner to the business by communicating to the audit committee, the board and the management in a timely manner on all important issues of which he has gained knowledge during course of audit.

Lastly, the ICAI has embarked on a massive project aimed at making the entire accounting framework IFRS compliant, by 2011. Auditors have been provided with the most valuable opportunity to assist clients in this process in several ways without, at the same time, getting conflicted out. Auditors of companies have already started advising companies what the implications are and what the impact would be in the year of transition. Companies are therefore delighted that auditors have become very pro-active and this augurs well for the profession.
 
‘Auditing Beyond Compliance’ therefore is largely, a mindset issue and auditors really need to embrace change to become more relevant to their clients by adopting a more proactive, constructive and ‘partnering’ approach towards clients. The challenge before the auditor is to become the client’s trusted advisor and partner, without losing out on ‘independence’.

Fair Value Accounting

Article

Fair value accounting is a concept that has attracted
worldwide debate as to its appropriateness in financial statements. Terms such
as ‘mark to myth’ and one based on judgmental aspects which tend to demean the
very concept of prudence are slated as arguments for the same. It is also true
that most of the criticism comes from the ‘old guard’ who have always
believed that
historical cost is one of the most verifiable concepts in
accounting. The fact is that the world has moved on and fair valuation is a
measure by itself. The accounting profession needs to wake up to this reality
and take necessary steps to make sure fair valuation (now a big element of the
‘true and fair’ opinion) is well understood. Our profession needs to be well
equipped to make sure we use it appropriately and not expose it to abuse the way
it is feared to be.


The issue is : what is Prudence. ‘Prudence is the
inclusion of a degree of caution in the exercise of the judgments needed in
making the estimates required under conditions of uncertainty, such that assets
or income are not overstated and liabilities or expenses are not understated.
However, it completely ignores assets or liabilities that expose an entity to
market-related risks. The issue is : Is that prudent ? Especially in today’s
times when in free markets, entities are exposed to market risk (intentional or
unintentional).


Fair value accounting envisages accounting for unrealised
gain to reflect a ‘true and fair’ view of the state of affairs.

Fair valuation has brought to the notice of an investor the
true profits in companies like Enron, WorldCom and Waste Management in
the past and a host of financial services companies in the current credit market
meltdown. This is mainly because over the years, the masters of business have
been under acute pressure to show results and the masters of finance have helped
them achieve it at any cost. This has led to the use of financial and other
instruments in our financial statements, making fair valuation a very important
aspect of today’s financial statements. Also, the use of derivative instruments
has been genuinely necessitated as we globalise businesses and as countries open
up to free trade.

Let’s now examine what are the flaws with fair value
accounting. The biggest issue to fair value is that of illiquidity and its
related concern that in both boom and bust time market values are not
real. Firstly, India does not have any traded benchmarks except government
securities, and secondly, over-the-counter products are very difficult to
measure. Accordingly, we prefer not to record any perceived market losses unless
we believe they are permanent. Gains are a complete no unless realised.
Unfortunately we judge losses with the same parameters as we assess gains, but
only record the former should the diminution be permanent. How fair is that from
a ‘true and fair’ perspective ?

The reality is that companies have certain investments of a
permanent nature (HTM held to maturity) and some of a trading nature (short-term
investments or positions taken which do not actually hedge any underlying
transaction)
. The former is normally treated as a long-term asset where
values would be realised over the period to maturity with any diminution being
recorded should there be a perceived risk. The trading assets and
derivates which do not necessarily hedge an underlying transaction
are
effectively hexposures to market risk and hence, are not intended to be held to
maturity. Accordingly, these should be marked to market at any accounting period
to bring into the results and perceived gain or loss from the asset. The fact
that such gain is permanent or temporary is not of concern. The financial
statements should reflect the results of the market risk position taken by an
entity. Our legacy accounting principles completely ignore this concept, as
these did not exist in India until the recent past when our economy opened up as
part of our reforms.

Another example where we completely ignore fair valuation is
in while recording debt with equity conversion features. We seem to
completely ignore the optionality to convert in financial statements
today. And the only way to record these is through fair valuation. Take FCCBs
for instance. Our corporates have been recording the FCCB as if the conversion
is not an option but a definite event. In the present situation where stock
prices have fallen and conversions are unlikely to happen, companies are faced
with cash redemptions and huge back-ended interest costs. Fair value accounting
would have valued the options at fair value and treated the balance as a debt.
The option value would tend to become zero near redemption should conversion
price and market price of stock converge. This would ensure an equitable profit
or loss and the optionality clearly being recorded on the balance sheet. Our
traditional cost system records the consequence of conversion as an unlikely
contingent event which ends being ignored by investors and analysts alike.


A key understanding that most accountants, bankers and CFOs
alike tend to get confused with is the difference between hedging and hedge
accounting. This is where most transactions get confused as hedges and hence are
not fair valued. Hedging is a dynamic measure where a decision-maker consciously
performs a correlation exercise to identify how an underlying market risk can be
hedged. Hedge accounting is a measurable principle which provides

guidelines as to when a derivative instrument can be regarded as a hedge to an
underlying. For example, if someone sees a correlation between the price of
apples and the price of oil, he could effectively buy oil futures to hedge
against moving apple prices. That would make his P&L immune should his
hypothesis be correct. However, this would not qualify for hedge accounting as
it may not meet the criteria of commonality of risks. However, if the hypothesis
is true, then whether hedge accounting is followed or not, the impact on the
profit and loss account would be similar.


We also seem to have mixed issues of fair value accounting with capital adequacy norms (especially in the financial services sector). The issues revolve around certain companies not reflecting pension costs in line with AS-15 or transferring of securities initially purchased as trading to HTM. These are artificial coverages to maintain adequate capital. However, there should be a distinction made in special situations between regulatory and financial capital adequacy. We tend to break or amend the financial thermometer, but do not succeed in improving the health of the patient. Instead we make the doctor’s task more difficult as the problems do not go away through accounting solutions.

Having considered fair valuation as a bane in most situations, India is possibly one of the few countries which allow asset revaluations which completely goes against the historical cost concept or prudence and is a way to fair valuation of assets provided the increase is of a permanent nature (which only restates balance sheets at replacement costs, a completely unverifiable proposition). However, as this is an age-old practice we continue it.

While it is easy to point the faults inherent in fair value accounting, it is less easy to identify an alternative method which would better fulfil the features of relevance, reliability, comparability and understand ability . Reference to historical prices would provide less comparable and much less relevant information given that the company itself views the underlyings at fair value (e.g., options). Illiquid financial instruments are a challenge, but even there the idea of reducing the scope of fair value has not resulted in credible options. An al-ternative is to ‘mark to model’. Models have been widely used and may aid transparency if backed by detailed disclosures about underlying instruments and mark to model assumptions.

Another issue debated is the relevance of fair valuation in the present markets. Should assets be marked down to reflect losses as these are not the values at which companies may sell? My own argument is that if a company sold its assets at the balance-sheet date, fair value is what it would receive for the assets, regardless of whether such values are artificially low in current markets. Irrespective of the company’s intention to hold this until markets improve, the lack of liquidity in current markets can, and has, forced companies to sell assets at these ‘artificially’ low values. In the current market situation, any accounting which fails to highlight liquidity risk in the way that fair value accounting does, would fail to capture the risk appropriately. Fair value accounting reflects the reality that investors are faced with as far as trading assets are concerned.

In the final analyses, fair value accounting as prescribed internationally and in AS-30 can best be described in the same breath as Churchill’s portrayal of democracy, “It’s the worst system with the exception of all others”. Though there is a lot of judgment involved and there is enough potential to abuse it especially in an illiquid environment, there is a lack of any other credible alternative. Though there is a need to have a vigorous debate around fair value, the fact remains that as a profession we need to. clearly understand the concept and see how we could challenge the interpretations taken by our industry and banking colleagues.

Desirable?

Article

We are heading towards full convergence of the Indian GAAP
with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) subject to certain
small exceptions. Otherwise also, the recently issued accounting standards are
based on either the corresponding IFRSs or the International Accounting
Standards (IASs). Thus, the process of convergence has already begun. The chief
reason given for such convergence is that in a globalised economy and with
investors in all countries looking for outbound investments, it is desirable
that corporations the world over follow the same set of principles in preparing
their accounts. Another area of concern is that the present accounts fail in
disclosing strength or weakness of a corporation, as the figures in financial
statements, in most cases, represent ‘cost,’ which has hardly any relevance in
times of changing values.


The conceptual difference between the accounts under IFRSs
and under the Indian GAAPs is that in many instances (except in the case of
inventory, where the age-old principle of ‘lower of cost or net realisable
value’ will continue to apply) the figures in accounts under the IFRSs will be
reported on the basis of ‘fair value’ of the items, whereas such items by
and large are reported at present at ‘cost’, unless the fair value happens to be
lower than the cost — for example — investments. The fair value concept demands
that if an item has appreciated in value over its cost, the appreciation will be
recognised and if it has declined in value, the decline will also be recognised.
Thus, basically, the fair value-based accounting amounts to abandoning the
concept of prudence — that is — unrealised gains are not to be accounted.

The question is : should India fully converge with IFRSs and
adopt fair value as the basis of accounting in place of ‘cost’ ? The answer
depends on the following discussion.

First, let us see reasons that are in favour of ‘cost’
forming the basis of accounting. ‘Cost’ of an item can be computed with
reasonable certainty. Cost of an item may comprise elements like cost of labour,
material, finance charges, etc. It is possible that different corporations may
define ‘cost’ differently for the purpose of accounting an item. However, once
‘cost’ is defined by a corporation for a particular purpose, it is uniformly
adopted for all purposes. All elements of cost would be such as have resulted in
an outgo of resources or in creation of an obligation if there is no immediate
outgo of resources. In short, cost of an item is by and large a figure arrived
at objectively. Such cost yields itself to verification and to its reliability.
Thus, the accounts presented under the cost-based accounting are
reliable
.

Let us also see the reasons that represent weakness of the
cost basis of accounting. The most significant weakness of such accounting is
that it fails to reflect ‘changing values’ and fails to account for inflation
(or deflation) in the value of currency. Because of such weakness, it is argued,
accounts fail to reflect strength or weakness of a corporation and fail to yield
to comparison with the accounts of another corporation. This weakness is real.

Let us examine the technical soundness of the conceptual
aspect of the IFRSs. As seen above, the IFRSs are fair value-driven unlike our
present conservative approach to accounting displayed in the principle of ‘lower
of cost or net realisable value’. IFRSs require write-up of financial assets of
trading nature if their fair value exceeds the cost just the same way as they
require such assets to be scaled down if the fair value drops below the cost.
This is quite in contrast to the principle of ‘prudence’, which so far formed
the basis of accounting policies and standards.

Thus, fair value-based accounting does remove the above
weakness of cost-based accounting. Hence, accounts under the ‘fair value’ basis
will show the present value of a corporation representing the changing values of
assets, and may therefore, be more useful to users. It is argued that accounts
prepared on ‘fair value’ will be more realistic as they reflect the correct
value of a corporation.

However, the major weakness of the fair value-based
accounting is that such accounts will depend a lot on valuation of assets. Value
of an asset is determined by an open market if the asset is freely traded there,
or arrived at on the basis of such valuation models as accountants and valuers
use, or a combination of both. Fair value accounting implicitly assumes that
such value is the correct value of the asset. It is questionable whether this
implicit assumption is correct. Valuation of an asset involves a good amount of
individual skill, the making of a number of assumptions, forecasting future,
using several valuation models and accepting value arrived at under one method
or accepting an average of values arrived at under different models. Only the
naïve can be convinced that such valuation is objective
as there will be a
good deal of subjectivity involved in the process of valuation.
Any valuation necessarily involves looking into the future, making assumptions,
and the terms ‘future’ and ‘uncertainty’ are synonymous. No two individuals,
astrologers included, foresee the future in the same manner. When we contemplate
the large numbers that the accounts of modern corporations contain, we can
understand the significance of a small error, intentional or otherwise,
committed in arriving at fair value of items and its impact on the truthfulness
of accounts.

If accounts adopt values discovered by an open market wherever that is possible, for the purpose of preparation of accounts, the scenario may look better than the one under which value is determined by one or more valuers. However, it is also a myth that the value discovered by the free market is always ‘true value’. In fact, the way the markets behave one may wonder whether there is at all any thing like ‘true value’, especially in the context of financial instruments whose accounting will be greatly impacted under the ‘fair value’ accounting. Stock exchanges are the epitome of free markets and continually strive to discover value of securities. But high degree of volatility in the market makes the whole exercise speculative. Falls in the share market witnessed recently the world over exploded into smithereens the myth of reliability of market valuation. If one studies the recent market trends world over, one might think that the present times are ripe to abandon ‘fair value’ accounting and revert to prudence and cost-based accounting. I repeat recent market volatility should serve to establish the weakness of the ‘fair value’ accounting.

I believe ‘fair value’ accounting makes accounting subjective and financial statements prepared on the basis of subjective criteria hardly inspire confidence. Such accounts offer a great scope for manipulation at times with mala fide intentions. The hope that auditors willdetect such manipulations willalso prove to be a myth, not because auditors do not do their job but because auditing has its own limitations which the society and the users must recognise. We must admit that with the introduction of accrual basis of accounting we had introduced some degree of subjectivity in accounting especially whilst making provisions. Still, by retaining ‘cost’ as the basis of accounting coupled with prudence we have succeeded in eliminating much of subjectivity in the accrual system of accounting. We have been able to produce by and large reliable accounts. Fair value-based accounts will raise doubt about the reliability. As fair value-based accounts are deemed to be more relevant than cost-based accounts, it appears reliability is taking a ‘back-seat’ to relevance. The issue is : should this happen, is it good for business?

Let us also see whether the fair value-based ac-counting completely serves the purpose which it avowedly professes to serve. It is said that such accounting will help determine the true value of a business, which, in accounts prepared under the cost-based accounting is not possible. However, this argument in favour misses one vital point : that the value of a business is not only a function of the value of its assets, but is also a function of intangible assets including human resources, which are mostly off-balance sheet items. Hence, these two vital elements, namely, intangible assets and human resources, which influence the value of a business, still remain outside the books of account. Let us not forget that value of business is a perception. It is at times the price paid to enter the market to eliminate competition or acquire market share.

Though the fair value-based accounting has its advantages, like any other method of accounting may have, it is a question whether the fair value should form the basis of accounting replacing the cost as a concept. Fair value-based accounting may satisfy one group of readers of accounts, but it may throw up several issues of far greater significance. For example, balance sheets and income statements prepared under the fair value-based accounting will still have to be certified as being true and fair. May be such accounts are relevant for a purpose, yet it will be difficult to say that they are reliable. We need to decide what we want: relevant accounts or reliable accounts; I am of the opinion that reliability should not be sacrificed. However, to make financial statements more relevant all that is necessary is to require managements to provide on the value of assets including intangibles. The managements should also be required to disclose all off-balance sheet liabilities. The analysts and the investors I am sure would know how to make use ‘of this information. I don’t think we should play with the reliability of financial statements. In any case, no big investments in corporations are made without undertaking what is known as ‘due diligence’ exercise. Therefore, at the time of such exercise, all required information can be elicited from the management.

To sum up, fair value-based financial statements being highly subjective, are a myth open to manipulation for ulterior purposes. The age-old concept of ‘true and fair’ is in jeopardy. I don’t think, business and the profession should take or accept the ‘risk’ – risk of manipulation. Let us stick to prudence and reliability.

Good Bye Prudence

Article

‘I think it is hard to argue with the conceptual merits of
fair value as the most relevant measurement attribute. Certainly, to those who
say that accounting should better reflect true economic substance, fair value,
rather than historical cost, would generally seem to be the better measure’.


[Robert Herz, Chairman of the Financial Accounting Standards
Board in CFO Magazine, February 2003, page 40, quoting from a speech at a
conference of Financial Executives International].


‘I know what an asset is. I can see one, I can touch one, or
I can see representations of one. I also know what liabilities are. On the other
hand, I believe that revenues, expenses, gains, and losses are accounting
concepts. I can’t say that I see a revenue going down the street. And so for me
to have an accounting model that captures economic reality, I think the starting
point has to be assets and liabilities’.

[Thomas Linsmeier, Member of the

Financial Accounting Standards Board,

in “Will Fair Value Fly?” on CFO.com,

September 20, 2006].

1.1 ‘Accounting concepts’ have evolved over time and
therefore ‘accounting’ is commonly referred to as being an ‘art’ rather than
‘pure science’. Hitherto, financial statements were commonly prepared in
accordance with an accounting model based on ‘historical cost’. However,
times have changed, and there has been a conscious move to the ‘fair value’
model, driven by expectation gaps that historical model caused.

1.2 It needs to be noted that even under existing standards,
some account balances are determined using ‘some sort of fair valuation’, for
example, provision for doubtful debts or diminution in the value of investments
and inventories. But going forward, in the changed scenario fair valuation
principles are expected to be applied more extensively in the preparation of
financial statements. India will be adopting International Financial Reporting
Standards in 2011 and the Institute has notified AS-30 and AS-31, which are
extensively fair value driven.

2.1 Among the questions being debated are : How fair is
fair value 
? How does fair valuation measure up on the principles of
relevance and reliability ? How easy is it to audit fair value ? How will
fair value accounting work in practice and what are the implications for
performance measurement ? Furthermore, the profits arising from value changes
may not
have been realised, and recognition of unrealised gains goes against
the traditional prudent approach to accounting. Worse, if the unrealised
gains get distributed as dividends, it may create major liquidity and
going-concern issues. This article is an attempt to provide a balanced
assessment of this controversial and multifaceted topic.

2.2 The IASBs Framework for the Preparation and
Presentation of Financial Statements
adopted by the IASB in April 2001
stated that the objective of financial statements was to provide information
about the financial position, performance and changes in financial position of
an entity that is useful to a wide range of users in making economic decisions.
As per the Framework, the four principal qualitative characteristics ‘financial
statements’ should have are ‘understandability, relevance, reliability and
comparability’
. Other qualitative characteristics are
materiality, faithful representation, substance over form, neutrality,
prudence
and completeness. The Framework is now under revision. In the
Exposure Draft, relevance and faithful representation are identified as key
characteristics. The enhancing qualitative characteristics are comparability,
verifiability, timeliness and understandability. Interestingly, prudence and
reliability
do not find any place in the proposed revised
Framework.

2.3 The International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) has
given significant importance to fair valuation in IFRS. IASB’s new and revised
standards are based, to a great extent, on an accounting model that focuses on
fair valuation for recognition, measurement and disclosure of assets and
liabilities and that income and expenses are determined by reference to
increases and decreases in assets and liabilities, rather than the reverse, as
in the case of the historical model. Besides financial instruments, other
standards that require use of fair valuation include business combination,
employee compensation, share-based payments, impairments, intangibles,
biological assets and investment properties.

2.4 However, at this point in time fair value is definitely
not well defined even in IFRS standards, and the determination of ‘fair
value’ can be highly subjective. Though many IFRS standards require fair
valuation, there is no single standard that prescribes how to determine ‘fair
value’. Some argue that in the preparation of financial statements, IASB has
placed too much emphasis on ‘relevant information’ and has given
inadequate consideration to reliability and understandability. The danger
to relevance, reliability and comparability of financial statements using
calculated, hypothetical, non-market-based fair values was well illustrated in
an exercise conducted by an accounting firm to determine ‘employee stock
option charge’
. By making changes to the input variables, all within the
allowable parameters of IFRS, option expense as a percentage of reported income
could vary as much as 40% to 155%.

2.5 Worse still, current IFRS standards include a variable
blend of both historical cost and ‘fair value’ measurement, for example :

  •  assets held to maturity are accounted on the basis of amortised cost, if held to maturity intention is demonstrated.

  • changes in ‘fair value of ‘assets available for sale’ are recognised in equity, whereas in the case of trading assets, the ‘fair value’ changes are recognised in the income statement.

  • hedge accounting brings in the matching concept, so that fair valuation volatility is contained. Therefore in the case of hedging, fair value changes in a derivative are not immediately recognised in the profit and loss

  • account, but matched with future changes in the fair value of the hedged item.
  • both cost and fair valuation approach is permitted for investment properties. If the fair value model is applied, the changes in fair value are recognised in the income statement.

  • only the fair value approach is followed in )-the case of biological assets, with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.

  • fixed assets are accounted either by applying the cost model or the fair valuation model. If fair value model is used, the changes in fair value are not recognised in the income statement, but are recognised in a reserve account.

  • intangible assets are predominantly accounted for using the cost approach with the fair value approach allowed only in the case of a few intangibles that have a ready market

2.6 With this hotchpotch, the understand ability prerequisite of financial statements prepared under IFRS has been compromised. Users are likely to be confused as financial statements have become an aggregation of apples and oranges.

3.1 We will now seek to understand the difference between ‘historical cost’ and ‘fair value’ accounting, how they measure up to the qualitative characteristics identified in the Framework and why prudence and reliability have lost their relevance in the changed scenario. Other alternative accounting models are: current cost, reproduction cost, replacement cost, net realisable value, value in use and deprival value. However, this article is restricted to a discussion between the historical cost and fair value approach.

3.2 Under historical cost, assets and liabilitiesare recorded at historical cost, followed by amortisation or depreciation. On the other hand in the ‘fair value’ model, assets and liabilities are recorded at the amount for which an asset or liability could be exchanged between knowledgeable and willing parties in an arm’s-length transaction. Historical cost gives no consideration to recoverability. It is only a measure of the amount expended. It has been observed that the value of an asset is represented by the future economic benefits expected to flow. The historical cost of an asset lacks this attribute, and therefore it must be supplemented by a measure of recoverable value to meet the ‘true and fair’ test. This aspect has been partly taken care of by requiring an impairment provision when recoverable amount falls below the historical carrying amount.

3.3 Some argue that a presumption of recoverability is implicit in the historical cost and amortisation, because it can be generally presumed that an entity will not pay more for an asset than it believes to be its value either in use or sale. However, the belief of asset cost recoverability may reflect entity-specific expectations that mayor may not be reasonable, and supported by observable evidence.

3.4 In contrast, ‘fair value’ stands on its own as the value could be exchanged between knowledge-able and willing parties dealing at arm’s length. Hence, the value of probable future economic benefit is reflected in the ‘fair value’. Further, ‘fair value’ of an asset needs no additional assessment of recoverable amount, because ‘fair value’ repre-sents the market’s measure of its recoverable value.

3.5 The historical cost-based accounting is premised on ‘cost-revenue matching’ objective. The ‘cost-revenue matching’ objective’ has its roots in the economic premise that costs are generally incurred to earn revenue. Business entities are set up with the objective of transforming various inputs of goods and services into outputs that can be sold for revenues that exceed the cost of inputs. The traditional accounting objective has been to recognise the cost of an asset as an expense when the revenues to which the asset is considered to contribute are recognised. Net income is then measured on the basis of matching costs with related revenues.

3.6 This traditional matching objective has undergone significant changes. It is now well accepted that an input must meet the definition of an asset to warrant capitalisation and that its cost should be carried forward only to the extent that it can be considered to be recoverable from future cash-generating activities or sale. Further, the market-place is the final arbiter in determining the recoverable value of an asset.

3.7 To carry forward an asset at historical cost that differs from its fair value results in wrong in-formation being given in later periods when the asset is ultimately realised (through sale or use) and would be violative of the basic accounting principle of cost matching revenue. It is reasoned that carrying an asset at ‘fair value’ is actually in line with the concept of ‘true and fair’.

3.8 Further, historical cost concept is not for-ward looking. In comparison, ‘fair value’ of an asset embodies market expectations and helps users to evaluate the risk and volatility dimension. In addition, financial disclosures that use ‘fair value’ provide investors with insight into prevailing market values, thereby enhancing the usefulness of finan-cial reports.

3.9 It is axiomatic that it is better to know what something is worth now than what it was worth at some time in the past. . . Historic cost data is never comparable on a firm-to-firm basis, because the costs were incurred on different dates by different firms or even within a single firm.

3.10 Today, investors are concerned with value, not costs. ‘Fair value’ accounting would in principle lead to better insight into the risk profile of the financial entities than is presently the case, more so in the light of the requirement to move many relevant off-balance sheet items onto the balance sheet. Financial stability could benefit if shareholders, uninsured depositors and other debt holders are in a position to readily identify a deterioration in the safety and soundness of an entity. In fact, their reactions either by directly interfering in managerial choices or by exiting from the investment could put pressure on the entity’s management to take early corrective action.

3.11 ‘Fair value’ accounting is timely because it brings economic reality into the balance sheet. With growing concern on ‘going concern’ of entities, a balance sheet prepared on ‘fair value’ basis will provide more relevant information as compared to a balance sheet prepared on outdated historical cost.

3.12 ‘Fair value’ balance sheet is a better representation of the net worth of an entity’s financial position than compared to a historical model. ‘Fair value’ measure of assets and liabilities is attractive because it meets many of the Framework’s qualitative characteristics of useful financial information. ‘Fair value’ can also be viewed as a better presentation of stewardship, as fair values are essential for determining performance ratios such as return on capital employed.

3.13 ‘Fair value’ of an asset or liability depends only on the characteristics of the asset or liability and not on the characteristics of the entity that holds the asset or liability or when it was acquired. ‘Fair value’ is a market-based measure that is not affected by factors specific to a particular entity; accordingly it represents an unbiased measurement that is consistent from period to period and across entities.

3.14 ‘Fair value’ is a solution to the accountant’s problem of income measurement: In accordance with the widely-accepted Hicksian definition of income is ‘a change in wealth – the change in fair value of net assets on the balance sheet yields income’. Hence, ‘fair value’ measure is to be preferred to the hundreds of rules underlying historical cost income. The issue is – how do we take control of the reported numbers out of the hands of corporate management? We do it by requiring that assets and liabilities be reported at ‘fair value’.

3.15 Whilst one could debate the use of fair valuation for non-financial asset and liabilities, there is little debate as regards valuation of financial assets and liabilities. The issue really is : how does one use historical cost to value stock options or derivatives ?

3.16 ‘Fair value’ seems to be the only basis for valuing financial assets and liabilities. FASB be-lieves:

  • ‘fair value’ for financial assets and financial liabilities provides more relevant and under-standable information than cost or cost-based measures.

  • ‘fair value’ to be more relevant to financial statements users for assessing the current financial position of an entity, because fair value reflects the current cash equivalent rather than the price of a past transaction.

  • with the  passage  of time,  historical  prices become irrelevant in assessing an entity’s current financial position.

3.17 In case there is a well-defined and liquid market, defining ‘fair value’ is not problematic. However, for illiquid assets or liabilities it may be necessary to use a model to derive ‘fair value’, such as one based on the present value of ‘future cash flows’. But model’s assumptions, such as the r relevant discount rate, may vary widely between in-stitutions and types of assets/liabilities and such variations raise questions about reliability. As a result, some opponents of ‘fair value’ suggest that:

  • ‘model’ can only sensibly be used in relation to items for which there exists an efficient market.

  • ‘model’ at times may fail the ‘consistency and comparability’ test.

  • value based on internal models will have implications for the auditors, as their verification is dependent upon accepting the logic underlying the model.

3.18  The counter argument is that even if there is a degree of potential unreliability as to the values, they are still useful to decision-making, because they represent economic reality as opposed to an accounting ‘fiction’ in the form of historical cost. A ‘fair value’ based balance sheet is a better representation of the net worth of an entity than one based on historical cost.

4.1 Having considered the superiority of fair valuation over the historical model, now let’s look at the pitfalls of fair value. Clearly ‘fair value’ is not a panacea for all ills. At this point in time ‘fair value’ methodology is definitely not well established in IFRS or US GAAP, and the determination of fair value can be highly subjective. In the absence of any specific guidance, ‘fair value’ raises a number of issues, such as:

  • What should be the level of unit at which fair value is determined ?
  • Whether market price will be adjusted be-cause of size?
  • Whether block discount or block premium are considered for determining fair value?

  • Whether fair value would be the entry price or exit price ?
  • Which market is the most advantageous or principal market considered for determining fair valuation?

  • How are transaction costs treated for deter-mining fair valuation?

  • Should fair value measurement assume the highest and best use of the asset by market participants even if the intended use of the asset by the reporting entity is different?

  • Where quoted market price is not available, which valuation technique is appropriate: should it be the market approach, cost approach or income approach?

  • Within the various valuation techniques, how are the various assumptions made, for ex-ample, if the income approach is used, how would the cash flows be discounted to present value and risk adjusted for uncertainty?

  • What is to be done where market inputs are not available, for example, the credit worthiness of a home loan portfolio.

4.2 The term ‘Fair value’ implies active and liquid markets with knowledgeable and willing buyers and sellers and observable arm’s-length transactions – not values calculated on the basis of hypothetical markets, with hypothetical buyers and sellers.

4.3 ‘Fair value’ also increases the risk of misunderstanding on the part of existing or potential investors. ‘Fair value’ might be the realisable market value, but it will not necessarily equate to the market value of the entity because of the existence of internally generated goodwill or other intangible assets. It cannot be denied that ‘Fair value’ brings balance sheet value closer to the market value. However, using fair values for decision-making remains relatively difficult, but probably less difficult when compared to the historical model.

4.4 In the absence of market value, a surrogate has to be used by regarding a mathematical calculation of a hypothetical market price as a fair value. This is illustrated in the following ‘fair value hierarchy’ that has been developed by the US FASB and embraced by the IASB. This indicates the process that should follow for determining ‘fair value’ :

4.5 The reality is that a Level 3 subjective assessment will be required to measure ‘fair value’ in many situations. This will apply to intangible assets acquired in a business combination, unquoted equity securities, equity securities quoted on illiquid markets, derivatives, pension costs, provisions for share-based payments, asset revaluations, impairments and biological assets during the growth phase.

4.6 The fundamental question is whether such hypothetical amounts are sufficiently understandable, reliable, relevant and comparable for financial reporting.

1.    Do the users understand how hypothetical and subjective ‘fair value’ can be?

2.    Can valuations that are not independently verifiable be considered reliable?

3.    Is information that is not reliable, relevant in the world of financial reporting?

4.7 ‘Fair value’ measurement models have been developed for some contractual assets and liabilities especially financial instruments. There seem to be fewer prospects for developing reliable fair value measurement models for non-contractual assets that are inputs to revenue-generating processes – assets that do not generate cash flows by themselves, but contribute along with other inputs to a cash-generating process – can present significant fair value measurement problems when there are no observable market prices for identicalor similar assets, for example, an equipment that is configured for a specialised use. It could be concluded that realisable value in the marketplace is nothing beyond its value as scrap, or the market value of unspecialised equipment less estimated costs to restore to its unspecialised condition. This view presumes that the market does not attribute any value to use. This would be an unreasonable presumption.

4.8 The reliability of fair value estimates is de-pendent not only on how well a model replicates accepted market pricing processes, but also on the reliability of data inputs and assumptions that marketplace understands – for example – data inputs required by ‘accepted stock option’ pricing model includes the current price of the underlying stock, the volatility of that price, the effects of vesting provisions, and the risk-free interest rate for the expected life of the option. The market prices of certain of these inputs can be readily observed, for example, the risk-free inter-est rate can be derived from the price of government bonds and the current price of the underlying stock can be observed if it is traded in a market. The market’s measure of some other inputs may not be so readily determinable, for example, the effects of vesting provisions and the appropriate measure of volatility. Further, the measure of volatility on pricing an option is commonly based on past volatility, which may not be fully indicative of future volatility. Consistency of such data with market expectations requires careful evaluation in the context of the particular circumstances and disclosure of the basis of such data, underlying assumptions and the extent of measurement uncertainty. It may not be out of place to quote Warren Buffet, who feels that ‘marking to market’ has changed to ‘marking to a model’ but is actually ‘marking to myth’.

4.9 As many assets and liabilities do not have an active market, the inputs and methods for estimating their fair value are subjective making ‘fair’ valuation less reliable. Federal Reserve research shows that ‘fair value’ estimates for bank loans can vary greatly depending on the valuation inputs and methodology used.

4.10    Banking  regulators    have observed  that  minor  changes in the  assumptions in a pricing model can have a substantial impact  and reliability can be a significant concern. However, FASB feels  that reliability can  be  significantly enhanced  if market inputs are used whilst valuing.

However, because management uses significant judgment in selecting market inputs when market prices are not available, reliability will continue to be an issue. Management’s use of judgment bias – whether intentional or unintentional in the valuation process, may result in inappropriate fair value also resulting in misstatement of earnings and capital. This is the case in the overvaluation of certain residual tranches in securitisations in recent years in the absence of active market. Significant write-downs of overstated asset valua-tions have resulted in the failure of a number of entities operating in the financial market.

4.11 It should be clear that the date and purpose of valuation is critical in establishing a ‘fair value’. A valuation determined at a particular point in time generally should not be relied upon for value on any other date. In the same vein, a valuation made for a particular purpose may not be appropriate for another purpose. Moreover, given the current state of the art, particularly with regard to credit risk models, reliability of financial statements could be negatively affected as fair values do not always convey precise information regarding an entity’s risk profile. Misjudgement can trigger overreaction, which can have a negative impact on the valuation of an entity.

4.12 We continue to read stories about earnings manipulation under the ‘historical cost’ model. The author believes that in the absence of reliable fair value estimates, the potential for misstatements in financial statements prepared using fair value measurements is greater. Moreover, valuations that are not based on observable market prices but on management judgments will be difficult to audit.

4.13 Volatility in earnings is another constant argument one hears against fair valuation.

1.    For assets and liabilities held to maturity, the volatility reflected in the financial statements is artificial and misleading as any deviations from cost will be gradually compensated during the life of the financial instrument, ‘pulling the value to par’ at maturity.

2.    An excessive reliance on fair values, including non-actively traded assets on illiquid secondary markets run the risk of embodying ‘artificial’ volatility, driven by: short-term fluctuations in financial market or caused by market imperfections or by inadequate de-velopment of valuation model.

4.14 The counter argument is that financial in-stitutions may have an incentive to take proactive measures in order to prevent this from occurring, by building additional reserves and thereby increas-ing their resilience in case certain binding finan-cial ratios are exceeded (e.g., capital requirements or ratios used in loan covenants that could trigger actions such as repayment).

4.15 Increased volatility is not necessarily a problem if investors correctly interpret the information disclosed. In particular, market analysts and institutional investors should try to extrapolate fair valuations from a variety of sources and mature financial markets would be in a position to appropriately interpret this increased volatility.

4.16 Implementation and maintenance of a fair value accounting system will cost time and resources. There may be other alternatives that may make more sense in a given situation. A case in point is one where biological assets are required to be fair valued by fAS 41. Other than questioning the need to fair value non-financial assets, the fact that biological assets are generally owned by small enterprises should not be ignored. These enterprises may find the whole process defeating, since fair value done at prohibitive cost may be completely useless for the purposes of decision making.

4.17 IAS 41 requires biological assets to be fair valued. IAS 41 met with severe criticism because many biological assets are simply not capable of reliable estimate of fair value. For example:

Take for instance, a colt which is kept as a potential breeding stock, grows into a fine stallion. The stallion starts winning race events and is also used in Bollywood films, as the stallion earns substantial amount for its owner from breeding and other services, the stallion gets older, his utility decreases. Eventually the stallion dies of old age and the carcass is used as pet food. At each stage in the life of the stallion, the ‘fair value’ would change significantly, but estimating the fair value would be extremely subjective and difficult. The issue is : if changes in fair value of fixed assets are not recognised in the income statement, then why should the treatment be different in the case of biological assets?

Vineyards and coffee and tea plantations have similar measurement issues. The relationship between the vines and coffee or tea plants and the land that they occupy is unique and integrated. The vine or plant itself has relatively little value. However, in conjunction with the land, they do have value. Determining the fair value for a vine-yard, coffee or tea plantation involves esti-mating production along with sales prices and costs for a number of years in the future, together with estimating a terminal value and the application of a discount rate to calcu-late the net present value – an enormously complex and subjective task. The value of the vines and plants would then have to be determined as a residual because it would be calculated by deducting the value of the un-improved land and the value of the infra-structure from the aggregate value. It is clear that the valuation in the above examples is based on subjective estimates and is open to substantial variability.

4.18 Pitfalls – of using ‘fair value’ for biological assets are:

  • these are subject to droughts, floods and diseases which events are difficult to mea-sure.

  • during the transformation process, it could be very difficult to determine ‘quality of the assets and their value’.

  • accounting for unrealised gains arising from changes in fair value can give a distorted picture of the financial results. It could be misunderstood and may lead to inappropriate decision-making, such as dividend declaration from unrealised profits.

4.19 Applying the ‘fair value’ option to the report-ing entity’s liabilities poses a particular problem, especially from a prudential point of view. As, under the fair value option, fair value measurement is not restricted to market developments (e.g., market interest rate fluctuations or changes in the exchange rate parities), but is all-encompassing, i.e., it also includes fluctuations caused by changes in the reporting entity’s credit rating – for example – a deterioration in the entity’s credit rating and the resultant devaluation of its own liabilities leads to an increase in its capital, for example, if an entity that has borrowed at 10%, credit worthiness goes down subsequently, and can now borrow only at 12%, it would record a fair value gain on the earlier loan reflecting the 2% gain on account of its own credit deterioration. From a prudential point of view, this is unacceptable.

4.20 In case of banks and financial institutions:

  • Upward revaluations of assets (when asset prices are increasing) would be reflected in bank profits and bank management could face pressure from shareholders to distribute dividends, including unrealised gains on assets.

  • Banks’ ability to smooth intertemporal shocks would therefore be adversely affected.

  • Historical cost, on the other hand, applies the principle of prudence which does not recognise unrealised gains.

  • Historical cost makes it possible to build up reserves during good times, which can then be depleted during bad times. Historical cost would translate into lower variability in banks’ income and would allow banks to insure themselves against unforeseen circumstances.

4.21 However, the flaw with the above argument is that:

  • prudence does not reveal the truth, hence is certainly not liked by investors, who want to know the truth.

  • prudence is an arbitrary concept and one sided, requiring unrealised losses to be recognised, but does not allow unrealised gains to be recognised.

  • prudence results in unrealistic accounting – take for instance, two investments of absolutely the same type, except that one distributes entire earnings by way of dividend whereas the other does not pay any dividends. If prudence were to be applied, then the two investments would be valued differently. Dividends would be recognised as income; however, in the case of the other investment, which is equally profitable, no income would be recognised. Such mis-match would not occur if both investments were recorded at ‘fair value.’

  • ‘Prudence’ also is seen by many as a means by which entities could inappropriately smoothen their profits through the creation of excessive provisions.

4.22 The inadequacy of historical cost, transac-tion-based approach for dealing, in particular, with derivatives (which have little or no initial cost but can expose companies to very substantial financial risk) and diminutions in the value – impairments of assets, have encouraged standard-setters to espouse an asset/liability approach to recognition of income and a ‘fair value’ basis of measurement of assets and liabilities.

4.23 Although the recognition of unrealised gains and losses on financial assets is achieving wider acceptance, the IASB has not yet put forward any convincing arguments in favour of a ‘fair value’ model for non-financial assets. IAS 41 does not require the existence of active market for using fair value in case of biological assets. This approach is inconsistent with other international standards, for example – for valuing intangibles under IAS 38, the existence of an active market is a perquisite for using fair value.

5.1 The arguments for and against fair value accounting raise fundamental questions about core accounting issues, such as how performance should be measured, and the relative merits of the qualities of relevance versus reliability. Fair value accounting is a paradigm shift – it moves away from ‘historic focus’ to a ‘current perspective’ on value. However, the standard-setters now face a significant dilemma :

how can they continue to pursue their mark-to-model approach to asset/liability measurement and, at the same time, promul-gate accounting standards that will lead to a style of financial reporting that enables investorsto evaluatemanagement performance and assess enterprise value to make sound
investment decisions ?

5.2 The issues are:

  • How can shortcomings of the ‘fair value’ model be addressed !
  • How to improve reliability of level-3 valuation!

5.3 The answer is :

  • IASB should develop a standard on fair valuation and address the basic interpretative issues that are currently prevalent (lASB is working on this project).

  • IASB should be clear as to whether it would want to draw a distinction between financial assets and liabilities and non-financial assets and liabilities, because non-financial assets and liabilities are held for long-term use in the business and ‘fair value’ cannot be reliably determined. Comparatively, financial assets and financial liabilities are more liquid and can be fair valued with greater reliability.

  • Develop an appropriate accounting model by drawing a distinction between financial items and non-financial items. The accounting model is then applied consistently, eliminating any disparities or inconsistencies that could confuse users.

  • Make valuation systems and processes more robust by having specificity and clarity on fair valuation techniques to ensure more reliable valuation numbers and eliminate chances of bad judgments.
  • Another alternative is limiting application of the fair value model to those assets and liabilities that have real and determinable market value, along with compulsory disclosure of ranges of possible fair values together with assumptions and sensitivity analyses. A point to’ be noted is that users need financial statements that have predictive value in terms of providing a sound basis for decision-making, which is a quite different matter from supplying users with financial statements that give the impression that they are themselves predictions. Unfortunately, IASB has so far chosen not to follow this path.

5.4 The most interesting question in everyone’s mind is how long it will take for the full range of non-financial assets, and particularly internally generated goodwill, to be measured using ‘fair valuation’. That would make future balance sheet, a valuer’s balance sheet rather than an accountant’s balance sheet.

5.5 Using fair values to measure assets and liabilities is attractive because it meets many of the Framework’s qualitative characteristics of useful financial statement information. These criteria are to be applied in the context of the primary objective of financial reporting, which is to aid investors and other users of financial statements in making economic decisions. The criteria include relevance, comparability, consistency, and timeliness. Fair values are relevant because they reflect present economic conditions, i.e., the conditions under which the users will make their decisions. Fair values are comparable because the fair value of any particular asset or liability depends only on the characteristics of the asset or liability, not the characteristics of the entity that holds the asset or liability or when it was acquired. Fair values enhance consistency because they reflect the same type of information in every period. Fair values are timely because they reflect changes in economic conditions when those conditions change. In addition, fair values can be viewed as fulfilling a stewardship role for financial reporting because the financial statements reflect the values of assets at the entity’s disposal. Such values are essential for determining performance ratios such as return on capital employed. The author would conclude by stating that despite its faults, ‘fair value’ is here for good and as the valuation models become more established in future accounting standards, many of the criticisms on fair valuation would disappear. If marking to market is a myth, then historical cost accounting is rather a mystery. A return to full historical model would be a retrograde step. Investors are definitely not seeking financial statements that have outdated information. Change to ‘fair value’ is a challenge to our profession and I am sure we will meet the challenge.

Taxation of Alimony

Article

1. Introduction :


Even though marriages are made in heaven, divorces take place
on earth, and as death and taxes are inevitable, the question arises about
taxability of alimony in the hands of the receiver.

There are various laws that govern the quantum of maintenance
awarded by the Court. An application for maintenance can be filed in India by
Hindus under the Hindu Adoption and Maintenance Act, and under the Hindu
Marriage Act. People belonging to other religions are governed by their personal
laws. However, irrespective of one’s caste, creed or religion, any person can
file an application for maintenance, u/s.125 of the Criminal Procedure Code.
Besides the wife and husband, the parents and children of the respondent, can
also vice versa claim maintenance under this particular Section.

The Court decides to grant maintenance only when an
application is filed before it. It is entirely at the discretion of the Court to
decide if at all any maintenance deserves to be awarded to the applicant/
petitioner, and if so, then the amount of maintenance to be granted. Whilst
doing so, the Court takes into account various factors that would affect the
quantum of maintenance to be decided upon, such as the status and the financial
position of the parties concerned, the number of dependants on the respondent,
etc. Although the wife who makes the application for maintenance is earning
sufficiently well for herself, she can yet be entitled to alimony in case her
husband’s income exceeds way beyond her own, on the premise that the wife is
entitled to live as per the standard and status of her husband.

The amount of maintenance once fixed by the Court can be
altered if there is a reversal of circumstances. There can be an enhancement or
reduction of the same.

If there is failure on the part of the husband to pay up the
maintenance amount decided upon by the Court, the Court dismisses any relief
that he is entitled to.

The Court can refuse alimony if it is proved that the wife
has a good source of income; or if it is found that she has been living in
adultery. In recent times, the laws in India have become very strict. The Court
has taken a very firm stand as regards the status of the wife. Only the lawfully
wedded woman is considered as the wife. Certain recent judgments pronounced by
the Court have very clearly indicated that mistress or second wife is not
entitled to maintenance. However, children from the second marriage are entitled
to maintenance from the father.

2. Taxation of Alimony received :


Now with this very brief background about ‘Alimony’, let’s
see the taxation of the alimony in the hands of the receiver. The following
factors need to be considered in this regard :

The word ‘Income’ is defined in S. 2(24) of the Income-tax
Act. This definition does not specifically cover ‘Alimony’. But at the same time
this definition is an inclusive definition and hence whatever can fall under
natural meaning of the word ‘Income’ is covered under this definition.

Now to look at the natural meaning of the word ‘Income’, we
must consider the following factors.

We first have to decide whether the receipt is a capital
receipt or it is a revenue receipt. Capital receipts are not taxable unless
otherwise specifically taxed by the law and all revenue receipts are taxable
unless otherwise exempted by the law.

When during the course of continuance of marriage the husband
gives money to his wife for the upkeep and maintenance of his family including
herself, the same is not regarded as her income, as by the customary laws, the
earning husband is duty bound to maintain his family. Payment of alimony arises
out of the same duty recognised by various statutes; the only difference being
that in this case the marriage does not subsist.

In CIT v. Shaw Wallace and Co., AIR (1932) PC 138;
(1932) 2 Comp. Cases 276; it has been held that :

“The object of the Indian Act is to tax income, a term
which it does not define. It is expanded, no doubt, into income, profits and
gains, but the expansion is more a matter of words than of substance. Income,
in this Act connotes a periodical monetary return coming in with some sort of
regularity, or expected to be continuously productive, but it must be one
whose object is the production of a definite return, excluding anything in the
nature of a mere windfall. Thus income has been likened pictorially to the
fruit of a tree or the crop of a field.”


In Dooars Tea Ltd. v. Commr. of Agri., IT (1963) 44
ITR 6, the Supreme Court has pointed out that it is necessary to bear in mind
that the word ‘income’ as used in the Indian IT Act, 1922, is a word of elastic
import and its extent and sweep are not controlled or limited by the use of the
words ‘profit and gains’ and they have pointed out that the diverse forms which
income may assume cannot exhaustively be enumerated, and so in each case the
decision of the question as to whether any particular receipt is income or not
must depend upon the nature of the receipt and the true scope and effect of the
relevant taxing provisions.

In H.H. Maharani Shri Vijaykuverba Saheb of Morvi v. CIT, (1963) 49 ITR 594, it was held that a voluntary payment, which is made entirely without consideration and is not traceable to any source which a practical man may regard as a real source of his income but depends entirely on the whim of the donor, cannot fall in the category of ‘income.’ Thus voluntary and gratuitous payments which are connected with the office, profession, vocation or occupation may constitute income, although if the payments were not made, enforcement thereof cannot be insisted upon. These payments constitute income because they are referable to a definite source, which is the office, profession, vocation or occupation. It could thereof be said that such payment is taxable as having an origin in the office, profession, or vocation of the payee, which constitutes a definite source for the income. What is taxed under the Indian IT Act is income from every source (barring the exception provided in the Act itself) and even a voluntary payment, which can be regarded as having an origin, which a practical man can regard as a real source of income, will fall in the category of income, which is taxable under the Act.”

The motive of payer is not relevant while deciding whether a receipt is revenue or capital in nature. [P. H. Divecha v. CIT, (1963) 48 ITR 222 (SC)]

In (IT v. Smt. Shanti Meattle, (1973) 90 ITR 385 (All.) it was held that “In the circumstance of the case, the allowance received by the assessee from her husband was held to be taxable as income in her hands.”

In CIT v. M. Ramalaxmi Reddy, (1980) 19 CTR (Mad.) 270; (1981) 131 ITR 415, it has been held by the Division Bench of the Madras High Court that il receipt cannot be treated as income where no characteristics of income can be detected in it. Where a person gets some receipt of money where he does not angle for it, or where it is not the product of an organised seeking after emoluments, or where it is merely a chance encounter with a venture, which while enriching him does not form part of any scheme of profit making, the idea of income is absent. It has been held there that the real basis for the concept of non-taxable casual receipt is that the transaction in question which produces it does no constitute any trade or an adventure in the nature” of trade.

It has been held in the case of Mehboob Production P. Ltd v. CIT, (1977) 106 ITR 758 (Bom.) that:

“In order to constitute of income, the receipt must be one which comes in (a) as a return, and (b) from a definite source. It must also be of the nature which is of the character of the income according to the ordinary meaning of that word in the English language and must not be of the nature of a windfall.”

A receipt in lieu of source of income is a capitaf-receipt and a receipt in lieu of income is a revenue income.

It has been held in the case of Commissioner of Income-tax v. M. P. Poncha, (1995) 125 CTR (Bom.) 274; (1995) 211 ITR 1005 (Bom.) that:

“Payment of alimony to divorced wife – payment made by employer out of assessee’s salary under instructions of assessee.

This is a clear case of application of income by the assessee for payment of alimony to his ex-wife and maintenance of his minor child. The direction to the employer or the agreement with the employer to pay the agreed amount of Rs.650 per month to the ex-wife every month is only a mode of payment. It does not in any way amount to diversion of salary income before it accrues to the assessee. The employer is obliged to pay the amount only after the salary income accrues to the assessee and becomes payable to him. It is at that point of time that the employer has agreed or undertaken to pay as per the wishes of the assessee the sum of Rs.650 per month to his ex-wife. The employers have only agreed to deal with the amount of salary accrued to the assessee in such a manner as directed by him. It is a clear case of application of income which has accrued in the hands of the assessee. This is not a :ase of diversion of income by overriding title.”

Just because the alimony is based on the income of the payer, it cannot make the receipt a revenue receipt. There is no relation between the measure that is used for the purpose of calculating a particular receipt and the quality of the figure that is arrived at by means of application of the test. – Glenboig Union Fireclay Co. Ltd. v. IRC, (1922) 12TC 427. It is the quality of payment that is decisive of the character of the payment and not the method of payment or its measure. – Sevairam Doongarmall v. CIT, (1961) 42 ITR 392 (SC).

2.2 It flows from above that at the first instance we have to decide whether the concerned receipt is revenue in nature or not. Once a receipt is considered as revenue, it is not material whether it is received in parts or it is received in lump sum.

2.3 S. 25 of the Hindu Marriage Act, 1995 deals with permanent alimony and maintenance. Ss.(1) of the said Section runs as follows:

“Any court exercising jurisdiction under this Act may, at the time of passing any decree or at any time subsequent thereto, on application made to it for the purpose by either the wife or the husband, as the case may be, order that the respondent shall, while the applicant remains unmarried, pay to the applicant for her or his maintenance and support such gross sum or such monthly or periodical sum for a term not exceeding the life of the applicant as, having regard to the respondent’s own income and other property, if any, the income and other property of the ap-plicant and the conduct of the parties, it may seem to the Court to be just, and any such payment may be secured, if necessary, by a charge on the immovable property of the respondent.”

2.4  Case Law:

In a landmark decision on this issue in the case of Princess Maheshwari Devi of Pratapgarh v. CIT, (1984) 147 ITR 258 (Bom.), the Bombay High Court observed that:

“The decree is the source of the payment of alimony. It cannot be said that the decree is a mere recognition or continuation of an earlier obligation. If the decree were set aside, the assessee could not claim the monthly alimony from her ex-husband. If the ex-husband failed to pay the amount, it is the decree which the assessee would have to execute. It is clear that the decree is the definite source of these receipts. The amount is what the assessee periodically and regularly gets and entitled to get under this decree. This amount must, therefore, be looked upon as a return from the said decree which is the definite source thereof.

The word ‘return’, in a case like this, can never be interpreted as meaning only a return for labour or skill employed or capital invested. Such a definition of ‘return’ would be too narrow and would exclude the case of voluntary payments, when it is settled position in law that in some cases even voluntary payments can be regarded as income. Although it is true that it could never be said that the assessee entered into the marriage with any view to get alimony, on the other hand, it cannot be denied that the assessee consciously obtained the decree and obtaining the decree did involve some efforts on the part of the assessee. The monthly alimony being a regular and periodical return from a definite source, being the decree, must be held to be ‘income’ within the meaning of S. 2(24).

The monthly payments of alimony have their origin in a definite source, viz., they are regular in nature and the said decree was obtained by some efforts on the part of the assessee. Hence these payments can never be regarded as a series of windfall or casual payments.

So far as a lump sum payment is concerned, the decree must be regarded as a transaction in which the right of the assessee to get maintenance from her ex-husband was recognised and given effect to. That right was undoubtedly a capital asset. By the decree, that right has been diminished or partly extinguished by the payments of the lump sum alimony, and the balance of that right has been worked out in the shape of monthly payments of alimony, which could be regarded as income. Had the amount not been awarded in a lump sum under the decree of the assessee, a larger monthly sum would have been awarded to her on account of alimony. It is not as if the payment can be looked upon as a commutation of any future monthly or annual payments, because there was no pre-existing right in the assessee to obtain any monthly payments at all. Nor is there anything in the decree to indicate that the lump sum alimony was paid in commutation of any right to any periodic payments. In these circumstances, the receipt of that amount must be looked upon as a capital receipt.”

3. Conclusion  and author’s  views on this issue:

3.1 In my personal opinion alimony cannot be said to be from any particular ‘source’. Nor can it be said to be return for any past service or any definite consideration. It is merely a personal payment and not income.

3.2 Decree is a legal process of pronouncement. The right to claim alimony originates from the relationship of marriage. There can be no decree of alimony without marriage.

3.3 Alimony should not be regarded as ‘return’ from the decree, because it has its roots in the relationship of marriage and NOT in the decree. A husband may agree to pay alimony to his wife with mutual consent without existence of decree.

3.4 If alimony were to be treated as income, then money given by husband to wife every month could also be treated as income applying the same analogy as given in the case of Princess Maheshwari Devi (supra).

3.5 The intention of the statute governing alimony is to provide for ‘Maintenance and support’ of the dependant and certainly not to create a ‘source of income’ in the common parlance.

3.6 As a matter of law, so far as the jurisdiction of Bombay High Court is concerned the decision of Princess Maheshwari Devi (supra) holds good and accordingly monthly alimony shall remain taxable and one-time alimony shall be treated as capital receipt. However owing to reasons cited above, with due respect to the Honourable High Court, the decision is worth a second thought.

Innovation in Services

Article

‘Innovation’ is one of the most used buzzwords in
21st-Century management vocabularies. However, when most of us think of
‘Innovation’, what comes to our mind is sleek, user-friendly products such as
iPhone. People have a good idea of what technical innovation is, but innovation
in services, as in the case of professionals, is more hidden and unknown. Its
important to discuss what innovation means for a professional like Chartered
Accountant and how it helps him in serving his client better. Client-focussed
innovation will benefit both the client as well as the professional organisation.
Client will be benefited by more value-added services and the professional
organisation will effectively combat the increasing competition and help it in
client retention.


What do you mean by innovation in professional services ?

It is not a rocket science as people think it is. It is a
skill that can be learnt and taught. For me innovation is an original concept,
new or improved process or service. A new method or idea of doing things faster
and in a better manner, in other words, where there is a value addition.

Does a client need innovative solutions ?

A client is always in need for innovative, different ideas
which will make them distinctive in comparison to their competitors’. In today’s
world, where the client has a strong in-house team, they would be very well
equipped to handle day-to-day and routine matters. Further, the in-house team is
also capable of providing the routine, conventional and a standard solution
which a normal professional organisation would give. In such a case, the client
would start thinking : Why should we hire an external professional
organisation when it is going to provide us the same solutions at a higher cost 
?
Clients need more than just standard solutions for which it is important for a
professional organisation to innovate on a continuous basis. If the professional
organisation does not realise this fact, it may lose out on such client. Here
comes the need for innovation in providing services.

How does a client and the professional

organisation benefit from innovation ?

Innovation could be radical in nature i.e., a
different solution/idea by means of which the client is benefited tremendously.
The client could benefit in terms of savings of tax or in terms of economics of
the project. For example, a professional organisation may provide an out-of-box
solution by which the client saves service tax and the entire
economics/commercial feasibility of the project may change in favour of the
client. Such kind of innovation gives a huge advantage to the client and his
competitors may be totally outplaced, if they do not take measures before their
market position is completely lost. By providing such solutions, the
professional organisation gets loyalty from its clients and it ensures that it
stays ahead of its competitors.

Innovation could be proactive in nature. Proactive innovation
means proactively searching for solutions to problems of the client. It starts
with asking the client right questions, defining a problem or opportunity which
the client is facing. The second step would be to gather or collate information
from various sources (including the client himself) to gain more knowledge of
the facts. This is the most important process of ‘creative’ thinking whereby new
ideas are generated by analysing the information. Thus, in this manner a new
solution is developed which will solve the problem on hand and adhere to client
needs. Thus, innovation in services cannot take place overnight. It is normally
a steady, hard-headed response to client needs and not the accidental insight or
idea. However, proactive thinking also means that identifying a problem which
the client is facing where the client is not aware of the potential problem and
the impact of such problem. In such a case, the professional organisation has to
proactively approach the client and has to warn him of the potential problem and
provide him an appropriate solution, without thinking whether the client pays
its fees for such advice or not. This pro-activeness would delight the client.

Sometimes it is possible that the problem which the client is
facing is being faced by all the companies which are in the client’s business.
In such a case, a combined solution can be sought by asking the client to join
hands with its competitors and make a joint representation to the government or
any other regulatory authority. This will ensure that the client is benefited,
as the representation will get more importance as it is made by all the players
in that particular industry and chances of it getting approved are enhanced.
Further, the client would suffer a lower cost as the cost is shared by all the
professional organisations and the client is also benefited as it comes into
limelight in front of all the industry players and would certainly generate
income from them in future.

Innovation could also be in the nature of incremental change.
Incremental change can be in the form of generating good, new ideas to support
existing services, service delivery or processes. In other words, a better way
or method of doing the same thing in a more efficient manner. Certainly, one
may think, how does incremental change benefit the client ?
This type of
innovation certainly improves efficiency of the professional organisation and
ensures that the deliverables are faster. This gives the professional
organisation a competitive advantage and also leads to client satisfaction. Some
of the ways in which efficiency can be ensured is by providing short, clear and
practical advice. It should be remembered that client normally wants a quick
advice. Therefore, at times it is better to talk over the phone and discuss the
matter rather than sending out long emails which may take good amount of time.
The conclusion of such teleconference could always be circulated later.

Why should there be innovation ?

Professional organisations can no longer remain static or arrogant as in the past, because the clients have become more informed and more demanding in these times of information boom. They now question the opinions, the approach and the manner and get satisfied only with a thorough response. Gone are the days when professional organisations were rewarded for simply providing excellent services. Clients also want their consultants to help them network and improve their businesses. They want services to be efficient, cost-effective, and technologically advanced. The professional organisation cannot take the client for granted and has to realise that the client is always in need for new and distinctive ideas. The professional organisation has to ensure that the client is satisfied with its service. Hence, it has to be innovative at all times.

How can the professional organisation innovate in order to provide client satisfaction ?

A professional organisation can innovate in a number of ways. In my opinion, the following are some of the ways in which a professional organisation can innovate and ensure client satisfaction:

  • Ability to act as business advisors and not mere tax advisors or consultants. Professionals need to understand client’s business in detail and provide him a solution which meets his requirements, taking into consideration the practical difficulties which will be faced by the client in implementing the solution. The professional organisation should not only provide a technically correct answer, but also ensure that the same is implementable;

  • Providing complete range of services from start to end. A client prefers a professional organisation that holds his hands from starting of the project till the project is completed. If the professional organisation is not an expert in that field, it can recommend the best person who could render such services and probably network with the best person;

  • Examining existing problems of the client from a new perspectives and providing distinctive solutions;

  • Providing client service by way of interactive websites where clients could post the queries. The website would also host data which would be useful to the client in his day-to-day business;

  • Provide regular news updates on cases/ amendments, circulars, relevant to the client as well as a note on how such updates/amendments would impact the business of the client;

  • Ability to identify and articulate areas or opportunities for the client that if improved/ adopted could yield a source of advantage of any kind to the client. e.g., advising the client that would give him a business advantage (even though it is not your scope to advise him on such areas);

  • Ability to quickly respond to the client queries and understanding the fact that time lag on the part of professional organisation could have implications such as loss of business opportunity;

  • Ability to take risk and actually spending time and cost in the innovation process, even taking into account the fact the innovation process may fail.

Clearly, fabulously successful enterprises such as Gillette razors and Coca-Cola have been applying innovation at the point where it matters most – the client’s/customer’s changing needs. In other words, innovation has to be something which has the end-objective of keeping the client happy. Generating ideas and being innovative are important contributors to business success.

A classic example of innovation could be a trans-formation of an enterprise which is willing to innovate and chunk old traditional ideas e.g., ICICI Bank and HDFC Bank. The banking system in India as recently as in late 1990s was stuck in the rut of big and static PSU banks, the whole of the banking sector was ailing from syndrome of ‘Over-branched but underserviced’. In this scenario, these banks emerged and changed the entire landscape. Keeping the customer service as its prime focus, they embraced technology as its main aid and kept on innovating services to meet client satisfaction. The result is for everyone to marvel. This is a classic example of turnaround of the company by keeping the clients/customers happy.
 
To add value to our conventional practice of audit we can innovate, for example whilst reviewing:

  • internal control procedures, advise the client on risk mitigation;
  • financial cost, suggest alternative modes of financing to reduce costs;
  • power costs, even bring in a business advisory team to suggest means for reducing cost, in other words, conduct a ‘power’ audit;
  • consider compliance with environment laws as environment is becoming a major risk.

Another area is assisting and advising clients in the discharge of ‘social responsibility’. It is an area where we can innovate and be a catalyst. Let us accept that charity in today’s environment is big business. Let us assist business in carrying out philanthropic activities which are in the interest of business.

In my view, innovation is the need of the day and organisations including professional organisations should encourage innovations and have to ensure that their clients are continuously fed with more and more innovative solutions. IBM, for instance, has recently run a series of television commercials on innovation. The theme is the need to innovate because: “in today’s world your new idea on Monday is a commodity on Wednesday … “

I would conclude  by stating:

“Innovate to survive by anticipating need, nay, creating need for those whom we serve.”

Chartered Accountants don’t retire — they fade away

Article

Retirement — what is retirement ? Chartered accountants just
do not know the meaning of this term ‘retirement’. Hence the statement —
chartered accountants ‘never retire, but they just fade away’. The irony is that
even when they retire — either because of commitments or circumstances, they
still continue to be involved with ‘accountax’. They never truly retire.


Talking of retirement reminds me of this story of Henry Ford.
When asked a question : “When are you going to retire ?” His reply was “Only
after I cease being useful — which stage I will never attain.”

Chartered Accountants also seem to believe that they will
never cease to be useful.

Thinking about retiring takes me almost 40 years back in
time. I met a German equivalent of a CA who was well past 65 and yet quite
active. On being asked by me as to why he was not retiring, his reply was :

“Young man, in my country a CA can never afford to retire
on what he makes and so must it be in your country too.”


Passage of time, and years of experience have confirmed the
truth of these words. A CA cannot afford to retire on his earnings. Most of us
continue to work as we cannot afford to retire both economically and even
emotionally.

Once again my mind slips into the past and memories of my
articleship days come flooding, reminding of an instance when I was appearing
for my C.A. finals. My father came to drop me at the centre. He met a friend who
asked my father as to why he was at the centre. “I have come to drop my son” was
his reply. My father asked the same question to his friend as to why he was at
the centre, “My children have come to drop me for the Exam.” was his prompt
reply. He did ultimately clear the Exam. What perseverance ! What
determination !

How could this friend of my father ever think of retirement ?

So much efforts go into being a CA that one has to work for
many many years to recoup his investment in terms of time and money. Perhaps
that is why a CA cannot think of retirement.

Retirement is also not conceivable, because a chartered
accountant loves his profession and it is very difficult to get over ‘love’ — a
life-long relationship. CA’s relationship with the profession, especially that
of my generation, can be compared to an arranged marriage. In an arranged
marriage you fall in love after marriage and live in devotion till ‘death do –
us – part’. A relationship with a client might start on a professional basis,
but it matures into a personal bond and the CA is virtually treated as a member
of the family. Even in his senility and dreams he thinks of how best he can
serve his clients. Ask an accountant : when he will retire and I am sure the
reply will be : Retirement is fifteen years away and he will also raise the
question :

Please tell me to what should I retire to !

We as CAs are so committed to work that we forget our
families, our friends and everything and give first place in our life to our
work. I will illustrate with a story. I heard this one, decades ago at one of
our conferences : ‘There was a chartered accountant. He was totally committed to
his work. He would leave early morning and come back late at night. One day
someone told him that while he was sweating away at office, things were going on
behind his back in his home . . . . indicating that someone was visiting his
house and a clandestine affair was going on behind his back. He was enraged. He
decided to put an end to this matter. Next day after leaving home at 8 a.m.,
instead of going to the office he climbed a tree in front of his house with a
gun in his hands, waiting for ‘that’ person to come. 9 O’clock — no one, 10
O’clock — no one . . . Yet he waited patiently. However at 12 Noon, he suddenly
realised that he was not even married !’

Work is CA’s life, his reason for existence. This is
exemplified by a chartered accountant friend of mine. Apart from being a
successful practitioner, he is an eminent writer, a musician of repute and a
very knowledgeable person. In one of his articles he confessed that whenever he
saw a picture of a beautiful and gorgeous film star like Mallika Sherawat or
Katrina Kaif, his imagination ran riot and his first thought was of what could
be her Permanent Accountant Number ?

How can such a person ever think of retiring from the
profession? Without work he would be like fish out of water . . . He would start
gasping for breath.

There is a story of a senior citizen. He, a widower, would
visit his lady friend daily and spend his evenings with her. This went on for
years. A friend like me suggested that he should marry her. His response was,

“Well, I have considered this many a time. But if I marry
her how do I spend my evenings . . . . ?

The dilemma of a CA is similar : how does he spend his time
after retirement ?

I think that in the ultimate analysis, a CA goes on working
all his life, first to make both ends meet, then later perhaps for the ‘fame and
name’, and still later because it has become a habit which he cannot break and
also because he does not know what else to do.

Another friend of mine, a retired accountant, who recently
retired, was sarcastically questioned by a friend at an office gathering :

Q. How to you spend your time as you are no longer changing
‘figures’.



Ans. Hitting golf balls and cracking nuts.

However, he went on to add : “The benefits of retirement are
— I don’t have to comment on :

  • The implied and intended violations of law
  • Deviations from standards
  • Violations of ten commandments  of S. 227
  • Values being fair
  • On affairs being  ‘true  and  fair’
  • and above all on ‘frauds  committed by you.’
 
A thousand years ago Shankaracharya lamented in ‘Bhaja Govindam’ as under:
“The body has become worn out. The head has turned gray. The mouth has become toothless. The old man moves about leaning on his staff. Even then he leaves not the bundle of his desires.”

He laments that no one at any age has time for God. Let us listen to his advice and seek God before it is too late in our life.

We have one shining example  to follow. Shri N. V. Iyer, a person renowned in our profession, retired from the profession when he had reached great heights and he completely cut himself off from the profession from the day of the retirement itself to follow higher and nobler pursuits.

Let us then have courage to retire at a proper time and follow the higher path. Let us prove that CAs also can retire and need not just fade away in oblivion.

I would conclude :

Some of us fear that retirement may lead to senility. We forget that retirement is an opportunity to put life into our years – do what we missed – revive our hobbies and our relationships, discover old and make new friends. Life after retirement can be equally challenging. Retirement is also an opportunity to be creative, to do something we haven’t done during our working years. We can on retirement seek a blend of ‘client service’ and ‘service to profession’ or better still blend ‘service to profession’ and ‘service to society’. As Albert Einstein said :

‘The  highest  destiny  of individual is to serve’.

Let us learn to retire, contribute to society and seek our real growth rather than fade away.

Works Contracts

Article

1. Composite Contracts — Introduction :


A composite contract is one which has constituent elements
but the customer is interested in the final outcome of the contract. In such a
contract, the constituent elements are so integrally connected and
interdependent with each other that it is not feasible to look at the elements
in isolation. Such composite contracts may also include minor elements which are
incidental and ancillary to the main objective of the contract. Such elements of
a composite contract are to be treated as means of attaining the ultimate object
of the contract. For example, in a turnkey contract for design engineering,
procurement, construction, installation and commissioning of a power plant, the
individual element of engineering cannot be viewed in isolation of the
procurement, construction, installation and commissioning. In a lighter vein,
one can say that the icing on the cake cannot be viewed separately from the cake
itself !

1.1 Works Contracts — Species of Composite Contracts :


Composite contracts involving both the supply of materials
and rendering of services (in reasonably dominant proportions) are known as
works contracts. A turnkey contract of the nature referred to above is a good
example of a works contract. In a works contract, there is a transfer of
materials from the contractor to the employer/contractee, however, the said
transfer is not by means of sale.

In a works contract, the contractor agrees to perform some
work on the client’s property (may be moveable or immoveable). The performance
of work also involves the use of some materials of the contractor. As the
contractor uses these materials to perform the work, the materials get attached
to the property of the client in such a fashion that such contractor’s materials
can no longer be removed without substantial damage either to the contractor’s
materials or the contractee’s property. Since the property which is the subject
matter of the work belongs to the client, the ownership of the materials so
attached on the property passes on to the client albeit in an indirect fashion.

1.2 Accretion :


Consider the case of a building contractor who constructs a
building on the land of the client using his owned bricks, sand, cement, etc.
Till the stage he applies the cement on the land and lays a brick on it, the
cement and brick belongs to the contractor. But once the cement paste and the
brick are applied on the land, these ingredients fasten themselves to the land.
It is then not possible or viable to remove the cement or brick from the land
(without fundamental damage). Since the land belongs to the contractee, the
ownership in the cement and brick gets transferred to the contractee by
inference and not by way of sale. This process of the contractor’s materials
getting embedded in the client’s immoveable property is referred to as the
transfer of ownership in goods through the process of accretion.

1.3 Accession :


Consider another example of a garage undertaking to paint the
car of its client. Similar to the earlier example, till the stage the garage
applies the paint on the car, the paint belong to the garage. But once the paint
is applied on the car, the liquid paint gets attached on the metal of the car.
It is then not possible to remove the paint without fundamental damage. Since
the car belongs to the client, the ownership in the paint also gets transferred
to the client by inference. This process of the contractor’s materials getting
embedded in the client’s moveable property is referred to as the transfer of
ownership in goods through the process of accession.

1.4 Blending :


One more situation of works contract could be a case where
multiple moveable products owned by the contractor are ‘blended’ together to
create a new moveable product which is non-marketable in nature. Consider the
case of a printer who uses paper and ink to print cheque books for its client
bank.

In this case, the transaction cannot constitute a sale
because cheque books are not marketable and there-fore are not goods. However,
the properties in the paper and the ink have passed on to the bank the moment
the printer blended these two moveable products. Thus, there is a transfer of
the ownership in goods through the process of blending.

2. Nature of Indirect Taxes and applicability to Composite Contracts :


At this juncture, it may be relevant to broadly classify the
indirect taxes based on the nature of the taxes. At one end of the spectrum are
duties on goods like customs duties and excise duties which are levied on
specified activities i.e., the activity of import/export of goods or the
manufacture of goods. Since the levy of duty is on an activity and not on a
transaction, it is apparent that the duty is attracted irrespective of whether
the product constitutes an end in itself or a means to an end.

At the other end of the spectrum are taxes like sales tax
(VAT) and service tax which are levied on specified transactions i.e.,
the transaction of sale of goods or the provision of services. Since the levy of
the tax is on a transaction, one has to look at a transaction. A transaction is
the cake itself (i.e., the end) and not the icing on the cake (i.e.,
the means to an end). This therefore suggests that for taxing the transaction,
one looks at the tax implications on the cake and not on the icing !

3. Composite Contracts — Judicial Thinking :


Before proceeding any further, it may be relevant to look at
the judicial thought process on this aspect.


In a landmark case1
pertaining to sales tax, the Supreme Court held that a building contract is one
entire and indivisible contract; there is no sale of goods as a separate
contract. A series of judgments of the High Courts and the Supreme Court
followed this case taking the same view.

In another situation, the contract provided for progressive release of payments dependent on the stage of execution of a particular component. The Supreme Courf observed that in an indivisible, composite contract, it is not possible to vivisect the same. The Court accepted the commercial practice in spreading the contractual payments over the entire period of the execution of the contract and held that progressive release of payments would not have any bearing on the nature of the contract.

In a case pertaining to income tax, an Indian company entered into separate contracts with the foreign company for purchase of equipment and for supervision of erection, start-up, putting into commission, etc. of the equipment. The A.P. High Court held that the terms of the separate agreements clearly showed that it was one and the same transaction. One could not be read in isolation of the other. The considerations for services in connection with the supervision of erection, start-up, putting into commission, etc. were part of the payment of the sale price of the equipment. Thus, in spite of two separate contracts, the High Court considered these as part of single sale transaction.

In a landmark judgment? pertaining to service tax, the Department tried to levy service tax on the drawing, designing and commissioning activities, for which separate amounts were indicated in the price break-up in the turnkey contract. Negating such attempt, the Tribunal held that the contract between Daelim and IOCL was a works contract on turnkey basis. It cannot be vivisected for subjecting a part of the contract price to service tax.

From each of the above decisions, it is amply clear that the judiciary has consistently looked at composite contracts as a whole and has not permitted a vivisection of such composite contracts.

4.    Constitutional Amendment & Implications under VAT:

On the basis of recommendation of the Law Commission, the Parliament passed 46th Constitutional Amendment, introducing a legal fiction by defining ‘tax on the sale or purchase of goods’ in Article 366(29A) to include certain types of deemed sales. Thus, the following non-sale transactions were brought within the service tax net:

(a)    Non-voluntary transfer of goods for consideration
(b)    Transfer of property in goods involved in the execution of works contract
(c)    Delivery of goods on hire-purchase or instalment payments
(d)    Transfer  of right to use goods
(e)    Supply of goods by unincorporated association or body to members for consideration
(f)    Supply of food or beverage by way of or as part of service.

With respect to works contracts, one of the deemed sales, in view of the above amendment, sales tax/VAT could be levied on the value of the supply portion of the contract. Thus, there is a sale of the goods supplied in the execution of works contract for the limited purpose of sales tax/VAT. In this sense, through legal fiction, an indivisible composite contract becomes divisible. However, the Supreme Court” has held that the 46th Constitutional amendment is valid only for those entries in the three lists in the Seventh Schedule where the expression ‘tax on the sale or purchase of goods’ appears. Effectively, the amendment is applicable only with respect to sales tax/VAT law and not for any other law. This amendment has not brought any change in the normal legal meaning of ‘sale’. Therefore, for purposes outside sale tax/VAT, the concept of indivisible composite contract continues to be valid. Further, the Supreme Court”, held that even after the 46th Constitutional amendment it is not permissible to split composite transactions except in the case of works contracts and supply of food and beverages as part of the service in restaurants and hotels for sales tax/VAT. In other words, the principles enunciated in Gannon Dunkerley & Co. case, survives for purposes other than tax on these two deemed sales introduced by the Constitutional amendment.

5. Implications under Service Tax -before 1-6-2007:

The above discussion brings to light a question regarding the applicability of service tax provisions to composite contracts. Over a period of time, there has been a gradual expansion in the scope of taxable services. Some relevant service categories are listed in the table below :

Right from the time the category for taxing consulting engineering services was brought into the Statute, there were constant attempts to levy service tax on the ‘consulting’ element of the composite contracts. While the 46th Constitutional Amendment permits the States to levy tax on transfer of goods involved in the execution of a works contract, no specific authorisation is available to the Centre for artificially vivisecting such contracts for the purpose of levy of service tax and hence the Courts have consistently held that composite contracts cannot be made liable for service tax? under the category of consulting engineering services.

Since 2003, the Legislature has gradually expanded the scope of taxable services to cover various activities involving performance of work. From an industry perspective, such performance of work could be either on a stand-alone basis or as an element of a composite contract. While there were no doubts on the coverage of activity done on a stand-alone basis (‘labour job’), there was uncertainty on the coverage of the activity done as a component of a composite ‘works contract’.

The Department interpretation at that stage was to argue on the principle of aspect theory and suggest that the levy of service tax was, in principle, in order. To address the issue of valuation and cascading impact of taxes, the Department provided the following alternatives:

1. Discharge of service tax on the full value of the contract with corresponding credit of duties/taxes paid on inputs and input services

2.    Discharge of service tax on the value of the service component (by identification and reduction of the value of the goods sold) with corresponding credit of taxes paid on input services

3.    Discharge of service tax on a presumptive value of the service component (i.e., 33% of the gross value of the contract) with no credit of taxes paid on inputs/input services.

Notwithstanding the above mentioned options, can it be argued that there really is no authority to levy a service tax at all in the absence of a specific constitutional amendment? After all, even for levy of sales tax, a Constitutional amendment was required and it has already been held that the Constitutional amendment has only restricted applicability vis-a-vis  sales tax laws.

The answers to the above questions could be debatable and would depend on whether one treats a works contract as a whole as constituting an activity and therefore a service (View 1) or one looks at works contract as independent of both goods and services (View 2).

In case View 1 is adopted, the levy of service tax can be said to be effective from the date the respective category for execution was introduced, say construction service. All the three alternate options for discharging the tax liability would ensure that there is no cascading effect. In case View 2 is adopted, the levy of service tax would actually require a Constitutional amendment.

Before the dust could settle down on the said controversy, the judiciary was flooded with a plethora of cases wherein the Department’s attempt to tax the services embedded in a composite contract was challenged. In fact, the Bangalore Tribunal went ahead and held that a composite contract cannot be vivisected to levy a tax on the erection, commissioning and installation component of the said composite contract”.

6.    Implications under Service Tax – from 1-6-2007:

In order to overcome the above controversy and specifically provide for a mechanism to tax the service component of a works contract, a new category of service was introduced with effect from 1-6-2007 to tax specified  works contracts.

However, as highlighted earlier, in case a view is taken that the service component is embedded within a composite contract, the composite contract cannot be vivisected merely by insertion of a taxable category of service. Hence the levy of service tax under the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’ can be constitutionally challenged.

If one holds the conservative view that the entire composite contract is a service, there was really no need for the introduction of the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’, since the basic categories were wide enough to cover the impugned transactions. In either of the situations, the introduction of the category of ‘Works Contracts Services’ becomes redundant. The law cannot be interpreted to bring about redundancy in any of the provisions.

Therefore it can be strongly argued that the levy of service tax is not constitutionally valid even after the introduction of works contract services as a category, since the Legislature does not have the authority to vivisect a composite contract.

7.    Non-Vivisection –  Practical Ramifications:

While there is a strong legal justification to challenge the applicability of service tax on works contracts, a business needs to evaluate the position taken from a practical perspective. Being an indirect tax, any aggressive position taken can result in an opportunity cost (since the tax would have been recovered from the client in the case of a conservative position). Further, the availability of CENVAT Credit to both the service provider and service recipient (in many cases), effectively results in no additional cost on account of adoption of a conservative position. Thus, one may reconcile the position to accept the levy of service tax under the category of ‘Works Contract Services’ with effect from 1-6-2007.

With the introduction of a new category to tax only speCified works contracts, it can be argued that the Legislature accepts the principle that the works contracts could not be taxed under the basic category itself and therefore the new category was created. Therefore, no service tax was payable in the past periods in cases where works contract tax was payable. This view has already found favour with the judiciary 10. Thus, one can safeguard the liability for the past periods.

8. Conclusion:

The article tries to explain in a nutshell the theory of non-vivisection of composite contracts and its ramifications vis-a-vis levy of service tax on works contracts. It does not deal with the issues concerned with valuation and claim of credit, since they are secondary to the basic issue of levy of service tax itself.

The article also does not deal with the tax implications of other types of composite contracts wherein, say, multiple services are bundled. Over a period of time, the law will evolve. It appears that a long-term solution could be to have an integrated Goods and Service Tax with a comprehensive coverage of all supplies of goods and services. Till the time such a GST regime is evolved, these issues will continue to present uncertainty for the industry.

It is a challenge to both the profession and the business to confront and comply with uncertainty.



Convergence and Conflicts of Accounting and Taxation

Article

1. Commercial Accounting Principles — basis of taxable profits :


Income-tax is a branch of law and its practice falls within
the domain of lawyers. We Chartered Accountants have, however, entered and have
successfully carried on practice in this field for the reason that income-tax is
tax on income, profits and gains, and determination thereof needs expertise in
accounting principles. The Apex Court has held time and again that in working
out profits, the principles that have to be applied are those which are a part
of commercial practice or which an ordinary man of business will resort to when
making computation for his business purposes1. More recently, the Supreme Court
has held in CIT v. U.P. State Industrial Development Corporation, (1997)
225 ITR 703 (SC) that it is well-accepted proposition that “for the purposes of
ascertaining profits and gains the ordinary principles of commercial accounting
should be applied, so long as they do not conflict with any express provision of
the relevant statute”. The Apex Court quoted with approval the principle laid
down by the English Courts2 and also reiterated the principle laid down earlier
by the Supreme Court in P.M. Mohammed Meerakhan v. CIT, (1969) 73 ITR 735
(SC) that it was the duty of the Income-tax Officer to find out what profit the
business has made according to the true accountancy practice.

2. Modification/Deviations from accounting principles :


While the commercial accounting principles do form the basis
of computing profits for tax purposes, the law-makers have a variety of agenda
to be achieved through the Income-tax Act for which purpose, the commercial
accounting principles are either given a complete go-bye or are somewhat
modified or deviated from. Objectives of such deviations could be either
simplification of the tax law or provision of incentives for economic
development or just as a measure of ensuring effective revenue collection or
check evasion. The objective of simplification is achieved by — for example —
enacting provisions for presumptive taxation. This involves computing taxable
income as a percentage of, say, gross revenues or some other quantitative
measure like tonnage capacity in case of ships or number of trucks in case of
small transport operators, etc. The objectives of incentives for economic
development may involve creation of special-purpose statutory reserves (like SEZ
Reserve or erstwhile Investment Allowance Reserve) that are otherwise not
required under commercial accounting principles. Similarly, the objective of
ensuring effective revenue collections is achieved by, say, allowing deduction
for statutory liabilities only on actual payments, irrespective of whether the
taxpayer follows mercantile or cash method of accounting. The exercise in
computation of taxable income, thus, essentially involves sound knowledge of :


à
Commercial accounting principles that form the basis for computation of
profits; and


à
The provisions of the law that require deviation from such commercial
accounting principles or may just provide for artificial formulae in computing
taxable profits.



3. Statutory recognition of commercial accounting
principles & practices :



S. 145 of the Act provides that income chargeable under the
head ‘Profits and gains of business or profession’ or ‘Income from other
sources’ be computed in accordance with either cash or mercantile system of
accounting regularly employed by the taxpayer. It empowers the Central
Government to notify accounting standards to be followed for computing such
profits. Pursuant to the said powers, the Central Government has notified two
accounting standards (AS), one of which needs to be mentioned here. The notified
AS defines ‘Accounting Policies’ to mean the specific accounting principles and
the methods of applying those principles adopted by the assessee in the
preparation and presentation of financial statements. It further provides that
the Accounting Policies adopted by an assessee should be such so as to represent
a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the business, profession or
vocation in the financial statements prepared and presented on the basis of such
accounting policies. For this purpose, the major considerations governing the
selection and application of accounting policies are the following, namely :

(i) Prudence : Provisions should be made for all
known liabilities and losses, even though the amount cannot be determined with
certainty and represents only a best estimate in the light of available
information;

(ii) Substance over form : The accounting treatment
and presentation in financial statements of transactions and events should be
governed by their substance and not merely by the legal form;

(iii) Materiality : Financial statements should
disclose all material items, the knowledge of which might influence the
decisions of the user of the financial statements.


The notified AS provides that ‘Accrual’, ‘Going Concern’ and
‘Consistency’ are the fundamental accounting assumptions in preparation and
presentation of accounts. If these are not followed, a specific note is
required. These terms are defined as follows :

‘Accrual’ refers to the assumption that revenues and costs
are accrued, that is, recognised as they are earned or incurred (and not as
money is received or paid) and recorded in the financial statements of the
periods to which they relate;

‘Consistency’ refers to the assumption that accounting
policies are consistent from one period to another;

‘Going concern’ refers to the assumption that the assessee
has neither the intention nor the necessity of liquidation or of curtailing
materially the scale of the business, profession or vocation and intends to
continue his business, profession or vocation for the foreseeable future.

There seems to be a significant convergence between the major considerations and fundamental assumptions as laid down in the CBDT-notified AS and the.AS issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI),the apex accounting body in the country. Some differences, however, that are significant are discussed subsequently at appropriate places.

4. Prudence:
The accounting consideration of Prudence is adopted and recognised in several tax cases. A prominent illustration is where Courts have held that the closing stock ought to be valued at cost or market price whichever is lower. Courts have also held in favour of providing for actuarially valued liabilities, though the amount cannot be determined with certainty and represents a best estimate in the light of available information. There are, however, conflicts on the aspect of point of accrual to which we shall refer a little later.

5. Substance over form:
The consideration of Substance over form has been a major area of tax disputes for ages and the Courts have generally leaned in favour of substance rather than forms, though earlier there have been some exceptions, In fact, the Courts have held that the accounting entries, though are indicative of the nature of the transaction, they are not decisive of the true legal character thereof 7. This is a classic tax law principle that demonstrates convergence within divergence.

6. Accrual:
The accounting assumption of Accrual essentially means that if accounts are not prepared on Accrual basis, appropriate disclosures should be made. The Companies Act was amended in 1988 so as to make Accrual as the method of accounting compulsory for all Companies. S. 145 of the IT Act permits cash and mercantile methods of accounting. There is an age-old fight between the accounting concept of accrual and the tax concept of accrual. While the accounting concept refers to matching of costs and revenues, the tax law concept refers to ‘vesting of right to receive’s so far as income accrual is concerned and it refers to incurring or crystallising of the liability? so far as the expense accrual is concerned. One of the recent exceptions is the decision of the Supreme Court in Madras Industrial Investment Corpora-tion v. CIT, (1997) 225 ITR 802 (SC) wherein the Apex Court held that “ordinarily revenue expenditure which is incurred wholly and exclusively for the purposes of business must be allowed in its entirety in the year in which it is incurred. It cannot be spread over a number of years even if the assessee has written it off in his books over a period of years. However, the facts may justify an assessee who has incurred expenditure in a particular year to spread and claim it over a period of ensuing years. In fact, allowing the entire ex-penditure in one year might give a very distorted picture of the profits of a particular year”. Saying so, the Supreme Court held that discount on issue of debentures is an instance where although the assessee has incurred the liability to pay the discount in the year of issue of debentures, the payment is to secure a benefit over a number of years and the liability should, therefore, be spread over the period of debentures. This is a classic case of convergence of accounting accrual with the tax accrual. Yet another illustration is the decision of the Supreme Court in the case of Bharat Earth Movers v. CIT, (2000) 245 ITR 428 (SC) wherein the Apex Court held that even if the liability to pay leave encashment to employees is not due but it has definitely accrued (which is asserted by actu-arial evaluation of the liability), it should be held as allowable for tax purposes.

Although such instances seem to suggest the same direction of accounting and tax accrual, still lot of ground needs to be covered for achieving convergence. For instance, when a bank does not recognise revenues in respect of interest on sticky advances, the Tax Department still contends that income has accrued, though not recognised in the books. The Supreme Court held, in the case of State Bank of Tranvancore v. CIT, (1990) 186 ITR 187 (SC) that where interest on doubtful advances though not credited to the profit and loss account but credited to interest suspense account should be regarded as accrued and taxed accordingly. This view was once again reiterated in Kerala Financial, Corporation v. CIT, (1994) 210 ITR 129 (SC). There is thus a marked conflict between the accounting theory for revenue recognition and the tax law theory. This seems evident from an apparent difference between the understanding of the accounting consideration of Prudence under the ICAI Standard and the CBDT Standard. While the former specifically includes “In view of the uncertainty attached to future events, profits are not anticipated but recognised only when realised though not necessarily in cash”, the latter is conspicuously silent on this aspect of Prudence. In the context of NBFCs, the Tribunal held, in some cases!”, that provisions made as per prudential norms ought to be allowed for tax purposes independent of the provisions of S. 36, while it held in some other cases!’ that such provisions can be allowed only if they fall within the specific provisions of the IT Act and not otherwise. The Kolkata High Court has recently upheld the former view in the case of CIT v. Brabourne Investment Ltd., (ITANo. 333 of 2007). One doesn’t know the fate of this conflict if and when it reaches the Apex Court. But the point to be noted is that in the areas of revenue recognition and provisioning, the accounting and tax law concepts of Accrual have a long way to travel before a complete convergence is experienced.

7. Consistency:

Consistency principle finds a very satisfactory convergence in accounting and taxation. Courts have always held that the method of accounting regularly followed by the assessee and accepted in the past ought to be generally accepted 12. However, in CIT v. British Paints India Ltd., (1991) 188 ITR 44 (SC) the Apex Court held that even though the Tax Department has accepted for past several years the assessee’s method of valuing closing stock of finished goods only at the cost of raw material and totally excluding overheads, the Tax Department was entitled to reject such method and require the valuation on the basis of raw material cost plus overheads. In this case the Court deviated from the principle of consistency, only because the method consistency followed was a wrong method of valuation not recognised even under the accounting theory. Barring such cases, the Courts have always held that though the concept of res judicata does not apply to tax cases, the rule of consistency does apply and hence if the facts and the law remain the same, the Tax Department should not take different views on the same subject matter in different years”. Courts have also held that when a change in method of accounting (e.g., stock valuation) is bona fide (i.e., more appropriate or required due to change in law) such change should be permitted for tax purposes, but the taxpayer should thereafter consistently follow the changed method”.

8. Going concern:
Going Concern assumption follows one set of rules for accounting and if the enterprise is under liquidation, the accounting rules change. This is recognised even for tax law purposes when the Supreme Court held, in the case of A.L.A. Firm v. CIT, (1991) 189 ITR 285 (SC) that “the principle of valuing closing stock of business at cost or market value whichever is lower is a principle that would hold good only so long as there is a continuing business and that where the business is discontinued, whether on account of dissolution or closure or otherwise by the assessee, then the profits cannot be ascertained except by taking the closing stock at market value. The assets have to be valued on the basis of the market value on the date of dissolution”. There is thus a significant convergence as regards this concept from accounting and taxation perspectives.

9. A glimpse of some areas of conflict:

While the above provides a bird’s-eye view of the fundamental or directional issues, the nitty-gritties and nuts and bolts issues are far too many and a lot needs to be done for resolving them if the desire is to achieve substantial convergence between accounting and taxation and thereby minimise tax litigation at least on this aspect. For achieving convergence between the Accounting Standards issued by the ICAI and the Accounting Standards required to be followed under the Companies Act, initially S. 211(3C) was enacted in the Companies Act in 1999 and today we have Companies (Accounting Standard) Rules, 2006. However, convergence for tax purposes has a long way to go. This article is not aimed at discussing right v. wrong, but the purpose is to have a glimpse of some of the major areas of conflicts and open up a discussion as regards the way forward to achieve convergence. Readers may take note of these and many other areas of conflict between accounting principles and taxation.

  • Income earned during the period of construction of a project by an entrepreneur goes to reduce the cost of the project as per well-established accounting principles. However, the Apex Court held in the case of Tuticorin Alkali Chemicals & Fertilizers Ltd. v. CIT, (1997) 227 ITR 172 (SC) that certain income ought to be taxed as income from other sources. Though in certain subsequent decisions 15, this decision has been explained and distinguished and the effect thereof is to a great extent diluted in respect of income that can be regarded as inextricably linked to the setting up of the project, the basic rationale – that commercially speaking, investment of temporary surplus funds go to reduce the cost of the project – which forms the basis of the accounting treatment remains disapproved and hence unrecognised for taxation purposes.

  • AS-2 of ICAI requires valuation of costs of purchases at a price including duties and taxes ‘other than those subsequently recoverable by the enterprise from the taxing authorities’. As against this, S. 145A of the Income-tax Act requires valuation of purchases, sales and inventories inclusive of duties and taxes paid ‘notwithstanding any right arising as a conse-quence to such payment’. Thus, the ICAI Standard recommends exclusive method, while the tax law requires inclusive method. A pre-dominant legal view'” is that both the methods result in the same profits. However, the issue has been a subject matter of immense tax litigation.

  • AS-11 requires recognition of exchange differences in variety of situations. Year-end recognition of such exchange differences debited or credited to the profit and loss account have been a subject matter of litigation. Questions have arisen whether such debits are allowable for tax purposes or not. Fundamental principles were laid down by the Supreme Court in Sutlej Cotton Mills v. CIT, (1978) 116 ITR 1 (SC) to decide when the exchange loss can be treated as capital and when revenue. However, the controversy takes new dimensions with every different case. The Delhi High Court in a recent decision in CIT v. Woodward Governor India P Ltd., (2007) 162 Taxman 60 (Del) held that “judicially accepted position appears to be that in determining whether there has in fact been accrual of liability or income, the accountancy standards prescribed by the ICAI would have to be followed and applied”. In so deciding, the Delhi High Court took into consideration the various important aspects of AS-11. On the other hand, the Uttarakhand High Court, in CIT v. ONGC, (2008) 301 ITR 415 (Utt) has held that the foreign exchange loss claimed by the assessee on revenue account on, accrual basis on account of foreign exchange fluctuation on the last day of the accounting year was only a contingent and notional liability, and did not crystallise or accrue in the year under consideration and hence was held as not allowable. On a plain reading of the judgment, one finds that there is no discussion at all on AS-11 and its requirements. Poor taxpayer is at a complete loss as to what the correct position in law is on the subject.

  • AS-28 provides for impairment of assets and requires recognition for such impairment in certain circumstances. Indeed, the question whether such impairment is allowable for tax purposes or not is something that one may have to reckon with as and when the issue arises.

The list can go on. This is just a food for thought in the Diamond Jubilee issue. We may have an occasion to discuss this article further, may be in some RRC of the SCAS, which we all seldom miss!

Can Tax Laws ever be simplified ?

Article

Cost of Complexity :


1.1 The often quoted statement is : ‘Equity and taxes are
strangers’
; one could add that ‘tax laws and simplicity are also strangers’.
In the Wealth of Nations, Adam Smith famously noted that complexity makes taxes
“more burdensome to the people than they are beneficial to the sovereign”.
The cost of taxes is not just the taxes we pay, but also the cost of complexity,
popularly now termed as ‘compliance cost’. There seems to be universal agreement
that the present tax code is way too complex and needs to be completely
overhauled.

1.2 Tax laws world over are complex, but the Indian
Income-tax Act has the unique distinction of being amended every year, often
retroactively and at times the law is amended even before it has become
applicable. This has resulted in an already complex law being made almost
incomprehensible.

1.3 Our tax laws live up to Senator Spark M. Matsunaga’s
statement :

‘They say there are only two certainties in life, taxes and
death. The only difference is, death doesn’t get worse every time Congress
meets.’


Why Tax laws are complex ?

2.1 Equity and certainty are two basic canons of taxation
that constitute the foundation of all discussion on the principles of taxation.
The canon of equity demands that tax paid should be commensurate to the
respective abilities of the tax-payers. That the rich should contribute to the
public expense not just in proportion to their revenue, but more than that. The
canon of certainty, as Adam Smith put it so succinctly entails that “the tax
which each individual is bound to pay ought to be certain, and not arbitrary.
The time of payment, the manner of payment, the quantity to be paid, ought all
to be clear and plain to the contributor, and to every other person, so that the
taxpayer is not put in the power of the tax gatherer
“.

2.2 The economic reality is that no other branch of law
touches human activity at so many points and therefore tax laws will necessarily
be complex. The unfortunate truth is that it is difficult to design a tax code
that is simple and yet provides both equity and certainty.

2.3 The Government in the past has appointed several
committees to rationalise and simplify tax laws. Each report is a complete
report, but the irony is that the authorities have been selective in accepting
recommendations. This selective approach of the authorities has further
complicated the law. The need of the changing environment, if India is to emerge
as an economic superpower, is to bring about clarity in tax laws, where ‘tax
liability’ can be determined with certainty.

What is complexity ?

3.1 Taxation concepts by themselves are complex and are
troublesome enough, but when expressed in complex language, the confusion is
worse confounded. Hence, the case for simplicity is usually considered as
self-evident and is advocated as the panacea for all tax woes. However, there is
hardly any agreement as to what simplicity entails. For some, it means encoding
the tax law in a simple and easy to understand language. To others
simplification means a statute that contains a minimal number of distinctions
and exceptions, so that all arrangements or transactions with similar economic
effects receive the same tax treatment. In other words, deletion of exemptions
and deductions for different economic interest groups, resulting in a small and
simple Income-tax Act with fewer sections.



Can simplicity be achieved ?


4.1 Simplicity can be achieved by adopting any one of the
following broad parameters :


à
A “butcher’s knife” approach. This could be outrageously discriminatory and
grossly inequitable and unfair to a lot of people. For example, a fixed tax of
Rs.10,000 for every individual (irrespective of his income) would be very
simple, but would be totally unacceptable and unjust.


à
A flat rate of tax — that is — doing away with the slab system. This is
prevalent in some countries like Czech Republic, Mauritius, Russia, etc.
However, this system by itself can achieve only limited simplification unless
it is accompanied with removal of exemptions and deductions.


à
Make tax laws (like accounting standards) principle-based and not rule-based.
In other words don’t try to solve every conceivable problem or plug every
possible loophole, but instead enact a generalised statute that lays down
principles and clearly indicates their purpose. Surely, in today’s complex
business environment, this is a pipe dream. Even assuming such an approach
were attempted it would necessarily have to rely predominantly on voluntary
compliance. Advocates of this approach canvass that simplicity would promote
voluntary compliance and thereby boost revenue collections.


à
Social and political objectives for development of areas or special interest
groups should be through direct subsidies and not through tax laws. Subsidies
however have proved to be very costly and ineffective and experience now
suggests that these should be introduced only under very special
circumstances.



The reasons for complexity :

5.1 It is also undisputed that world over taxpayers are resorting to ever more complex tax structures to reduce their tax liability. Indeed, taxpayers (with the help of consultants) are blurring the line between tax evasion, tax avoidance and tax planning. Complex business structures, use of tax-friendly jurisdictions (tax havens), off balance-sheet transactions, interdealings with related enterprises, etc. are as much an integral part of the modern business as they are tools to minimise tax liability.

5.2 Indian laws are not any more complicated than in the US and many other European countries.
 
Tax laws world over are complex and will unfortunately remain so, as they have to deal with businesses that are complex and intricate.

5.3 Besides, modern tax laws are not just about revenue collection. They are also fiscal tools to achieve social, economic and political objectives. Despite the rhetoric from businesses and Government that they prefer a free market economy as a vehicle for the desired distribution of economic resources, in practice there is little faith shown in unassisted market to deliver optimal economic and employment growth. Special interest groups as well as political groups regularly lobby, often successfully and often justifiably, in carving out exceptions to the tax laws and thereby adding to complexity. It is routinely touted that exemptions and deductions should be reduced. However, the reality is that many groups will have special problems and their appeal for special treatment willsound perfectly fair and justified.

5.4 The bottom line is that as long as we continue to use tax codes to achieve economic, social and political objectives beyond raising revenue for necessary government programmes, it is impossible to achieve true tax Simplification.

5.5 To summarise, the primary reasons for tax laws being complex world over are:

  • Complex nature of transactions and business structures.

  • Multiple character of transactions.

  • Diverse nature of business, local, national and transnational.

  • Use of tax law as tools to achieve social, economic and political objectives, for example, education cess of 3%.

  • Exemptions granted to special interest groups or areas for encouraging economic development, for example, tax benefits granted to north-eastern States ‘and developers of residential real estate.

  • Desire of every taxpayer to arrange his affairs in a manner that minimises his tax liability.

  • Desire of every government to tax a part of profit arising out of a transnational transaction.

5.6 In India, the confusion is worst confounded on account of additional problems, which are purely administrative in nature :

  • Use of different languages in similar provisions, for example, some Sections in chapter VI-A use the term ‘attributable to’ as opposed to ‘derived from’ used in other Sections resulting in endless litigation.

  • Desire to deny deduction to which the assessee is entitled, leading to prolonged litigation, for example, S. 80HHC.

  • Bad drafting of laws. This is despite the fact that all members of the CBDT are from the field and are conversant with the problems faced both by the tax gatherer and the tax-payer.

  • Desire of tax gatherer to collect the most rather than the correct share of tax.

Complexity must be reduced if it cannot be eliminated:

6.1 This does not mean that no attempt should be made to rein in complexity. Complexity in itself creates opportunities for tax avoidance and also causes difficulties for honest taxpayers. It leads to confusion and mistakes that are often hard to distinguish from dishonesty. Consequently, penalties become a less appealing approach to enforcement, while simultaneously, detection becomes costlier. In other words, complexity not only increases the cost of compliance for the taxpayer, but it also increases the cost of enforcement for the Government. Therefore, before giving in to demands of special interest groups, one must think hard about whether the alleged equity or advantage resulting from each new exception (exemption, “deduction, etc.) is really worth the added complexity and confusion.

6.2 Lessons can also be learnt from international best practices. For example, OECD and the United Nations have been incessantly working for reducing complexities in international taxation by drafting model treaties for avoiding double taxation.

Simplification of Tax Administration:

7.1 Given the limited possibility of reducing complexity, the focus must necessarily shift from simplification of tax laws to simplification in tax administration. Greater attention should be’ paid to improving compliance through equity, improvement in taxpayer services, transparency and accountability. The last disclosure scheme was questioned and criticised on the ground that it rewarded the dishonest taxpayer. But its success also demonstrated quite effectively that simplicity coupled with a responsive administration works.

7.2 US President Lyndon Johnson said, “I do not suppose we will ever get to the point where people are pleased to pay taxes, but we owe it to them to see that the collection is done as efficiently as possible, as courteously as possible and always honestly.”

7.3 The concept of good governance and fair treatment of stakeholder is not just applicable to the corporate world, but is with much greater force applicable to the Government, which has the primary duty to treat taxpayer with fairness and dignity.

7.4 The Citizens’ charter published by the tax authorities proclaims its commitment to excellence in providing service to the taxpayers. It is about time that the Tax Department is held accountable on this promise. Tax practitioners should also work in tandem in promoting voluntary tax compliance. The unfortunate experience of the taxpayer and the tax practitioner is that the general approach is to treat the taxpayer as a tax evader and tax practitioner as evader’s abettor.

7.5 Simplification of tax administration can be achieved through systemic changes, effective use of technology and by introducing transparency and accountability. If information is available electronically and the interface between taxpayer and Tax Department is minimised to only where absolutely essential, then it will not only reduce the scope for malpractice, but would also improve tax administration. Higher transparency will automatically also result in higher accountability. In the age of ‘Right to Information’ this is the need of the hour.

7.6 Innovative steps in this direction could be:

  • Statistics of additions made at assessment level as compared to additions finally sustained, total successful appeals out of total appeals filed by each section of the Department, and so on can be made public through Department’s website.

  • Broad and well thought out parameters and not just revenue collection, should be used as criteria to judge the performance of the tax officers. This would go a long way in improving tax administration and bring about a change in ‘rnindset’.

  • The bureaucrat, it is said is as good as his last mistake. This mindset results in paralysis of action, as mistakes are not forgiven, but non-performance is ignored and often (ironically) encouraged. Tax officers need to be rewarded for prompt decision and action and held accountable for inaction and delay.

  • Focussed training along with systemic changes by introducing transparency and accountability can certainly trigger the process of change.

  • The Department should discourage filing of frivolous appeals. Statistics establish that majority of the appeals are filed by the Department. The Courts should award ‘cost’ -nay – heavy costs to the assessee, in case it is of the opinion that the Department’s appeal is frivolous.

  • Where an issue is pending before the Supreme Court, the lower appellate authority should pass an order to the effect that the matter will be dealt with according to the decision of the Supreme Court. This will obviate the filing of an appeal by the assessee.

7.7 Given that the tax laws will necessarily remain complex, controversies should be addressed as soon as they arise in order to remove uncertainty. The Tax Department should communicate its stand on complex laws through Circulars that are unambiguous. Unfortunately, the present trend is to issue Circulars that are more complex than the original law they seek to clarify. Above all, the Department should follow a consistent approach across all jurisdictions.

7.8 It is well known that changes introduced in the name of simplicity cause the greatest confusion. Complexity in administration can also be reduced by avoiding frequent changes in laws and rules, as they only lead to fresh ground of litigations and confusion. Since amendments are often with retroactive effect, the complexity and uncertainty embedded in the laws are further compounded and sensible planning becomes impossible.

In Conclusion:
8.1 The biggest problem today is not that the law is complex, but that it is administered in a complex and unfriendly manner. Focus must therefore change from simplification of tax laws to improving tax administration.

8.2 It is the duty of the Government to create an environment where tax compliance is encouraged and every taxpayer is not considered guilty until proven innocent. As William Gladstone said, “it is the duty of the Government to make it difficult for the people to do wrong and easy to do right”.

8.3 Though tax laws will never achieve the simplicity we desire, the challenge is to have a responsive and efficient administration which can to a large measure prove John Have’s statement wrong. I quote:
‘Income Tax is capital punishment’.

Recent trends in revenue generation

Article

Both tax administrators as well as tax professionals —
Chartered Accountants, Advocates and other experts — are often so pre-occupied
with their day-to-day concerns that they sometimes have little time to study the
environment in which they are functioning. The present article seeks to provide
some information in respect of the latter.


Certain trends in collection of direct taxes in recent times
reflect an important change in the macro-economic environment in which we all
function and deserve some thought. The good news first : One feature of the
pattern of revenue in recent times is the much heavier reliance now placed by
the Central Government on direct taxes — personal income-tax and corporate tax —
to meet its revenue yields. The current composition of revenue is now much more
reflective of the revenue composition of a developed country. This is in marked
contrast to the situation which prevailed in the country about 12 to 13 years
ago. During the year 1995-96, direct taxes accounted only for 30.2% of the
revenues of the Central Government. The current figure for 2007-08 is 48.8%.
During the year 1995-96, customs and central excise duties were the mainstay of
the central finance — accounting for 32.1% and 36.1%, respectively, of the
revenue receipts. In the year 2007-08,
these figures declined to 18% and 23.8%, respectively.

The decline in the reliance on indirect taxes cannot but be
good news for the economy, for the efficiency and distortion losses from such
taxes are well known and are generally much greater than those from
income-taxes. The latter do not have a cascading effect which a tax on tax
generates. Income-taxes also do not distort to the same extent, the natural
choices of consumers and producers. One can only hope for the sake of the
healthy development of our economy that this trend of progressively greater
reliance on personal income-tax and corporate tax will continue.

Up to and including the financial year 1995-96, income-tax
and corporate tax raised by the Income-tax Department were more or less equal.
During the year 1995-96, revenue from personal income-tax stood at Rs.15,592
crores and that from corporate tax at Rs.16,487 crores. The growth of these two
taxes till this year was more or less on par in that the ratio of 1 : 1 was
being consistently maintained from year to year.

There has been a sea change since then. As a percentage of
gross tax revenues of the Central Government, personal income-tax has increased
between 1995-96 and 2007-08 from 14.0% to 18.1%. During this period corporate
tax more than doubled from 14.8% to 30.7% of the Centre’s tax revenues. As a
percentage of GDP, personal income-tax has increased from 1.3% to 2.1% of the
GDP. Corporate tax on the other hand has increased from 1.4% to more than 4% of
the GDP. The growth of corporate tax is thus, by any indicator, far more rapid
than personal income-tax. This phenomenon has important implications not only
for the tax administration, but the entire economy.

What it appears to imply is that the level of voluntary
compliance insofar as corporate tax is concerned is much better than in the case
of personal income-tax. The current ratio of personal income-tax to corporate
tax of 7 : 12 is heavily skewed in favour of corporate tax. Compare this with
the United Kingdom where in the year 2004-05, corporate tax accounted for
receipts of 34.1 billion Pounds and personal income-tax for receipts of 127.2
billion Pounds. The ratio between personal income-tax and corporate tax was thus
3.73 : 1. Considering the magnitude of corporatisation in the two countries, one
would imagine that the revenues from personal income-tax in India too should be
far greater than corporate tax. What policy makers need to ponder over is why
the ratio between the two taxes is so heavily biased now in favour of corporate
tax. One inference that can reasonably be drawn is that the collections from
personal income-tax are far below potential.

The explanations for this phenomenon are not far to seek :
the culture for voluntary compliance amongst non-corporate entities in India is
still very weak. People still do not perceive any great advantage in paying
taxes, possibly because they cannot see getting back any benefit from doing so.
Even more so, they do not see anything morally wrong in evading taxes if they
can get away with it; if they find that others, equally placed, are doing so
successfully without coming to any harm; or if they perceive complexities in the
system, too daunting to handle.

Future thrust of policy planning should surely be in the
direction of finding ways of making ordinary people see the advantages of paying
taxes. This would involve a twofold strategy : in the first instance, they must
be able to perceive that it would be difficult for them to get away in case they
do not pay taxes according to law. Strengthening the third-party reporting
system (AIR) would definitely help in this regard. Secondly, and even more
importantly, it is important to undertake taxpayer education on a larger scale
than ever before to make the taxpayers realise the advantages of voluntarily
complying with the law.

At the level of the cutting edge, a taxpayer must also want
to deal with the Tax Department and not shy away such a course of action. In
concrete terms, this would mean that the Tax Department itself would need to
work on improving the attitudes of its officials towards the taxpaying public. A
climate in which scrutiny assessments are made in a much less threatening
environment would perhaps need to be created. One possible way to achieve this
objective would surely be to prescribe a limit on the number of times a taxpayer
can be called for making a routine scrutiny. The officer’s discretion to call
for information should also not be open ended, but severely circumscribed
inter alia
by the reasons for which the computer system has selected the
case in the first instance. In other words, it should not ordinarily be open to
the officer to launch fishing inquiries into areas which are beyond the reasons
for selection.

The direct taxes to GDP ratio has improved appreciably from 2.8% to well over 6%between the years 1995-96 and 2007-08. The overall taxes to GDP ratio of the Central and State Governments, put together, however, is still very low at about 15% to 16%. To bring this ratio and particularly that of direct taxes to GDP on par with developed countries, considerable modifications in polices, along the lines indicated above, would be required.

Tenancy : Right to take possession of secured asset would not include right to extinguish pre-existing tenancy : Securiti-sation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002.

New Page 1

30 Tenancy : Right to take possession of
secured asset would not include right to extinguish pre-existing tenancy :
Securiti-sation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of
Security Interest Act, 2002.


Tenancy is a creation of a contractual relationship between
the parties. Such tenancy would thereafter be statutory tenancy governed by the
provisions contained in the Bombay Rents, Hotel and Lodging House Rates Control
Act, 1947.

Where tenancy in respect of part of secured asset was created
long before the borrower (landlord) mortgaged the property to secure debt from
the secured creditor, then the provisions of the Securitisation Act would not
authorise secured creditor to extinguish such tenancy.

 

In view of relation between the borrower and the bank
(secured creditor), it may be open for the bank to take all such measures as may
be authorised under the Securitisation Act, including the measures enumerated in
Ss.(4) of S. 13. Such measures, however, would not permit the secured creditor
to extinguish the pre-existing tenancy between the tenant and the borrower. The
case would have been different if the tenancy was created subsequent to creation
of charge over the secured asset. The case perhaps also would have been
different had the case of tenancy been set up after creation of mortgage by the
borrower in favour of the secured creditor.

 

When there is a pre-existing admitted tenancy, in exercise of
powers U/ss.(4) of S. 13 of Act, even if it is open for the secured creditor to
take physical possession (as understood in contradiction to symbolic possession)
of property in question, such physical possession would not necessarily mean
vacant possession thereof. Thus, while asserting its rights u/s.13(4), it would
not be open to the secured creditor to summarily evict the pre-existing tenant
and extinguish his tenancy contrary to contract between landlord and tenant or
the Rent Act.

 

Neither the right to take possession, nor the right to sell
the property would include the right to extinguish the pre-existing tenancy.

 

The concept of possession and occupation are not necessarily
one and same. In legal terminology, both have distinct and different meanings.
The Legislature also recognises taking possession of the secured asset even
where it is not necessarily free from all encumbrances. The property can be put
to sale only after possession is taken by authorised officer. However, at the
time of putting property to sale, either by tender or by public auction, proviso
to sub-rule (6) of Rule 8 envisages issuance of public notice which will include
besides other details, the details of encumbrances on immovable property being
sold.

Therefore, despite overriding effect given to the provisions
contained in the Securitisation Act u/s. 35 over any other law for the time
being in force, the Act does not empower the secured creditor to extinguish a
pre-existing tenancy.

[ Dena Bank v. Shri Sihor Nagarik Sahakari Bank Ltd. & Ors., AIR 2008
Gujarat 110]

levitra

Stay : Tribunal has got inherent power to extend stay granted : Central Excise Act, 1944.

New Page 1

29 Stay : Tribunal has got inherent power to
extend stay granted : Central Excise Act, 1944.


The appellants were granted full waiver of pre-deposit of the
amounts and the appeal was listed for hearing. In the meanwhile the Revenue
proceeded to recover the amounts and hence the appellants filed the application
for extension of stay.

 

The Bangalore Tribunal held that the Tribunal has got
inherent powers to extend the stay granted in a matter as held by the Apex Court
in the case of CC & CE Ahmedabad v. Kumar Cotton Mills Pvt. Ltd., (2005)
(180) E.L.T. 434 (SC). Therefore the action of the Revenue to resort to coercive
steps was held to be unjustified.

[ R. S. Avatar Singh & Co. v. Commissioner of C. Ex.
Visakhapatnam-I,
2008 (226) E.L.T. 457 (Tri-Bang.)

 


levitra

Registration : Reconveyance deed not compulsorily registrable : Registration Act, 1908, S. 17(1)(b).

New Page 1

28 Registration : Reconveyance deed not
compulsorily registrable : Registration Act, 1908, S. 17(1)(b).


Whether a non-testamentary document in respect of immovable
properties is compulsorily registrable or not depends on the facts and
circumstances and the terms of the document. No hard and fast rule can be laid
down. The crucial test in each case is as to the nature of the document itself,
if it does create a right, title or interest in itself, whether in present or in
future, it is compulsory registrable u/s.17(1)(b). However, if by itself it does
not create any right but visualises creation or extinction of a right by some
other document, then it falls squarely within the ambit of S. 17(2)(v) and,
hence, not registrable.

In the instant case, the agreement in dispute was a simple
agreement to reconvey property under certain conditions mentioned therein and,
thus, was not compulsorily registrable. Under the circumstances, even provisions
of S. 92(4) of the Evidence Act are not applicable in such case and therefore
subsequent document varying the terms of recoveying deed would not required to
be registered.

[Bhikkilal & Ors v. Smt. Shanti Devi & Ors., AIR
2008 Rajasthan 128]

 


levitra

Guarantor — Liability : Rights of corporation to make recovery only against defaulting industrial concern and not against surety or guarantor : State Financial Corporation Act, 1951, S. 29 and S. 31.

New Page 1

26 Guarantor — Liability : Rights of
corporation to make recovery only against defaulting industrial concern and not
against surety or guarantor : State Financial Corporation Act, 1951, S. 29 and
S. 31.


AP Rocks Private Limited is an industrial concern. It
approached the appellant Corporation for grant of loan in the form of
non-convertible debenture.

Respondents who were Directors of Company executed deeds of
guarantee, agreeing to guarantee repayment/redemption by the company to the
Corporation of the said non-convertible debenture subscription together with
interest, etc. The said Company also executed a deed of hypothecation, whereby
and whereunder its plants and machinery were hypothecated. A collateral security
agreement was also executed. The ‘Industrial Concern’ allegedly committed
defaults.

 

The appellant-Corporation in exercise of its power u/s.29 of
the Act directed that the possession of the said properties of the guarantors be
taken over.

 

The Karnataka High Court held that the appellant-Corporation
could not have proceeded against the guarantors u/s.29 of the Act.

 

The Court observed that the heading of S. 29 states ‘Rights
of financial corporation in case of default’. The default contemplated thereby
is of the industrial concern. Such default would create a liability on the
industrial concern. Such a liability would arise inter alia when the
industrial concern makes any default in repayment of any loan or advance or any
instalment thereof under the agreement. In the eventualities contemplated u/s.29
of the Act, the Corporation shall have the right to take over the management or
possession or both of the industrial concern. It confers an additional right as
the words ‘as well as’ are used which confer a right on the corporation to
transfer by way of lease or sale and realise the property pledged, mortgaged,
hypothecated or assigned to the Corporation. S. 29 nowhere states that the
Corporation can proceed against the surety even if some properties are mortgaged
or hypothecated by it. The right of the financial corporation in terms of S. 29
must be exercised only on a defaulting party. There cannot be any default as is
envisaged in S. 29 by a surety or a guarantor. The liabilities of a surety or
the guarantor to repay the loan of the principal debtor arises only when a
default is made by the latter. The words ‘as well as’ play a significant role.
It confers two different rights but such rights are to be enforced against the
same person, viz., the industrial concern.

 

The liability of a surety is made co-extensive with the
liability of the principal debtor only by virtue of S. 128 of the Contract Act.
The rights and liabilities of a surety and the principal borrower otherwise are
different and distinct.

 

An implied power of Corporation to proceed against a surety
or guarantor cannot be read in S. 29 on principle that a construction which
effectuates the legislative intent and purpose must be adopted. A statutory
authority may have an implied power to effectuate exercise of substantive power,
but the same never means that if a remedy is provided to take action against one
in a particular manner, it may not only be exercised against him, but also
against the other in the same manner.

 

Therefore, the intention of the Parliament in enacting S. 29
and S. 31 was not similar. Whereas S. 29 consists of the property of the
industrial concern, S. 31 takes within its sweep both the property of the
industrial concern and that of the surety. None of the provisions control each
other. The Parliament intended to provide an additional remedy for recovery of
the amount in favour of the Corporation by proceeding against a surety only in
terms of S. 31 and not u/s.29 thereof.

[ Karnataka State Financial Corporation v. N.
Narasimahaiah & Ors.,
AIR 2008 Supreme Court 1797]

 


levitra

Passport Renewal : Renewal of passport cannot be withheld indefinitely for want of police verification : Passport Act S. 5, S. 6.

New Page 1

27 Passport Renewal : Renewal of passport
cannot be withheld indefinitely for want of police verification : Passport Act
S. 5, S. 6.


The petitioner had applied for issuance of passport, but
neither the same had been issued, nor the issuance has been declined by the
Passport Authority. The respondents stated that on receipts of the applications
for issuance/renewal of passports, the cases were sent for clearance by the CID
and either the same has not been received back or received with the inconclusive
report or received with the recommendation that the same should not be issued,
therefore, no decision in the matter has yet been taken by the Authority.

The High Court observed that on receipt of the application
the Passport Authority is empowered to make such inquiry which he may consider
necessary before issuance of a passport. It is because of such power of making
inquiry the Passport Officer is entitled to seek Police verification report in
regard to the antecedents of the person who has applied for the issuance of a
passport. The purpose of such inquiry by the Passport Authority is to enable
himself to make up his mind as to whether the passport or travel documents
should be issued or refused in the circumstances of each particular case. The
decision over the issue of a passport or travel documents has to be taken by the
Passport Authority alone and for taking such decision he may keep the
intelligence report in view. Merely because the intelligence report received is
adverse, the Passport Authority cannot defer his own decision on the issue of
passport, nor can he refuse the same without applying his mind to the facts
stated in the report. Adverse Police verification report per se does not
disentitle a citizen from his legal right to have a passport. It is for the
Passport Authority to take into consideration the facts/antecedents of the
person who has applied for issuance of a passport, alleged by the intelligence
agency in its report, for deciding whether passport should be issued or refused.
The Passport Authority is not bound by the recommendations of the intelligence
agency.

Where a complete police verification report has not been
received within thirty days, the Passport Authority is to take a decision by
following instructions of the Chief Passport Officer. Therefore, in no case the
Passport Officer can withhold consideration of the question of issuance of
passport or travel documents indefinitely and same shall be true about the cases
of renewal or re-issue of passports or travel documents.

[Anwar-ul-Haq v. UOI & Ors., AIR 2008 Jammu and
Kashmir 35]

 


levitra

Hindu Law : Daughters are entitled to a share in ancestral properties as a co-parcener : Hindu Succession Act, 1950, S. 6.

New Page 5

24 Hindu Law : Daughters are entitled to a share in ancestral
properties as a co-parcener : Hindu Succession Act, 1950, S. 6.


One Shri Jagatram was the common ancestor of the parties. He
was owner in possession of the property. After his death, one Shri Byasadev
succeeded to the suit properties. Shri Byasadev died, leaving behind his widow
defendant No. 1 and two daughters i.e., plaintiff and defendant No. 2 as
his legal heirs, the other defendants are coparceners. While the father of the
plaintiff was alive, she out of her own income constructed the house on the suit
property with consent of her parents.

After the death of Byasadev, the plaintiff demanded for
partition of the suit house claiming exclusive share.

The High Court observed that after the amendment made in S. 6
of the Hindu Succession Act in the year 2005, the daughters are entitled to a
share in the ancestral properties as coparceners. The parties belong to Hindu
Mitakshara family and plaintiff and defendant No. 2 are daughters. Defendant No.
1 is the widow and other defendants are the successors of common ancestor
Jagatram. Since they are coparceners, each of them is entitled to a share. All
the parties in the suit are entitled to a share and that there was no previous
partition.

[ Santilata Sahu v. Sabitri Sahu & Ors., AIR 2008
Orissa 86]


levitra

Hindu Law : Widow inheriting property of her husband on his death cannot be divested on subsequent remarriage : Hindu Widow’s Remarriage Act, S. 2 (Repealed) and Hindu Succession Act 1956.

New Page 5

25 Hindu Law : Widow inheriting property of her husband on
his death cannot be divested on subsequent remarriage : Hindu Widow’s Remarriage
Act, S. 2 (Repealed) and Hindu Succession Act 1956.


The properties in dispute belong to one Sri Perva-kutty. He
had three sons and two daughters. He executed a will bequeathing the said
properties in favour of his sons and also made provisions for payment of monthly
allowance to the wife Sri Perva-kutty and one of his sons Shri Sukumaran who
died.


The widow of Shri Sukumaran remarried one Shri Sudhakasen
Sudhakaran who also died. Thereafter she filed a suit for partition claiming

ard
share in the suit property.


The Hindu Succession Act, 1956 brought about a sea change in
Shastric Hindu Law. Remarriage of a widow stands legalised by reason of the
incorporation of the Act. Hindu widows were brought on equal footing in the
matter of inheritance and succession alongwith the male heirs. S. 14(1) of the
Act stipulates that any property possessed by a female Hindu, whether acquired
before or after the commencement of the Act, will be held by her as a full owner
thereof. Upon death of Sukumaran, his share vested in his wife absolutely by
reason of inheritance in term of S. 14(1) of the Act. The provisions of the 1956
Act, thus shall prevail over the text of any Hindu Law.

The Act of 1956 in terms of S. 8 permits the widow of a Hindu
male to inherit simultaneously with the son, daughter and other heirs specified
in class I of the Schedule. Therefore, the subsequent remarriage does not divest
the widow of her property in view of provisions of Hindu Succession Act, 1956.

[ Cherotte Sugathan (D) by L. Rs & Ors v. Cherotte Bharathi & Ors.,
AIR 2008 SC 1467]

levitra

Deficiency in service : By building and developing firm : Consumer Protection Act : S. 2(1)(g).

New Page 5

22 Deficiency in service : By building and developing firm :
Consumer Protection Act : S. 2(1)(g).


The building and developing firm refused to refund the loan
amount alongwith interest. The affidavit of one of the partners of the firm and
cheques proved the transaction of loan.

The Hon’ble Commission held that the complaint under the Act
is maintainable and the firm was held deficient in its service in not refunding
part of deposited amount with interest.

[ T. Shahul Mameed & Anr. v. M/s. Ullal Hari Vaman Nayaj
& Ors.,
AIR 2008 (NOC) 1500 (NCC)]


levitra

Tenancy created after creation of charge by borrower on property : No protection in law available to such tenant : Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002.

New Page 5

23 Tenancy created after creation of charge by borrower on
property : No protection in law available to such tenant : Securitisation and
Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act,
2002.


The petitioner has challenged the notice issued u/s.13(4) of
the Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of
Security Interest Act, 2002. The petitioner had claimed that he is a tenant in
the property in dispute since August, 2006 and the notices have been issued to
the borrowers after recalling the huge outstanding amount of loan with interest.
The charge on the property was created much earlier to the commencement of
tenancy. In such a situation, a tenant of the present nature would not enjoy any
protection as the property was already been encumberated by the charge created
over it by the owner/borrower.

Tenancy has to be proved by a document or otherwise prior to
the date of creation of charge of equitable mortgage. It is well settled that a
mortgage or mortgagor cannot induct a tenant without mutual agreement and confer
upon a tenant any right to the prejudice of either of the parties. In the
instant case, the relationship of the petitioner as a tenant with the borrower
as a landlord admittedly came into existence after the creation of charge by the
borrower on the property which is under the tenancy of the petitioner and,
therefore, no protection in law would be available to such a tenant. It was held
that the petitioner in his capacity as tenant does not enjoy any right qua the
charge holder respondent Bank.

[ M/s. Delhi Punjab Goods Carrier P. Ltd. v. Bank of
Baroda,
AIR 2008 P & H 107]


levitra

Dishonour of cheque : Only the drawer of cheque can be held liable for the offence : Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, S. 138, S. 141.

New Page 5

21 Dishonour of cheque : Only the drawer of cheque can be
held liable for the offence : Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, S. 138, S. 141.


Where the wife was joint account holder alongwith her husband
and cheque was issued by husband, which was dishonoured, the wife cannot be held
liable for the offence u/s.141 of the Act.

The Court observed that there is no such provision regarding
taking cognisance against a person other than the ‘drawer’ of the cheque. It is
manifest from the expression of the words used in S. 138 of the Act “such person
shall be deemed to have committed the offence” related to the person who has
drawn the cheque in favour of the payee and if the said cheque is returned
unpaid on account of the conditions mentioned u/s.138 of the Act, such person
alone is liable, but not other except the contingencies mentioned u/s.141 of the
Act. The accused husband could alone be saddled with culpable liability as he
was the only ‘drawer’ of the cheque.

[ Smt. Bandeep Kaur v. S. Avneet Singh, AIR 2008 (NOC)
1301 (P&H)]


levitra

Double taxation credit under MAT regime — Software companies

Alimony pendente lite can be claimed by wife by resorting to both provision u/s.125 of Criminal Procedure Code and also u/s. 24 of Hindu Marriage Act.

New Page 1

17 Alimony pendente lite can
be claimed by wife by resorting to both provision u/s.125 of Criminal Procedure
Code and also u/s. 24 of Hindu Marriage Act.


An application was filed u/s 13 of Hindu Marriage Act for
dissolution of the marriage solemnised between the petitioner/husband and
respondent/wife.

 

In the said proceedings, respondent/wife filed an application
u/s.24 of the Hindu Marriage Act, seeking maintenance pendente lite and
expenses for the proceedings. In the application filed u/s.24 of the Hindu
Marriage Act, the respondent/wife claimed a sum of Rs.2000 per month as
maintenance and a sum of Rs.500 as litigation expenses.

 

Apart from filing this application u/s.24 of the Hindu
Marriage Act in the proceedings pending under the Hindu Marriage Act, the
respondent/wife also filed an application claiming maintenance u/s.125 of Cr. P.
C. before the same Family Court. In this application also the respondent wife
claimed a sum of Rs.2,000 as maintenance and Rs.500 as litigation expenses. In
both these cases, the Family Court had directed for payment of Rs.1,000 as
maintenance and a sum of Rs.500 as litigation expenses. The petitioner husband
filed an application for adjustment of the maintenance granted in both the
proceedings, which was rejected.

 

The petitioner husband filed petition under Article 227 of
the Constitution, challenging the rejection of the application for adjustment of
the maintenance granted in both the proceedings.

 

The Court observed that, the Court, which decided the
applications u/s.24 of the Hindu Marriage Act and S. 125 of Cr. P. C. was alive
to the situation that proceedings under both these Sections are pending and
decided both the applications on the same day by passing two different orders.
The Court while passing one order could take note of the same and thereafter
could have granted adjustment of the amount while passing the other order. Where
the Court after evaluating totality of circumstances found that maintenance
granted in each case i.e., u/s.125, Criminal P. C. and S. 24 of the Hindu
Marriage Act is sufficient and no adjustment is necessary, dismissed the
application of the husband for adjustment, no error of law was committed
warranting interference.

 

There is nothing under the law which lays down as a mandatory
requirement the principle for granting adjustment or deducting the amount of
maintenance or alimony granted in a proceeding u/s.125 Criminal P. C. or u/s.24
of the Hindu Marriage Act or vice versa. The principle laid down is that
maintenance u/s.125 of Criminal P. C. and alimony pendente lite u/s.24 of
the Hindu Marriage Act can be claimed by resorting to both these provisions and
the Court is competent under these provisions to grant relief to the person
concerned and the question of adjustment to be granted has to be decided after
taking into consideration the totality of the circumstances, the amount granted,
and the capacity of the person directed for making the payment. There is nothing
to suggest that as a thumb-rule adjustment to the amount is to be granted in
each and every case.

[ Ashok Singh Pal v. Smt. Manjulata, AIR 2008 Madhya
Pradesh 139]

 


levitra

Appeal dismissed for default restored as there was no lapse on part of the applicant.

New Page 1

16 Appeal dismissed for default restored as
there was no lapse on part of the applicant.


The appeal notice to the respondent was returned unserved and
thereafter no steps for effecting service was taken. The Bombay High Court
restored the appeal by observing that the lapse in effecting proper service was
on part of the counsel or his staff and for which the applicant should not
suffer.

[ Commissioner of Central Ex. & Customs v. Suyash
Engineering Works,
(2008) 225 ELT 22 (Bom.)]

 


levitra

Co-op. Housing Society : BMC cannot sanction the modified plan without fresh NOC from society : Appellate Court, must pass reasoned order : Bombay Municipal Corporation Act S. 354A.

New Page 1

4. Co-op. Housing Society : BMC cannot
sanction the modified plan without fresh NOC from society : Appellate Court,
must pass reasoned order : Bombay Municipal Corporation Act S. 354A.


The appellant is a co-op. hsg. society. A building plan was
submitted by the respondent No. 2 to the appellant society for approval and the
approval was granted by the appellant. Earlier a lease was granted by the
appellant society (the lessor) with respect to the plan in question in favour of
one Shri J. C. Patel and it has been provided therein that any structural
alternatives and additions by the lessee in the building required consent in
writing of the appellant. The condition to be complied with before the starting
of the work of building on the plot, the respondent No. 1 has mentioned that NOC
from the society along with resolution of general body for development will be
submitted before commencement certificate.

Thus the terms of the lease deed have been approved by the
respondent No. 1. The lessee made substantial changes in the original plan
without getting NOC from the appellant society. It was alleged by the appellant
that the respondent No. 2 suppressed the subsequent plan and was wilfully
deceiving the appellant by giving false representation.

The appellant expelled respondent No. 2 and Patel from the
membership of the appellant society. The appellant society terminated the lease
deed and initiated eviction proceeding against the respondents. The appellant
society represented to respondent No. 1 that the unamended plan was illegal. On
receiving the representation, the respondent No. 1 BMC issued a ‘stop-work
notice’ u/s. 354 A of the BMC Act.

Subsequently the respondent No. 1 withdrew the stop-work
notice against which the writ-petition was filed in the High Court by the
appellant society which was dismissed by the Single Judge and was upheld by the
Division Bench on appeal.

The Supreme Court held that respondent No. 2 had violated the
conditions of lease deed and the construction as the amended plan was wholly
illegal. There was a specific stipulation in the lease deed that NOC from the
lessor has to be obtained for the purpose of obtaining sanction of the building
plan from the BMC. The BMC cannot sanction/modify the plan unless a fresh NOC
had been obtained by the lessee from the appellant society. The order of the
High Court is set aside and the order of the BMC withdrawing the ‘stop-work
notice’ was quashed.

The Court also observed that when a judgment is written, the
learned Judge should at least briefly mention the facts of the case, the
controversy and then give his reasoning. Even in a judgment of affirmance, he
must show that it has properly applied his mind to the case and not acted as a
rubber stamp. There must be own independent reasoning.


[The New India Co-operative Housing Society Ltd. v.
Municipal Corporation of Greater Mumbai and Anr.
(unreported) Civil Appeal
No. 5426 of 2008 (Arising out of Special Leave Petition (Civil) No. 20670 of
2006) order dated 2-9-2008]

 


levitra

Claim for compensation for Fatal Accident can be made only for benefit of spouse, parent and child of deceased and not for benefit of brother or other relations of deceased. Expression ‘Legal Representative’ : Motor Vehicles Act (59 of 1988) : S. 68.

New Page 1

2. Claim for compensation for Fatal Accident
can be made only for benefit of spouse, parent and child of deceased and not for
benefit of brother or other relations of deceased. Expression ‘Legal
Representative’ : Motor Vehicles Act (59 of 1988) : S. 68.


The appellants were the father, mother and brother of
deceased. The claimants challenged the quantum of compensation. The deceased had
died in a motor vehicle accident. The deceased was aged 21 years at the time of
her death and was a famous cine artist and dancer. According to the appellants
the compensation claimed was about Rs.60,00,000. The question which arose for
consideration was whether a brother of a person killed in a motor vehicle
accident can claim compensation.

 

S. 166(1) of the Motor Vehicle Act states the different set
of persons who can file applications for compensation arising out of an accident
of the nature specified in S. 165(1) of the M.V. Act.

 

The expression ‘legal representative’ has not been defined in
the M.V. Act. Definition of the expression ‘legal representative’ has been
incorporated in S. 2(11) of the Code of Civil Procedure, 1908. The said
definition, no doubt, in terms does not apply to a case before the Claims
Tribunal, but it has to be stated that even in ordinary parlance the said
expression is understood almost in the same way in which it is defined in the
Code of Civil Procedure. The definition reflects the sense in which the
expression is understood ordinarily and, therefore, must govern cases before the
Tribunal. Ordinarily, heirs of the deceased are the persons who represent the
estate of the deceased and must be taken to be his legal representatives. A
legal representative in a given case need not necessarily be the wife, husband,
parent and child. Thus in case of death of a person in a motor vehicle accident,
compensation can be claimed only by the legal representatives. They may claim
besides special damages, etc. compensation for economic loss and loss to the
estate. A brother of the deceased may be a legal representative of the deceased
in the absence of preferential heirs under the personal law governing the
parties and if so, he can claim compensation. But he cannot do so, if he is not
a legal representative entitled to succeed to the estate of the deceased. This
is so even if as a matter of fact they were dependent on the deceased for
financial help.

[ P. N. Unni & Ors. v. Baby John & ors., AIR 2008
Kerala 157]

 


levitra

Banks and Internal Audit

Article

Corporate governance, as we all know, has been under a strong
and critical public spotlight in recent years, in the wake of a succession of
blows to market confidence and integrity, particularly in the United States, but
echoed in India and other countries as well. The community’s expectations of
Boards and senior management, and of those charged with providing an independent
review of a company’s operations and financial accounts, have been raised. To
meet those expectations, governments and regulatory authorities around the globe
have mounted a concerted campaign to improve standards of corporate behavior and
transparency through international harmonisation of accounting standards,
strengthening the principles of corporate governance, lifting the bar on the
‘fitness and propriety’ of directors and managers and introducing improved
market disclosure standards.


In this demanding environment, the Boards and senior
management need quality advice from sources that can be trusted and that can
offer an objective viewpoint. Much of the focus of Sarbanes-Oxley in the United
States and Clause 49 in India has been on the external audit function. Equally,
however, there is a need to ensure that internal audit is organised, resourced
and empowered, so that it can provide competent, impartial and fearless advice.

This article offers a perspective on the role of internal
audit. It then sets out the expectations of internal audit held by regulators at
the national level and how internal audit needs to gear up to meet these
expectations.

My comments are offered in a constructive spirit to encourage
debate within the internal audit profession.

The role of internal audit :

What better starting point for my comments than the
definition of internal audit approved by the Board of Directors of the Institute
of Internal Auditors :

“Internal auditing is an independent, objective assurance
and consulting activity designed to add value and improve an organisation’s
operations. It helps an organisation accomplish its objectives by bringing a
systematic, disciplined approach to evaluate and improve the effectiveness of
risk management, control, and governance processes.”


I remind you of this definition because I want to draw a
distinction between internal audit and risk management. As we see it, the basic
function of internal audit is independent appraisal of an institution’s internal
controls, including controls over financial reporting. Of course, a by-product
of internal audit will be recommendations on internal control and process
improvements that could be made, an important role for internal audit in large
and complex institutions in particular.

Risk management, on the other hand, is about identifying and
assessing inherent risks in the products and activities of an institution, and
ensuring that appropriate risk management limits, control mechanisms and
mitigation strategies are in place to contain risk within the institution’s risk
appetite and capital support. The distinction is that risk management has the
important and continuous responsibility of understanding how actual risk facing
the institution is changing (day by day or month by month) and assessing if the
risk limits, controls or mitigations need updating.

Of course, the institutions need to ensure cooperation
between internal audit and risk management and a clarification of roles, so that
unintended gaps do not emerge.

The expectations of Regulators :

The pivotal role of internal audit in the corporate
governance of institutions is enshrined in international standards for
regulators, though they are high-level in nature.

In banking as a case in example, the Core Principles for
Effective Banking Supervision,
developed under the auspices of the Basel
Committee on Banking Supervision, specifies the principle that banks should have
in place internal controls that are adequate for the nature and scale of the
business. These should include, inter alia, appropriate independent
internal or external audit and compliance functions to test adherence to these
controls as well as applicable laws and regulations.

In assessing adherence to this principle, the Basel
Committee’s ‘essential criteria’ for the internal audit function are that it :



  • has unfettered access to all the bank’s business lines and support
    departments;



  • has appropriate independence, including reporting lines to the Board of
    Directors and status within the bank to ensure that senior management reacts
    to and acts upon its recommendations;



  • has sufficient resources and staff that are suitably trained and have relevant
    experience, to understand and evaluate the business it is auditing; and



  • employ a methodology that identifies the key risks run by the bank and
    allocates its resources accordingly.



The Basel Committee also issued a paper, Internal audit in banks and the supervisor’s relationship with auditors, in August 2001 to provide more detailed guidance to bank supervisors. The paper has wider applicability and I recommend it to those who are not familiar with it. It sets out 20 separate principles for the internal audit function, dealing with such issues as continuity, professional competence, the audit charter and relationships with the external auditor.

My Assessment on Independence  of the Internal Audit Function:

Our starting ‘point is determining whether the internal audit function is in-house or outsourced, and whether this arrangement is appropriate. The following crucial benchmarks need to be in place for internal audit teams.

(i)    Independence:

The Board of the institution should ensure that the independence of the internal audit function is maintained. This independence may be compromised if the function is directly involved in risk management or operational processes. The internal audit function may provide valuable input to those responsible for risk management, but should not itself have direct risk management responsibilities. In practice, some institutions (particularly small ones) may give internal audit initial responsibility for developing a risk management programme. Where this is the case, institutions should see that responsibility for day-to-day risk management is transferred elsewhere in a timely manner. Where the internal audit function is outsourced there should not be any conflicts of interest – for example, internal audit should not be a source of referral business for the institution.

Some  food for thought!

I would like to offer you my thoughts on some key issues:

(i)    Establishing  the authority  of internal  audit:

It must be recognised as a core part of governance and not as some form of necessary burden or add-on. Asserting the importance of authority is one thing, earning that authority is another. In the end, it is the professionalism and quality of internal audit work that will show Boards, senior management and regulators that the function does add value. Clearly, the message that internal audit wants to send will not carry weight if it cannot demonstrate that the message is founded on both technical and commercial competence – a balancing of technique and ‘real world’ skills and experience.

(ii)    Transparency  and  independence:

The provision of independence assurance to the audit committee (or Board) is the central tenet of internal audit. The internal audit function should report directly to the audit committee of the Board, and not to management with operational responsibilities. A direct reporting line to the Board has now become international best practice.

In my view, having internal audit answer to management creates real concerns about the independence of the review function. Internal audit must be able to directly inform the audit committee (or the Board) about the adequacy or otherwise of internal controls, including those involving high-level management. Internal audit must know that the board is its master.

(iii)Audit Committees:
The effectiveness of internal audit comes down, ultimately, to the use that the audit committee and Board decide to make of it. These days, diligent and probing Board directors want a strong and active internal audit function to assist them. They rely on internal audit’s knowledge of the risks facing the institution and the control weaknesses, and its recommendations for improvement, to help them discharge their responsibilities.

(iv) Conflict situation:

Regulators can cite too many examples where weak corporate governance has undermined the financial soundness of an institution, whether through unfocussed global expansion, pursuit of growth for growth’s sake, a dominant chief executive officer or a ‘good news’ syndrome. Internal audit should be alert to such signs of weakness and raise them with the audit committee (or Board) as governance, controls or review concerns.

Concluding remarks:
The ever-increasing pressure on institutions to manage their affairs and risks prudently poses considerable challenges for corporate governance structures and for internal audit, a key line of defence in these structures. Every challenge, however, is an opportunity. For internal auditors as a profession, the current environment is an opportunity to cement your presence in corporate India where India is Rising and Shining.

The challenges and opportunities for internal audit in this risk-focussed environment can perhaps be simply summarised as ‘looking at the right things, not just doing things right’.

Management fees : Are you following the best practices ?

Article

1.0 Introduction :


One of the most widely contested issues by Indian tax
authorities during a transfer pricing audit is the amount paid for intra-group
services to group companies often referred to as management or intra-group
fees/charges. In fact, compensation for intra-group services has been one of the
important transfer pricing challenges globally for taxpayer and authorities
alike.

At the same time, management fees can be one of the more
important and legitimate tax planning tools for effectively lowering taxable
income in a particular tax jurisdiction, if it is structured in a proper manner.
Hence it is obvious that tax authorities look at this mechanism as a profit
extraction technique and adopt a strict posture while investigating the
inter-company affairs. Further it is imperative that the Multinational
Enterprise (MNE) group which is formulating an intra-group management fee
policy, must consider the tax implications in both the jurisdictions. It is also
equally important to consider other aspects such as withholding tax, indirect
tax levies, international tax and regulatory issues while formulating an
intra-group management fee policy.

This article (in two parts) seeks to outline certain key
aspects that need to be considered while formulating a management fee policy and
also the broad approach to be followed in this regard. The analysis here is
mainly from an Indian perspective (i.e., mainly with reference to a
foreign MNE proposing to charge management fees to its Indian group company to
which support services are rendered, and also with reference to an Indian MNE
proposing to charge management fees to its overseas group companies). At various
places, the article also highlights the practical approach currently being
followed by the Indian tax authorities and issues encountered by taxpayers based
on transfer pricing assessments recently completed.


There is no specific mention of intra-group services (though
there is for cost sharing arrangements) in Indian transfer pricing provisions [i.e.,
S. 92 of the Income-tax Act, 1961 (ITA)]. The law is still emerging in India and
therefore reliance is also placed on, and useful inferences have been drawn
from, the international tax practices followed in some other developed
countries, along with the OECD Transfer Pricing Guidelines (OECD Guidelines)
1
and the Guidance Note of the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India on
transfer pricing.


2.0 Concept of intra-group services and management fees :


An intra-group service is a service performed by one member
of a multinational group for the benefit of one or more group companies. The
intra-group services may be performed by a parent company or a sister company
for any one or more of the group companies. In a transfer pricing context, such
intra-group services become significant when they are rendered to related
parties located in different tax jurisdictions.


The OECD Guidelines state that generally every MNE group
arranges for a broad range of services to be available to its members, in
particular, administrative, technical, financial and commercial services. Such
services may include management, coordination and control functions for the
entire group.
2 In
essence, intra-group services encompass a broad range of services that can
potentially be provided by the parent/group company to another group company (or
across group companies). In general, the categories of services that could be
regarded as intra-group services include the following :




  • management services;



  • administrative services;



  • coordination, control and administrative services;



  • research and development;



  • product development;



  • technical services;



  • purchasing, marketing and distribution;



  • engineering services;



  • staff & HR related matters, such as recruitment and training;



  • financial services;



  • legal services; and



  • other commercial services that typically can be provided with regard to the
    nature of the MNE’s business.



Some of the intra-group services (basic administrative,
financial or support services) could be referred to as routine in nature. The
identification and treatment of these services are generally straightforward and
simple. However, the issue of charging for services may become complex as the
nature of services moves from routine to more sophisticated.

3.0 Broad parameters for designing a policy for charging for intra-group
services :


Considering the importance of charging arm’s-length management fees from the perspective of both the service provider and the service recipient, the basic principles involved in designing a management fee policy are discussed here. Broadly speaking, the OECD Guidelines” outline two main issues that should be addressed when evaluating intra-group services in the context of transfer pricing, namely:

  • determining whether the activities undertaken by a parent company or group service centre genuinely constitute intra-group services (i.e., whether the payer is receiving a benefit); and

  • how to determine an arm’s-length consideration for such services (in accordance with the benefit received).

3.1 Determining whether intra-group services have been rendered:

The OECD Guidelines provide a basis to determine whether a service has been rendered. The OECD Guidelines broadly state that when one group member performs an activity for one or more group members, it will be regarded as a service rendered if and only if the activity provides the respective group member with economic or commercial value that might conceivably enhance the recipient’s commercial position.’ It also provides another simple way to ensure that a legitimate service is being rendered by considering whether an independent enterprise in similar circumstances would be willing to pay for the same service conducted by another independent entity or whether it would perform that service in-house. In other words, the OECD Guidelines are based on the principle of willingness to pay for an activity from an independent enterprise vis-a-vis performing it in-house. Simply stated, if the activity is not one for which the independent enterprise would have been willing to payor perform for itself, the activity ordinarily should not be regarded as a chargeable intra-group service under the arm’s-length principle.

The US regulations u/ s.482 of the Internal Revenue Code (US regulations) are also based on the same lines. Similarly, the position of the Australian Tax Office (ATO) with regard to head office activities is that services are chargeable only when the activity has conferred a benefit to an assessee. The ATO also takes the view that where a benefit is provided to an entity by way of a service and there is a real connection between the entity’s operations and the associate, the entity would be expected to pay for the services.

This test involving a willingness to payor existence of a benefit (benefit rule), as enunciated above is, by far, the most important factor that determines whether a related-party service recipient would pay for an intra-group service and, therefore, in turn, whether the service provider can justify a charge for the provision of the intra-group services. The objec-tive of the benefit rule is not only to determine the quantum of benefit, but also the relative proximity of the benefit derived to the intra-group services rendered. Therefore, one should determine how direct or remote the benefits derived are in relation to the activity performed under the guise of intra-group services. A direct or perceived benefit from the service rendered must be identified. Conse-quently, allocations are not to be made if the prob-able benefit to other members is so indirect or re-mote that unrelated parties would not have ‘charged for similar  services.

Further, such management fee charge is to be consistent and commensurate with the relevant benefits intended for the services, based on the facts known when the services were rendered, and not based on benefits realised later on. In other words, the use of hindsight is to be avoided.

Consequently at a practical level, with a view to determining whether intra-group services have been rendered, each service must be evaluated on the basis of whether it provides a group member with economic or commercial value that enhances its commercial position in the market where it operates.

This is also relevant because certain services are not chargeable at all. The OECD Guidelines identify certain services or activities that are deemed to be non-beneficial for the recipient. As a result, those activities cannot be regarded as chargeable intra-group services. The main categories of non-beneficial services identified in the OECD Guidelines are:

  • shareholder/custodial activities;
  • stewardship  / duplicative  services;
  • services that provide incidental benefits;
  • passive association benefits; and
  • on-call services.

The same are briefly  discussed hereunder:

3.1.1  Shareholder services/Custodial activities:

Shareholder activities are regarded as activities that a group member performs solely because of its ownership interest in one or more of the group members (in its capacity as a shareholder). Such an activity may be performed by one group member for related group members, even though those members do not need the activity and would not be willing to pay for it if it were performed by an independent enterprise. Consequently, under the OECD Guidelines, this type of shareholder activity would not justify a charge to the recipient company.

On reading of OECD Guidelines, the Canadian Regulations, and the US Regulations, an illustrative list of services/ costs that are regarded as share-holder activities are mentioned below :

  • costs of activities relating to the legal structure of the parent company and include expenses associated with the issuance of stock and maintenance of shareholder relations (e.g., costs of issuing shares, share transfer expenses, meetings of shareholders and costs of the supervisory board);

  • costs relating to the reporting and legal requirements of the parent company (e.g., consolidation of financial reports, maintenance of shareholder records, filings of prospectuses and income tax returns);

  • costs incurred by a parent company to raise funds for acquisition of a new company in its own rights;

  • costs of managerial and control (monitoring) activities related to the management and protection of the investment as such in participations;

  • costs of visits and reviewing subsidiary performance on a regular basis; and

  • costs of financing or refinancing the parent’s ownership participation in the subsidiary.

However, merely because an activity has been per-formed for the benefit of the owner does not, per se, mean that it is a shareholder activity for which an allocation is not warranted. This is because there may be activities performed for the interest of the owner, which conform to the shareholder activity definition provided in the OECD Guidelines, but which could nevertheless be regarded as chargeable based on surrounding facts and circumstances of the case. In such cases, the OECD Guidelines advise that whether the activities fall within the definition of shareholder activities as defined in the OECD Guidelines is to be determined based on whether under comparable facts and circumstances, the activity is one that an independent enterprise would have been willing to pay for or to perform for itself.

3.1.2  Duplicative Services:

Duplicative services or stewardship services are those that a group member offers to any other member, which can be considered duplicate in the sense that the service is already performed by the recipient or by a third, unrelated party on its behalf. In that case, no intra-group services should be considered to be rendered by the group member.

Such stewardship or duplicative expenses are illustrated in the US Regulations in the context of a financial analysis for a subsidiary’s borrowing needs. When the subsidiary does not have personnel qualified to make the analysis, and does not make the analysis, the cost of the financial analysis done by the parent is required to be allocated to the subsidiary. If, however, the subsidiary has qualified financial staff that makes the analysis, the review of the analysis by the parent’s financial staff is duplicative and an allocation of such costs is not to be made to the subsidiary in such cases.

However, at the same time, it is also recognised that there may be some exceptions, i.e., a temporary circumstance or an opportunity to eliminate critical business risk. The instances of elimination of critical business risk would come into play, for example, while taking a second legal opinion or performing an external audit to avoid a risky or wrong business decision. In other words, when a valid business reason exists, those duplicate services may be considered intra-group services eligible for a management fee payment.

3.1.3  Services that provide incidental benefits:

The OECD Guidelines highlight another set of services which do not warrant an allocation – namely, services that result in an ‘incidental benefit’. This refers to services performed by one group member, such as a shareholder or coordinating centre, for a particular group member or a set of group members, such that it also incidentally provides a benefit to other group members.

To illustrate, a situation of reorganisation decision or acquisition/ disinvestment deal being carried out by a parent or a sister company results in economies of scale or some other benefit for some other group member not directly involved in the process/deal. In this case, though there is a service element, the same cannot be charged for since it only provides indirect benefit.

3.1.4 Passive association benefit:

This is another category of activities that does not justify an allocation under the benefit test. A mere ‘status as a member of a controlled group’ in case of a taxpayer generally will not be considered as adequate to justify provision of a benefit to the tax-payer for which an arm’s-length charge or allocation will be required.. ,

For example, an enterprise deriving incidental benefits simply because of its affiliation with the parent or the group per se; like in the form of a higher credit rating cannot be said to be receiving a service and does not warrant a management fee payment. However, if the higher credit rating is due to a guarantee provided by a group member, then an intra-group service charge would be required”.

3.1.4  On-call services:

The OECD Guidelines refer to another category of services in the context of intra-group services, i.e., services provided ‘on-call”. The availability of those services generally requires the existence of a support group of some sort and an understanding between the group members about the nature of the assistance being provided in any field of operation whenever required and on an on-call basis. For example, a parent company or a group service centre may be on-hand (always ready/prepared) to provide assistance in matters of legal, finance, technicalor tax issues at any time.

The aspect that merits consideration here is whether the ‘availability’ of that service in itself is considered as a separate service (for chargeability) over and above the service fee compensation for the actual service rendered. The justification provided in the OECD Guidelines for considering such availability as a separate service rendered is that it is common knowledge that independent enterprises incur so-called ‘stand-by charges’ to ensure availability of those services when the need for them arises. An example of that service is the appointment of any legal, technical or financial service provider on a ‘retainer basis’.

These services are not necessarily a regular requirement and may vary in terms of frequency and importance from year to year. Therefore, one must ascertain the potential need of the stand-by service option for the recipient of the service. In cases in which the service requirement is remote or could be easily procured from other sources without an ‘on-call’ service option, the availability of that option is redundant and, hence, unjustified. Therefore, to evaluate whether an ‘on-call’ service is rendered, one must consider the benefit that the’ on-call’ arrangement offers to the group over a period of several years (given the sporadic nature of the occurrence of those service needs), rather than only for the year of taxation under consideration).

In sum, it would be necessary to justify intra-group services from the point of view of an independent enterprise and whether that enterprise would be willing to pay for the service in question or perform the same service in-house.

Also, special attention and close scrutiny should be paid to certain non-chargeable categories of services such as the shareholder activities, duplicative services, services providing incidental benefits, passive association benefits and on-call services as the OECD Guidelines (and perhaps even the laws of the overseas countries of the subsidiaries of Indian MNE) regard above-referred services as non-beneficial activities for the recipient entity, for which a charge is not justified.

Having discussed the nature of services for which the charge is required, the second aspect that is equally important is how to determine an arm’s-length consideration for such services (in accordance with the benefit received). This aspect would be discussed in detail in the second part of this article.

4.0 Documentation to justify that the services are rendered and benefits accrue to the service recipient:

The documentation process for intra-group services is vitally important to establish before the tax authorities the legitimacy of any intra-group service charges, including management fees. Even though the Indian regulation has prescribed detailed transfer pricing documentation requirements in general, no specific guidance has been given in the context of intra-group services. However, it would not be correct to assume that a taxpayer does not have to prepare the necessary documentation to substantiate any and all intra-group charges within an MNE. Further, it is pertinent to note that under the Indian regulations, the primary onus to prove that the international transactions are at arm’s length is on the taxpayer and the tax authorities have powers to make appropriate adjustments where such onus is not adequately discharged by the taxpayer.

Also, mere existence of services agreement or invoice would not be sufficient to justify the arm’s-length nature of management fee charge. Neither do the service agreement nor the invoice demonstrate that the services are actually rendered and the recipient has benefited from such services.

The most important and crucial aspect is the documentation of the fact that intra-group services were rendered by the service provider and the benefits were received by the service recipient. Thus, apart from documenting the aspects such as description of the business operations of the group and the tax-payer, detailed analysis of functions performed, assets employed and risk assumed, etc. which are mentioned in S. 92D read with Rule LOf), one must demonstrate that the service recipient benefited from the provision of the intra-group service and the same must be proved beyond reasonable doubt”.

The following documents would be useful in demonstrating that the services were actually rendered and benefits were received by the taxpayer:

  • A written, binding service contract between the companies which shall include details of the group companies providing and receiving management services; detailed nature and extent of services to be provided; basis for determining the fees to be charged; etc. The description of the services in the service contract assumes significance. If the description of the services to be provided appears incomplete, unclear and dis-jointed in the contract or if the description is entirely missing, the tax authorities could dispute the arm’s-length nature of services.

  • A detailed narrative of the services actually rendered during the year under consideration along with documents such as copies of time sheets or cost centre reports, etc. to demonstrate the services rendered. Other documentation could also include letters, manuals, instructions, proof of visits, written advice, periodic activity reports and any other documents or data which tend to confirm that the services were rendered for the benefit of the recipient and are justifiable on an ‘arm’s-length’ basis.

  • A detailed narrative of benefits received; examples to illustrate those benefits; supporting documentation, to establish the existence of a benefit like correspondence, memoranda, manual, directives, etc., indicating a benefit to the recipient of the intra-group service; job descriptions of staff at the service provider and the recipient to identify services and to prove that there is no duplication of services, etc.

In fact, the Indian tax authorities are insisting on some of the above documents during the course of transfer pricing assessment in order to satisfy themselves of the arm’s-length nature of management fee charges. In cases where the taxpayer fails to furnish the requisite documentation, the tax authorities have been disallowing the entire management fee charge by treating the arm’s length value of the said management fee paid as Nil. In contrast, the US and Canadian IRS have adopted an increasingly proactive and more sophisticated approach towards examining transfer pricing policies in respect of intra-group support services.

Concluding remarks:

In the realm of transfer pricing, intra-group service transactions present as many challenges as opportunities to the multinational taxpayer. Needless to say, the management fee policy should be designed with the above background in mind such that it does not result in either overcharging or under-charging of management fees and also considering other tax and regulatory aspects. Any under or overcharging could result in adverse tax implications for the group as a whole. Further, as transfer of services is less obvious than transfer of goods, documentation of service transfer has to be robust. One of the major aspects that enable tax authorities to challenge the management fee charge is the lack of a comprehensive and thorough identification, evaluation, and documentation process that can effectively present the best possible arguments to justify any charges for intra-group services. In the context of an aggressive audit and litigation environment like the one that currently prevails in India, the best defense for a multinational with intra-group service transactions is a thorough evaluation process, with the help of transfer pricing experts that results in adequate documentation to present the most persuasive case to tax authorities.

In the next part of this article, we shall discuss how to determine and justify an arm’s-length consideration for such intra-group services.

World Financial crisis : Major reasons and way forward

Article

1. Introduction :


1.1 The entire world, particularly the developed countries,
are submerged into unprecedented financial crisis caused by the subprime
mortgage lending in the US. It is the worst turmoil after the great depression
of 1930s. Because of this crisis, a number of financial institutions in the
world are in deep trouble. Within a short span of a few days, large investment
banks and other financial institutions (e.g., Lehman Brothers, Washington
Mutual) have gone bankrupt or got acquired (e.g., Merrill Lynch, Wachovia
Bank). It is an irony of fate that investment banks were created out of the
great depression of 1930s and now the major investment banks (e.g.,
Morgan Stanley and Goldman Sachs) in the US are reconverted into normal banks
because of the present financial turmoil.

1.2 This article briefly analyses, in simple language, the
main causes of this crisis, its possible impact on India and the way forward.

1.3 The major causes of the financial turmoil can be
attributed to the following factors :

(a) Faulty Business Model : Subprime Lending,

(b) Financial Derivative Instruments, such as
Mortgage-backed Securities (MBS), Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDO) and
Credit Default Swaps (CDS),

(c) Credit Rating System and Agencies,

(d) Fault of Borrowers,

(e) Oversupply of Housing Inventory Fuelled by Speculation,

(f) Poor Corporate Governance : Lack of Promoters,

(g) Inadequate Risk Management Systems,

(h) Inadequate Regulatory Oversight,

(i) Accounting Standards,

(j) Automation of Credit Approval Process, and

(k) Cascading Effect


Let us briefly discuss each of these factors.

2. Faulty Business Model : Subprime Lending :


The primary cause of the present financial crisis is the
Faulty Business Model of the US lenders in the housing and other markets. To
grow their business, many lenders started lending to subprime borrowers,
i.e.,
borrowers who were not credit- worthy or were less creditworthy. In
2007, the size of the subprime mortgages was approximately US $ 1.3 trillion.
Such a large-scale subprime lending was possible because of easy availability of
money at an affordable rate which led to excessive leveraging (i.e.,
borrowings) by the mortgage lenders. Even though the borrowers did not have
adequate income or adequate borrowing capacity, money was lent to them for
purchase of homes in the hope that they will be able to meet their financial
commitments out of the appreciation in the real estate prices. The expectation
was that in future the real estate prices would increase significantly, and then
the borrower would be able to refinance his loan at a lesser interest rate. As
long as the real estate prices were rising, this model worked. In 9 years up to
2006, the real estate prices increased by 124%. This model started showing its
weaknesses as the housing prices started declining. From the last quarter of
2006 onwards, a large number of subprime mortgage lenders in the US started
failing.

The ironic situation is that to overcome the recession of
1990s in the US, ample liquidity at a lower rate was injected in the system.
This made subprime lending business very attractive. This led to the housing
boom and eventual housing price bubble. Now, the subprime failure has caused
unprecedented financial tsunami including big liquidity crisis. To solve this
problem, most of the Central Banks are injecting large amount of liquidity in
the system. If the bail-out packages are not carefully administered, it may lead
to further problems.

The fundamental problem is the price bubble in the real
estate market and the valuation bubble in the mortgage financing market. Once
the price bubble burst, the valuation bubble also burst.

3. Financial Derivative Instruments :


Once the original subprime mortgage lenders ran out of funds
for lending (even after excessive leveraging), the investment bankers and others
started creating financial derivative instruments, such as Mortgage-Backed
Securities (MBS) and Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDO). Further, these
instruments were made attractive by providing insurance through Credit Default
Swaps (CDS) instrument. These instruments were sold to various investors. Thus,
the original lenders got a seemingly unending supply of money for the purpose of
subprime lending. Through the creation of financial instruments in the home
mortgage market, the participants in the US home mortgage market were not only
home mortgage lenders but also investors who invested in the financial
instruments based on the underlying home mortgages. These investors are spread
all over the world and consist of banks, financial institutions, mutual funds,
corporates and HNIs. The private wealth management advisors and mortgage brokers
recommended this new asset class for investment purposes. This had a duel
effect : on the one hand, it supplied unusually large amount of money for
subprime lending and on the other hand, the risks associated with it were widely
distributed across the globe. Therefore, the adverse impact also is felt
instantly across the globe. If these financial derivative instruments were not
created, the amount of subprime lending and the consequential losses would have
been substantially lower.

4. Credit Rating System & Agencies :


The financial derivative instruments gained popularity,
because various credit rating agencies assigned investment-grade ratings to
these financial derivative instruments, on the ground that they are backed by
the underlying housing mortgages. They did not consider the housing price bubble
which was being built over a period of about nine years.

5. Fault of Borrowers :


Even though the subprimc borrowers had no known resources for paying the interest and repaying the housing loans, they borrowed recklessly, partly to capture the boom in the real estate market. Secondly, since they were high-risk borrowers, the interest rate for them was higher. To make it affordable, most of them opted for Adjustable-Rate Mortgages (or ARMs) with an initial lower rate of interest which was adjusted every two years. The borrowers borrowed money on ARMs in the hope that they would be able to refinance the loans at a lower rate of interest in future with the increase in the property prices. Since this did not happen, they were stuck with high interest-bearing loans. As the borrowers started defaulting on repayment of the subprime mortgages, foreclo-sures started. As the subprime lenders were not able to recover their money, a large number of subprime mortgage lenders went bankrupt.

6.    Oversupply of Housing Inventory Fuelled by Speculation:

Because of the nine-year long boom in the real estate market in the US, the builders started building real estate in the expectation that the boom would continue. To a great extent, the demand was pushed by investors and speculators who invested in the real estate in the hope that they will be able to make money by reselling them. The over supply reduced the home prices which further aggravated the problem.

7.    Poor Corporate Governance: Lack of Promoters & Conflict of Interest:

In the US, most of the financial institutions have no promoters. The salaries and bonuses of the senior management executives depend upon the performance of their companies. To get higher compensation from their companies, they need to show better current performance, without regard to the impact in the future. Thus, there is a conflict of interest situation in these institutions. How else can one explain that the CEO of now bank-rupt Lehman Brothers got bonus of US $ 22 million in March 2008 based on the performance of 2007 and after just a few months Lehman went bankrupt? Further, to acquire more funds for lending, the mortgage lenders required higher ratings for their financial derivative instruments. Rating agencies obliged because they would earn more fees. Relying upon the ratings given by the rating agencies, investors invested huge amount of money in the financial derivative instruments. Thus, one can say that there was a well-orchestred conspiracy for each party’s personal gain. This clearly shows that there was a poor corporate governance in these financial institutions.

In India, most of the companies have promoters with significant stake and therefore, they would not allow this type of conflict of interest situation to arise.

8.    Inadequate Risk Management Systems:

Several knowledgeable persons have asked: “How did such a financial tsunami arise despite the existence of the so-called sophisticated risk management systems in the US 7”. Firstly, the risk management systems are built around the business model. If the business model is faulty, no risk management system would help. Secondly, the risk management systems concentrated more on processes than on the business risks. Otherwise, the business risks would have been highlighted. Thirdly, conflict of interest also contributed to the inadequacy of the risk management systems.

9.    Inadequate Regulatory  Oversight:

Several mind-boggling questions arise in respect of the failure on the part of various regulatory agencies in the US in preventing or manaqinq the crisis. Various regulatory agencies, such as the Federal Reserve Bank, the Securities & Exchange Commission, Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, etc., could not identify the crisis even after several bank-ruptcies took place among the housing mortgage lenders. Though the housing meltdown started from the last quarter of 2006, and a number of home mortgage lenders started facing crisis, the response of the government and the regulatory agencies was not only reactive but also delayed.

10.    Accounting Standards:

The accounting standards, particularly the mark-to-market requirement initially accounted for ‘unrealised profits’ resulting in rosy picture being presented of the financial health of the subprime lenders. Subsequently, as the borrowers started defaulting, the mark-to-market requirement had double adverse impact, because the provisioning or write-offs required increased significantly. Only a few months prior to the failure of several large finance companies in the US, their accounts were certified, both by their management and auditors, to represent a true and fair view of the state of their financial health! Does this situation not raise an eyebrow?

11.    Automation of Credit Approval Process:

The entire credit approval process for lending to the subprime borrowers was made objective and therefore, it was automated. For example, a few BPO companies located in India were authorised to approve subprime mortgage loans to US borrowers. It is obvious that subjective judgment was almost absent. Similarly, approval for the financial derivative instruments was also automated to a great extent, resulting in sky-rocketing of subprime lending.

12.    Macro Balance  Sheet:

To gain better understanding of the overall scenario of the financial crisis, let us assume that following is the consolidated balance sheet of all the players in the home mortgage financing market:

Let us say that the value of the mortgage houses has dropped by US $ 2 trillion. The houses have not disappeared; just their values have dropped. This loss is divided over the three categories of the providers of finance. The major loss will be borne by the holders of the financial instruments because its size is large. Since those investors are very large in number and spread across the globe, the financial turmoil in the US market has an adverse impact across the globe and is spread very widely among thousands of investors. The problem is compounded, because many investors in the financial derivative instruments have leveraged their investments. Further, even investors who have not leveraged are affected because of the substantial value erosion. Moreover, shareholders of finance companies and of companies holding the financial instruments have suffered because of the steep fall in the values of shares of those companies (e.g., the market caps of Freddie Mac, Fannie Mae, AIG, and Wachovia have fallen by more than 90%).

13.    Cascading  effect:

The liquidity crisis in the financial market has affected even companies which had no direct or indirect role in the mortgage financing market, because they are not able to easily get finance required for their businesses. In turn, their employees, suppliers and shareholders are affected. This reduces the purchasing power of the people all around because they are affected directly or indirectly. This, in turn, has an adverse impact on businesses because sales decline.

Even prime borrowers  may become subprime borrrowers or may default on their loan obligations if they lose their jobs or wealth because of the adverse economic scenario. It has also engulfed good mortgage-backed securities and therefore, the entire mortgage-backed securitised market has collapsed.

Thus, there is a multiplier negative cascading effect on the economy.

14.    Impact on Indian Economy:

Because of several unknown factors and unpredictable events which may happen abroad, it is very difficult to predict accurately what would happen in India. But the most-likely scenario is that in the short run, the Indian economy will be impacted to some extent, because of the withdrawal of investments by FIIs in the stock market, liquidity crunch, demand recession abroad, fear psychosis, etc. Some of the major adverse impacts would be difficulty”in raising funds through IPOs, FDls and borrowings; value erosion; slackness in the real estate market; fall in real estate prices; slowdown in industrial production, etc. The Indian financial systems are sound, the fundamentals of the Indian economy are strong and India has a large domestic market, and therefore, in the mid term and long term, India should not be materially affected by this turmoil. In fact, it can benefit from it, because after things settled down, more inflow of foreign funds will come to India as there are better opportunities for investments in India. However, the pre-requisite for this is that the RBI, SEBI, the Finance Ministry and the Government in general, should take appropriate measures to ensure adequate liquidity at an affordable rate and to sustain confidence among businesses and investors. Impact on the individual companies would depend upon the sector in which they are and their strategies. In the short run, cash-flow management and assets protection are more important than profitability and growth.

15.    Way forward : Expected major changes:

As a result of the financial crisis and the subsequent steps taken to tackle the same, the following major changes are likely to take place in the world:

  • The Emerging-7 Economies are likely to replace Highly Developed Economies (the Existing G-7) sooner than the year 2050, as was expected earlier. It was expected that by 2020, India will be the 4th largest economy in the world and by 2050 it would be the 2nd largest economic superpower in the world. Now, it seems that this will happen much sooner.

  • The financing business models, the structured financial products, the risk management systems and the regulatory mechanism in the financial market world over will undergo significant changes.

  • The accounting standards will also need to be revised significantly so as not to contribute to such crisis and be able to detect the same earlier.

  • Chartered accountants both as CFOs and as auditors will have to sharpen their skills to be able to detect signals of trouble earlier.

Simplicity and complexity

Article

“How much money you need to make a charity of Rs.100 ?” This
is the question asked of a group of people. The answer may vary depending upon
the nature of the group. For example, a group of people aspiring for admission
to a management course may ask a counter question : How much is the financial
requirement of the donor to meet his normal needs ? Will he be left, after he
had made the charity, with sufficient funds to meet his requirements ? A group
of financial experts, or aspiring experts, will ask about the time when the
charity is to be made, for a charity of Rs.100 to be made now has a different
time value of money from a charity to be made a year hence. They will think that
if the charity is to be made a year hence, then the donor needs roughly Rs.91
today if the rate of discount is 10%.


Do you find anything strange in these answers ? Yes, what you
find strange is that no group is able to see the question straight. Each
believes it is a complex question, and each, while trying to answer it, adds its
own bit of complexity to the question. The management group wants to look at the
question from the management angle, and the financial experts bring in the time
value of money. Nobody seems to think that to make a charity of Rs.100 all that
you need is Rs.100. The question does not require hypothesizing anything.

Why can’t we think straight ? Because we have lost simplicity
in our thinking. We have started believing that anything that is simple is too
true to be accepted, and anything that is good has to be complex, or anything
that is complex has to be good. We equate complexity with beauty and simplism
with being simpleton.

Let us look around and see how much complexity we are
surrounded with. You see an advertisement on TV in which a monkey snatches an
undergarment from a clothesline and makes a peculiar noise. He wears it, jumps
and finally leaves the garment hanging on the tree. I have often tried to figure
out what is the advertisement all about. Does it promote sale of garments or is
it an advertisement made by an animal protection group ? It is too complex. May
be the creator of the advertisement thinks that anything that is complex is
beautiful. Let us take one more example. Newspapers recently reported a
statement made by a legal expert in the context of a crime where the convicts
were handed over death punishment, which read, “The act was diabolic of the
superlative degree in conception and cruel in execution and does not fall within
any comprehension of the basic humanness which indicates the mindset which
cannot be said to be amenable for any reformation.” It was too complex. All that
the statement meant was that a heinous crime was committed and the culprits were
beyond the scope of reformation. People usually go gaga over complex things and
associate complexity with intelligence, whereas, the fact of the matter is that
more often than not complexity reflects ignorance and lack of grip of the person
over the subject. What is really difficult is to make things simple. Only one
who is truly well versed in a subject can present the subject in a manner that
is simple and intelligible to a layman.

In all these complex cases you are as perplexed as others.
Others do not speak up. You too fear that if you admitted that you did not
understand, you would be regarded as a moron. You keep mum.


Jack Trout, a management consultant, has written a book
titled ‘The Power of Simplicity’
1.
He advocates simplicity in every field by showing how simple things succeed in
life and how much more effective they can be. While giving a few more examples
of so-called experts who make things complex, he says that when an expert on
environment may say that he is doing environmental scanning what he really may
be meaning is that he is looking out of the window.


Why can’t we be simple ? There are psychological reasons.
Basically it is our fear that keeps us from admitting what we believe. Jack
Trout lists the following fears :

1. Fear of failure

2. Fear of self defence

3. Fear of trusting others

4. Fear of thinking

5. Fear of speaking

6. Fear of being alone


According to Jack Trout complexity can be attributed to the
fear of thinking. He believes that we fear thinking and therefore look to others
for solutions. Thus, we end up accepting solutions offered by others and that
too only if the solutions are complex.

Why are we discussing the topic of simplicity and
complexity ? Because it concerns us finally as chartered accountants. Let us
take a few more examples of complexity around us in our own profession. The
first one that comes to my mind is the provisions of S. 80HHC of the Income-tax
Act, 1961 (the I.T. Act). The provisions, as they were, were already complex and
as though this complexity were not enough, we, the taxpayer and, I must state
with due respect, the judiciary, made them more complex. Then there are the
provisions relating to Fringe Benefit Tax. Here also, as though the Government
thought that the provisions were not complex enough that the CBDT issued the
Circular which hardly anybody can claim to have fully understood. Then there are
a number of accounting standards (AS) full of complexities. AS-15 relating to
Employees’ Cost, AS-30 relating to Financial Investments and AS-31 relating to
Financial Instruments, to name a few, are some such complex standards.
Professionals in private admit that few of them have been able to fully grasp
these standards. This is not to suggest that there are no chartered accountants
who have not grasped the standards; there are. But these chartered accountants
have used their valuable energy on something that is not as valuable, at least
to the society, as it ostensibly appears.

Another reason why we have developed complex-ity around us is that we harbour a false notion that if we are complex in our expression we look more professional. However, we have paid a heavy price by being or trying to appear professional.

If we do not wake up in time, we may observe most complex rules, regulations and ASs in breach and will secretly hold them in contempt. Once we hold ASs in contempt and ostensibly present accounts hardly intelligible to the public, we will be removed from the public also, and may eventually lose their esteem. We perhaps created complexity to tell the world that our job is difficult, and thereby, to earn esteem. But that very thing which was devised to earn us esteem will destroy the little esteem the public holds us in. I am reminded of a dialogue between two doctors in Bernard Shaw’s play “Doctor’s Dilemma”, which though is uttered in the context of the doctor’s profession may as well apply to us. The dialogue runs like this:

Ridgeon: “We’re not a profession: we’re a conspiracy.”

Sir Patrick: “All professions are conspiracies against the laity.”

I recommend all to read Jack Trout’s book – “The Power of Simplicity” and to contribute to make life simpler and better.

Corporate Governance — What is wrong with it

Article

Change, business leaders are fond of exhorting their
employees, is a constant. Within business organisations, owners and CEO’s are
fond of continuously changing the structure of the organisation, its reporting
responsibilities, its compensation practices and its business strategy. However,
when it comes to their own existence, all three participants in the world of
corporate governance (shareholders, directors and senior management) have
withstood any change. They ensure that the relationships between each of them
and the basic structure of those relationships have remained unchanged since the
first corporation came into existence. During this period of fossilisation, they
have been ably supported by business academicians in remaining in that state.


The first modern corporation established 500 years ago was
the East India Company. No Companies Act existed in those days and any corporate
entity could come into existence only by obtaining a Charter from the King.
Charles II issued a Charter imbuing life into the East India Company. This
company became the first juridicial person, ever. The Charter contained those
provisions that today one finds in a memorandum and articles of association and
in the Companies Act. It required that the shareholders of the company annually
hold a general meeting. The general meeting would elect the Board of Governors
(Directors) and also the head of that Board (Chairman and CEO). The Governor and
the Board of Governors were responsible for overseeing the management of the
company’s business. Each shareholder had a voting right proportionate to his
share-holding. Detailed bylaws would be prepared and those would have to be
approved in a general meeting. In the century that followed the setting up of
the East Indian Company similar Charters were proclaimed for companies that
traded with Russia, the Levant and Canada (Hudson Bay Co.). The last named still
exists and is the oldest extant corporation in the world. The Dutch also set up
corporations. As the readers will observe, the fundamental principles of
Corporate Governance laid down 500 years ago remain unchanged today. These are
that shareholders ‘own’ a company, managements manage the business on their
behalf and directors provide management oversight as agents of the
share-holders.

The basis for this form of democracy in corporations goes
back to far earlier times. After all, democracy is a word associated more with
the governance of nations than with the governance of companies. The oldest
known form of democracy was the Greek city states. However, that form of
democracy died with the decline of those city states and for over a thousand
years after that the world had no form of democracy. Democracy returned (to
Britain) in the 11th century A.D. The Anglo-Saxons and the Normans had grand
councils that advised the ruler. However, this was not of lasting nature and it
was only after the signing of the Magna Carta by King John that kings in the
U.K. were deprived of divine and absolute rights over their subjects. The Magna
Carta resulted in the establishment of the first Parliament in 1265. In the next
500 years this evolved but in essence Parliament represented the landed class.
While there were seats reserved for the clergy, essentially, the members of
Parliament were those who gave taxes and soldiers to the King. These happened to
be landlords because in those years land revenue was the only source of taxation
and land owners had powers over their serfs; they used these powers to send
serfs to the king’s army when he had to fight his wars.

The grant of the right to participate in democracy depended
upon whether an individual contributed to the State. Those who made no
contribution had no say in Parliament. Vast sections of the population were
deprived, whereas the landed classes became very powerful. The 18th century saw
a change in this thinking. French thinkers such as Voltaire influenced the
public thinking that eventually led to a revolution and the end of monarchy in
France. However, the Parliament that was established after the French Revolution
still did not provide for universal adult franchise. The true founders of a
democracy based on adult franchise were the founding fathers of the United
States of America. They propounded, for the first time, the concept that every
human being who is affected by the behaviour of a State should have a say in the
election of its Parliament. There was considerable debate upon how it would be
possible to provide for voting by millions of Americans spread right across the
country, many of whom had no concept of democratic participation. However, the
founding fathers persevered. Eventually, this belief spread across the world and
all countries today equate democracy with universal adult franchise. It would be
preposterous to even suggest that a person’s right to vote should depend upon
whether he paid taxes to the State or contributed to it in some other fashion.
Every person who is affected by the conduct of the Government is considered to
have the right to vote in the elections for its Legislature.

When the scheme of corporate governance for the East India
Company was conceived of, public thinking was limited by the democratic model
then prevailing in the British Parliament. Only three participants were
identified — management, directors and shareholders. In those times, there was
no scarcity of land or of labour; of the three economic factors, only capital
was in short supply. Consequently, the providers of capital, the shareholders,
were granted the right to elect the Board of Directors and approve their
corporation’s regulations. The contributions made by other factors of production
were wholly ignored. At that time, wealth was tangible. It consisted of
classical assets such as land, precious stones and metals. All tangible assets
were tradable for money and their ownership could change hands freely.
Consequently, he who had money would acquire wealth. Without money, the
acquisition of wealth was not possible. Indeed, capital was the only factor of
production that had mobility. Today, wealth lies not in tangible assets but in
intangibles such as ideas, technology, new ways of doing business, intellectual
property and other such intangibles. These are created not through vast outlays
of money, but through having outstanding individuals in an enabling environment.
In many companies now, tangible assets are amongst the smallest items in their
value.

Since the setting  up of the  East India Company through the Industrial Revolution and until the mid-20th century, business was mainly concerned with the rudimentary conversion of natural resources to meet basic human needs. Today, business comprises of the sophisticated networking of large numbers of stakeholders.

However, the world of governance is yet to comprehend these changes. The guru of American-style governance, Milton Friedman, has pro-pounded the capitalist view that management and directors should never be motivated by any consideration other than profit maximisation. Relationships with vendors, customers and employee are only transactional, governed by contracts. Those with the government and the public are legal, governed by the laws. Friedman believed that conscience should not motivate companies – only maximising shareholder value within the confines of laws should.

It is such thinking that has resulted in the nasty outcomes less than ten years ago in major U.S. companies (the Enron years) followed shortly after by the collapse of Wall Street. These events have shaken confidence in a model driven by Friedmanian greed. Worse, global companies have changed public behaviour – greed has engendered hedonism. And hedonism (combined with unchecked population growth in India) is the cause of climate change.

Not only has the old form of governance resulted in losses of trillions of dollars, it has created a threat to the very existence of the natural world. It is time this changed.

If the concept underlying democracy in a public sphere can also be applied to corporate democracy, it will require that anybody who is affected by the conduct of a corporation should have a say in electing its governors. In other words, all stakeholders in business should influence its governance, not only its shareholders and management. This would require a fundamental shift in thinking. The nature of reporting by directors and management (stewards), the holding of meetings, the provisions of memoranda and articles of association, the nature of resolutions requiring stakeholder approval and many other governance issues would need to be changed. So too, would be the change in the nature of the audit of stewardship reporting. Indeed, finance would be only one of the disciplines required of auditors. The first rudiments of such change are already visible in the Global Reporting Initiative. GRI reports bring out information classified by different stakeholders, but they are still attuned towards segmenting the information stakeholder-wise for use by shareholders. If stakeholders are to have a say in governance, such reporting would not be different.

It is unlikely that such a tectonic change will occur in the near future. It needs to overcome powerful vested interests including the entire world of the capital markets. But, until that happens, many of the major aberrations of corporate behaviour are unlikely to be controlled.

The way ahead for corporate governance in India

Article

Corporate governance includes providing assurance to
stakeholders within and outside the organisation that their interests are
protected by management on a sustainable basis. This noble objective makes the
Boards of listed companies responsible to absorb more mature governance
practices. Therefore, the market value of a corporate entity is a collective
perception of the stakeholders about its governance practices.


At present it appears that each day headlines announce
another bank failure in the United States arising from the sub-prime/cash crunch
fallout. It is inevitable that organisations across the world will be
significantly impacted by the resulting financial slowdown. Based on the media
reports, banks globally have taken sub-prime/cash crunch-related write-downs to
date totalling $ 500 billion including $ 250 billion from investments made in
Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDOs) in respect of Residential Mortgage-Based
Securities (RMBS) which have since ‘gone bad’. When these initial shocks subside
and legal actions are taken against the parties involved in the CDOs to recover
losses, no doubt questions will be raised about the code of corporate governance
in these organisations (arranging banks, portfolio managers, issuers,
professional advisers and rating agencies) — whether senior managements were
greedy and whether independent directors and advisers had abetted this greed. It
is unclear at this time to what extent our Indian banks will be shielded from or
exposed to the events unfolding in the United States, Europe and elsewhere.

Governance in family-owned companies :

Numerous listed companies in India continue to be family
owned or controlled. Most need better governance structures to thrive in an era
of globalisation. A key objective of successful corporate governance in these
organisations is to protect the interests of minority stakeholders, since
decisions are generally in the interests of preserving and growing family wealth
without necessarily benefiting minority stakeholders. In several mature
economies, stock markets are sceptical about family-owned businesses. When
family members are not bickering, it is thought they are looking after their own
interests rather than those of the business.

With deregulation in India and the increased number of
multinational corporations lining up to enter our country, many family-owned
businesses find that they are unable to match the multinationals in size,
strategy, leading-edge management techniques and spending power. Large
family-owned businesses in India should shift to strategies that will enable
them to compete more successfully and prosper in a changing environment. To
pursue any meaningful strategy, they need stronger governance models to prevent
the family bickering from damaging the business, help them attract and retain
professional management talent, and provide for a smooth succession plan to the
next generation.

Indian laws and regulations are complex, subjective and
confusing. They provide opportunities for family-owned businesses to feather
their nests. The ownership structures and shareholding patterns are left for the
families to decide, and minority shareholders do not have enough say in those
matters.

An advantage of family-owned businesses is their quick
decision-making capability, since most decisions are driven by the family’s
vision. However, it can be a disadvantage when adapting to the changing business
environment, since the majority of family-owned businesses have rigid and
inflexible goals. Another feature is that the performance of a family-owned
business generally reflects the consistency of the family’s thought process
where any conflicts could have a direct impact on its functioning.

Succession planning is poorly done in many Indian
family-owned organisations, since this may have extreme consequences like
fracturing the group into smaller pieces, changes in strategies or vision, and
consequent changes in policies which may adversely affect other stakeholders.
Family-owned businesses tend to have informal governance structures aimed
primarily at complying with laws and to make it possible for the business to
deal with the family’s concerns. As a result, many such businesses cling to the
family’s traditions, especially those that carry on its name and secure its
position in the community.

Most Indian family-owned businesses have long-term strategies
and are diversified in various industries, a throwback to the licensing days of
the ‘raj’. This approach usually means better sustenance and continuing benefits
for the minority stakeholders. The risk of losing family wealth also prevents
these companies from taking excessive risk and decisions are taken after lengthy
deliberations, albeit within the family’s key decision-makers.

The way ahead :

The Asian financial crisis in the late 1990s compelled many
countries, including India, to improve corporate governance. India now requires
listed companies to have independent directors and audit committees. Securities
laws and listing requirements of stock exchanges have been toughened, regulatory
authorities have more powers, and the media are more probing. Yet progress with
corporate governance is patchy. There are still a large number of listed
companies that appear to be unconvinced of the value of good governance. Laws
and regulations are not enforced rigorously and trained accountants and
management professionals are in short supply. Boardroom practices will not
change overnight, so regulators need to be patient.

Corporate governance laws and regulations are important because they set the platform for change. However, given the vast differences in ownership structures, business practices and enforcement capabilities, merely copying corporate governance codes from the U.S. or Western Europe Is a mistake. Nevertheless, the temptation to do so, prompted by foreign institutional investors, private equity firms and foreign-aid donors, is high. For example, the requirement under clause 49 to have the majority of directors as truly independent is unrealistic given the acute shortage of independent directors in India. In addition, non-compete and confidentiality clauses in contracts are difficult to implement, so companies are hesitant to give independent directors too much insight into their performance and strategy for fear that this information may be used against them. It is therefore better to enforce basic governance rules vigorously in India than to promote requirements that breed a ‘check-the-box’ attitude or go unheeded.

Government regulations, clause 49 and alignment of the legal framework in India with global regulations provide a greater degree of control over the governing boards of family-owned companies, making them more accountable and attentive to market demands. Disclosure requirements and auditing practices are also improving, as India moves closer to harmonising its accounting standards with IFRS. Quarterly reporting is now mandatory for listed companies, although it is dubious whether this truly improves corporate governance if the underlying numbers are unreliable.

Although India has strengthened her accounting standards and adopted minimum corporate governance rules via clause 49, she lags behind in enforcement. This is because business and politics are generally still intermingled, and the mechanisms for conflict of interest resolution are underdeveloped. Further, the government’s need to promote short term economic growth makes them reluctant to pester large businesses to protect minority shareholders.

One would expect investors and creditors to pressure Indian companies to comply in letter and in spirit with clause 49 rules. In practice, however, most of India’s domestic and foreign investors are reluctant to challenge management and would rather sell their shareholdings without making a fuss. It would be good for investors to be more vocal in support of corporate governance reform and more willing to question management. Many independent directors too are naive about their fiduciary duties and view their directorships as offices without real responsibility. They therefore need to be educated. Bodies like KPMG’s Audit Committee Institute are dedicated to providing independent directors with a forum to exchange information and knowledge with other independent directors, and support to enhance audit committee practices and processes.

To be fair, there are some Indian listed companies that have embraced corporate governance reforms. Infosys Technologies Limited, for example, discloses the extent of compliance with multiple corporate governance codes, reconciles its financial statements with various accounting standards (including U.S. GAAP), and its board has a majority of independent directors as well as independent audit, nominations and remuneration committees.

More common however are Indian companies with basic governance structures, such as boards with a few truly independent directors, but fall behind in actual board governance. Many boards follow the letter rather than the spirit of clause 49. To move to the next level, they should behave differently by asking management challenging questions, setting corporate strategy, monitoring risk management, contributing to CEO succession plans, and seeing that management meets their performance goals. Many Indian corporate titans publicly speak of the benefits of better corporate governance. But they also know that in the short term many practical barriers and hindrances block necessary changes. New forms of boardroom behaviour will take more time to become entrenched.

Sustainability  :

Progressive organisations need to demonstrate that they are aware and concerned about their socio-economic responsibilities in addition to their profit orientation. Organisations also need to contribute to improve the environment. The emergence of this thinking stems from sustainability being a global concern and organisations that contribute to sustainability of environmental and human resources are seen as responsible corporate citizens. So sustainability is an important element of corporate governance for any listed entity’s growth.

Factors contributing to the emergence of sustainability as an important corporate governance element:

  • The focus on the environment is due to increasing global concern on carbon emissions, resource diminution, global warming and other environmental threats. Society believes that corporate entities should take responsibility for conserving the environment and its resources by maintaining a healthy balance between increasing profits and saving our planet.
  • ‘Value’ today is perceived more in terms of the intangible assets of an organisation. An organisation aiming at continuous growth needs to build intangible assets like reputation, goodwill, a corporate image that depicts socio-environmental awareness, brand value and human capital. Thus market value is a function of an organisation’s ability to sustain its intangible assets in complex and competitive market conditions. Boards should monitor the sustainability of intangible assets in addition to other governance aspects.

  • Stakeholders now determine market sensitivity by assessing those who continuously supervise the entity’s corporate culture. The definition of ‘stakeholders’ broadly includes consumers, suppliers, government agencies, compliance boards and investors, who collectively and continuously assess an organisation’s ability to deliver value to its stakeholders. Thus sustainability is a strategic issue that requires the board’s attention.
  • Governing bodies and regulators have begun to monitor organisations’ contributions to society and the environment in addition to their economic contributions. Businesses planning to tap the global capital markets need to adopt global governance practices which marry an entity’s contribution to sustainability of our planet and people with its ability to generate profits in the long run.

Emergence of  the ‘triple bottomline’:

The ‘triple bottomline’ concept was introduced by Shell. The term describes the three essentials to assess an entity’s performance in the 21st century – People, Planet and Profits. An organisation’s contribution to society with regard to these three essentials is a gauge of its sustainability in the long term. A balanced contribution among these three aspects is seen as an indicator of a responsible organisation, with developed corporate governance practices and a positive corporate image among its stakeholders.

‘People’ refers to the society in which the entity functions ..The organisation’s practices should promote harmony and well-being of the social elements. This includes humanitarian labour policies, timely payment of wages, improved working conditions, and contribution to social initiatives like education and healthcare. Organisations have also started contributing to primary producers and other non-profit initiatives.

‘Planet’ refers to sustainability of natural resources like air, water, forests and minerals. Conservation of energy, reduction in generation of hazardous wastes, use of bio-degradable components and reduction of carbon emissions are initiatives taken by entities to pursue environmental sustainability. The less harm caused to the environment, the higher is the positive impact on the triple bottomline.

‘Profit’ not only refers to internal profits of the organisation in the accounting sense, it includes economic benefits enjoyed by society at large due to the organisation’s activities.

Markets perceive sustainable organisations as those who ensure that the negative effects of their operations are balanced by the positive effects of their social and environmental contributions.

Conclusion:

My personal views on the way ahead  are to :

  • Develop a code of governance specifically for family-controlled companies that are not as stringent as clause 49.
  • SEBI and stock exchanges to be more responsive to changes in the environment to ensure timely disclosure.
  • Indian organisations to develop an image that positions them as well-governed enterprises that protect the minority stakeholders’ interests on an ongoing basis.
  • Sustainability should become a key focus of corporate governance, with the corporate governance report including how entities have responded to their social, economic and environmental responsibilities.

Importance of Audit of Financial Intermediaries

Article

There cannot be any other appropriate time to write this
article, when the US financial crisis has engulfed the financial sectors across
the globe. This financial storm is no doubt worse than the Great Depression of
1930, and many more aftershocks are yet to be witnessed. The strongest and the
most respected institutions have either been declared defaulters or are in
near-default situations. Financial health of many companies reported to be very
strong in one quarter is suddenly showing a gloomy picture in the subsequent
quarter and declaring insolvency in the quarter next. The role of an auditor has
come under the scanner.


All these simply reflect that unexpected changes
in the economy have come faster than its capacity to meet the ‘challenges of
change’. Due to this paradigm shift in financial sectors the traditional
approach to auditing has lost its shine. At the same time, Auditor’s Report will
now be the sovereign document providing the testimony to the health of the
company as auditors whilst reporting consider the concept of ‘going concern’.
This Article aims to provide some newer approach for audits of financial
intermediaries.

Financial Intermediaries :

Financial intermediaries are broadly classified into two
types :

(1) Advisory or fee-based financial intermediary,

(2) Asset-based financial intermediary.


Whereas the advisory/fee-based financial intermediaries
charge fees for services rendered, the asset-based financial intermediaries earn
their income from interest spread or say from difference in currencies. Many
financial intermediaries also have their proprietary business models in addition
to providing services to their clients. Some of the financial intermediaries
are :

à
Stockbrokers.


à
Portfolio Managers


à
Mutual Funds


à
Financial Institutions


à
Merchant Bankers


à
Depository Participants


à
Venture Capital Companies


à
Non-banking Financial Companies . . . . etc.



ICAI in its various pronouncements on ‘Accounting’ and
‘Auditing and Assurance’ Standards has dealt in details about the way auditing
needs to be done. In spite of that, everyday we hear about how companies have
played fast and loose with accounting norms. Therefore, an auditor needs to
equip himself with modern techniques of auditing. The following are some of the
important aspects of auditing of financial intermediaries.

Regulatory Compliances :

During the last few years, there have been substantial
regulatory and operational changes for financial intermediaries. Regulators such
as SEBI, RBI have travelled a long way in mandating the code of conduct, and
do’s and don’ts for the intermediaries. These are brought in with the objective
of improving market efficiency, transparency and preventing unfair trade
practices, and thereby raising the standards of operations.

Is business taking priority over compliances ? or it’s
otherwise, is a key indicator for hidden intentions. Irregular business
practices, weak controls and process gaps are some of the areas an auditor needs
to study. The auditor also needs to study compliance norms applicable to these
organisations, degree of adherence and probe into reasons for non-compliances.
At times, periodic compliance reports are submitted to the regulators, copy of
which needs to be obtained. Internal reports of compliance officer, and
correspondence with the regulators also need to be studied to gauge the risk of
non-compliance.

Risk Management :

As robust, flawless and seamless manufacturing activities are
paramount to survival of any manufacturing organisations, so is ‘Risk
Management’
for Financial Intermediaries. There can be various types of
risks such as credit risk, IT risk, process risk, regulator’s risk, market risk,
operational risks, etc. The nature and degree of risk depends on the business
model of the financial intermediaries. Models such as retail, agency,
proprietary, distribution, advisory will have different risks associated to its
business.

For measuring the risk, the auditor needs to employ his
analytical skills in addition to his mathematical skills. He should be in a
position to travel beyond the financial numbers and assess ‘vulnerability’.
He should be more alert in volatile market conditions as regards valuations,
open exposures, accruals or deferment of gain and liquidity positions. He needs
to see whether the risk management policies stand the test of time and there are
no human tampering or human intervention of sacrosanct risk parameters set in
the system. Exception reports, process of decision-making and documentations
also need to be studied. At times, the revenues or exposures are concentrated to
certain set of customers, branches, products or regions posing a greater threat
of defaults. The auditor needs to verify whether risk is well spread or
concentrated, and whether or not the system is capable of throwing early alerts.

Auditing under IT Environment :

Technology is a key enabler for accounting, operations and internal controls. In today’s times, companies operate in a highly complex IT structure and environment. From computerised accounting the companies have moved far away to computerised processes, operations, documentation, controls, etc. They also operate in highly fragmented environment using different softwares for different activities. Though controls have been shifted to computers, occurrences of frauds are still continuing, only the way the fraud is happening is changing.

The objective and the scope of audit does not change in an IT environment. However, the use of computer changes the processing, storage, retrieval and communication of financial information and may affect accounting and internal controls. With e-commerce, the auditor needs to develop e-audit capabilities. He needs to gather sufficient understanding of computerised environment, the source data, the data which is getting processed, the parameters and constraints used in processing the data and lastly the reliability of the output. Some of the other important audit checks are:

  • Degree of security levels and policy of escalations.
  • Interaction with process heads to understand and to obtain requisite reports from them.
  • Reconciliations of MI5 reports with financial data.
  • Testing the effectiveness of controls by performing ‘walk throughs’.
  • Verify the audit trail for critical transactions and test the result outside the system.
  • To study IT policy, IT business reports, compliance status, report of external expert, etc.
  • If needed, have a meeting with back office/accounting software vendors.
  • To verify whether end-to-end integration, process of validations, maker-checkers are in place or not.
  • Review physical securities, access logs, network accounts, remote access, no. of servers, connectivity, etc.

Creative Accounting:
Creative accounting refers to accounting practices that may “follow the letter of the rules of standard accounting practices, but certainly deviate from the spirit of those rules.” They are characterised by excessive complication and use of novel ways of determining income, assets or liabilities. Such innovative and aggressive ideas are also found in accounting of financial intermediaries. These ideas/practices are used for variety of reasons which include favourable effect on share prices, improved credit rating, incentive compensation plans, promises given to private equity investors, etc. Even smaller companies sometimes resort to such practices for tax planning.

The book on ‘The Financial Numbers Game’ by Charles W. Mulford and Eugene M. Chomiskey has described in details how to detect such practices. The duty of the auditor in such circumstances is very delicate. He should be in a position to distinguish fraud from error by identifying the presence of intention. Recurrence of non-recurring items, inappropriate accruals, exotic products and innovative valuations are some of the forms of creative accounting. It is said that the great tragedies of history have occurred when both parties were right. Therefore, if some accounting treatments are ‘not wrong’, the auditor should clearly spell out that “they are not right”.

Accounting for Financial Instruments:

Accounting Standards, AS-30, 31 and 32 have been recently notified by ICAI, detailing recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosures of financial instruments, including. derivatives contracts. These standards are set to form new rules of accounting for financial products. Fair value accounting and hedge accounting are two major departures from the principles of convertism and prudence. Though the recent U.S. economic crisis has given rise to some doubts on ‘fair value accounting’, as of now it remains on the books.

The auditor needs to obtain thorough understanding of these standards, especially for derivatives contracts. Off-balance sheet exposures, marked to market valuations, fair value identification, hedge relationships are a few of the tricky situations where the auditor needs to exercise judgment. At times, in volatile market, post-balance sheet events are very critical for framing an audit opinion. The more complex is a contract, the simpler and clearer should be its accounting entries, is a fundamental rule. Even in case of sub-prime crisis, nobody knew where the ultimate loss rests – in other words – who is bearing the loss. The auditor should understand and pierce the web of complex contracts created with the help of multi-layered corporations.

It is, I repeat, necessary to apply the standards of ‘fair valuation’.

Other Common Approaches:

Apart from emphasis on above specific approaches, the auditor has to give due importance to the following procedures :

  • Review internal audit reports, their scope, coverage and observations.
  • Review of critical operations outsourced to external agencies.
  • Review of audit committee’s observations.
  • Adherence to the requirements of clause 49 for corporate governance.
  • Decision-making processes, whether system-based or person-based.
  • Continuous review of latest Circulars, Notifications applicable to the auditee.
  • Mapping of all the procedures in a sequential flow, so as to establish reliability on final output.
  • Whether there is bifurcation of own funds and securities from client fund and securities at all levels.
  • Rotation of audit staff and giving them adequate training and authority to conduct audit.
  • Interaction with departmental heads and review of business reports.
  • Do comparative analysis with other entities in the same industry.
  • Verify the transactions with related parties/ group concerns.

Conclusion :

The accounting system is currently under stress. On the one hand, creative solutions and interpretations on complex issues are put forward in the name of innovations to suit intentions and achieve objectives and on the other hand the value system is diluting.

Though the old principle of auditing, ‘Independence, Integrity, Objectivity’ coupled with competence still holds good, one needs to re-invent the audit approach. Auditor’s ‘Independence of fact’ blended with ‘Independence of appearance’ is of utmost importance to maintain public confidence and to enhance the value of audit function.

These are challenges of change. Though the challenges are tough, I have no doubt that the profession will change faster than the change and grow stronger than the challenges.

Arthashastra : The guide for managerial effectiveness

Article

In the present era of globalised business environment,
corporate history has shown that it has become more difficult for successful
organisations to remain successful. The corporate world is full of examples of
companies such as Nissan Automobiles of Japan and I.B.M. of U.S.A. taking a
knock. A study of such companies has identified managerial effectiveness as the
essential element for any organisation to remain successful in the present
dynamic and continuously evolving business environment. It is interesting to
note that Arthashastra, a treatise on Economic Administration, written by
Kautilya in the 4th century before Christ, identifies managerial effectiveness
as the key element for continuous prosperity and growth of any kingdom.


Kautilya has identified eight elements for managerial
effectiveness as under :



  1. Leadership
  2. Strategy
  3. Structure
  4. Execution
  5. Culture
  6. Talent, Temperament & Technique
  7. Innovation
  8. Strategic Alliance



Interestingly, these eight elements have also been identified
by a study made by the MIT Sloan School of Management, of successful
corporations in the decade of 1991-2000.

Kautilya wrote Arthashastra as a guide for ‘those who govern’
after studying ancient literature such as Atharvaveda, Brahaspati Sutra and
Mahabharata. Kautilya identified these eight elements as essential in the
practice of governance for growth and prosperity.

Kautilya explains each of these eight elements as under:

Leadership :

Leadership in society rested with Swami, the king, and
leadership essentials, such as duties, responsibilities and strategies are :



  • A king who observes his duty of protecting his people justly, according to
    law, goes to heaven, unlike the one who does not protect his people or
    inflicts unjust punishment.



  • A king, who flouts the teachings of Dharmashastra (values) and Arthashastra,
    (material well-being) ruins the kingdom by his own injustice.



  • A king has responsibility for promoting economic well-being by preserving law
    and order through developing extensive administrative machinery.



  • Duties of a king in internal administration are three :




  1. Raksha : Protection of the state from external aggression
  2. Paalana : Maintenance of law and order within the state
  3.  Yogakshema : Safeguarding the welfare of the people




  • A king has to understand that prosperity of the state and its inhabitants
    cannot be maintained continuously, unless new territory is acquired by
    settlement of virgin lands through conquest or alliance.



  • Self control, as a discipline, is essential for a king. Self control can be
    acquired by controlling six emotional devils, such as :




  1. Krodha : Anger
  2. Kaama : Lust
  3. Lobha : Greed
  4. Mana : Vanity
  5. Mada : Haughtiness
  6. Harsha : Overjoy




These leadership essentials are relevant to our corporate
world. They highlight the responsibilities and duties of any CEO, both in
internal administration as well as in developing strategies for expanding the
operations of a corporation.

Kautilya defines a wise king as Rajarishri and highlights the qualities which are necessary for a wise corporate leader of the 21st century. These qualities are:

  • Cultivation of intellect through association with elders (experts)

  • Striving for improvement of own discipline by continuous learning in all relevant branches of knowledge

  • Keeping vigilance on challenges and threats to security and welfare of the state through developing process of accurate information gathering

  • Developing capabilities through specific efforts to enrich people and doing good to them

  • Ensuring observance of Dharma through practice and setting one’s own example through-out the kingdom

  • Power of reasoning, based on strong and clear intelligence, can prevail over external circumstances and shape events. Victory is assured when one sees things as they are and shuns illusions

  • Developing self control through controlling emotional devils

  • The king should be ever vigilant and protect himself against machinations of his own min-isters

  • Educating the successor through providing education to the Prince in Dharmashashtra, (ethics), Arthashastra, (economic administration) and Dandaneetee (protection).

The above explanation about leadership in Arthashastra is universal and is relevant even after 2000 years.

Strategy :

Kautilya defines objectives of an organisation as :

  • Acquire power
  • Consolidate  what  has been  acquired
  • Expand  what  has been  acquired
  • Enjoy what  has been  acquired

 
This set of objectives exactly meets the concept of economic performance developed by management scholar Peter Drucker in 1951 in his article on ‘Concept of a Corporation’. Drucker’s concept of economic performance is based on the following strategies :

  • Make present business  effective
  • Identify potential  and  realise it
  • Make it a different business for different future

To meet the objectives of a kingdom, Kautilya identifies two sets of strategies, internal and external. Internal strategies focus on making the state i.e., kingdom, effective and efficient. External strategies focus on the challenges to the kingdom, in terms of opportunities and threats from external environment. Kautilya’ s inputs in strategy evolution are as under:

 Internal  strategies  :

“A king can rule only with the help of others. One wheel does not move a chariot. Therefore, a king should appoint advisors, councilors & ministers and listen to their advice.”

A king should govern by the Rule of Law, Dharma and Nyaya which alone can guar-antee security of life and welfare of his people.

A king should develop self discipline and encourage others to develop self discipline. Self discipline can be developed through mental faculties, such as

  • Obedience to a teacher
  • Desire and  ability to learn
  • Understanding what  is learnt
  • Capacity  to retain  what  is learnt
  • Ability to make inferences through deliberation on what is learnt

Social order should be maintained through

  • Legal framework designed specifically to enact laws and control unsocial behaviour and to dispense justice
  • It is also necessary to take initiative to enact or promote new laws as per the need of the situation
  • Clear  regulations regarding penalties with regard to fire, hygiene, sanitation, privacy as well as consumer protection are essential for any kingdom.

  • The route to wealth is economic activity and lack of it will lead to material distress. Hence productive forests, mines, cultivable lands, water reservoirs, production and storage units have to be established to nurture and promote trade and commerce.

  • Creation of a network of secret agents, gudha purush, is essential for security of the kingdom as well as for expansion by conquest.

External strategies:

  • External strategies of a king should be based on power equation between two kingdoms.

  • Power is not a factor which is constant over time. Power can be influenced by intangible and unpredictable factors. Hence strategies to change power equation should be based on identifying such factors.

  • A king should always keep long-term advantage in mind and should be willing to sacrifice short-term advantage for a distinctive long-term gain.

  • When faced with a strong king, a comparatively weak king should always remember that in the strength of a strong king lies his weakness.

  • It is always advisable to have allies, Mitra, for strategic alliance which would be necessary to ward off the designs of a strong king.

  • Acquisition of another kingdom, Sangha, is more desirable in the long term than an alliance.

  • Every external strategy should be based on Mantra, the sum total of good counsel, analysis and judgment.

  • Sangha, that is kingdom, can be raised to a condition of greatness and power by taking advantage of a stroke of fortune or by treachery. One needs to study from history how successful kings have analysed the environment and developed strategies to win.


Structure:

Kautilya is aware that to execute any strategy, there has to be a structure with the king, Swami, at the head of the structure. However, he also shows his awareness of the fact that tall or hierarchical structure can be an impediment in successful execution of strategy. He advocates a ‘flat’ structure.

Kautilya, therefore, specifies that a king should have only four reporters. They are:

  • Amatya : Prime Minister
  • Purohit : Chief Justice
  •  Senapati : Chief of Armed Forces
  • Yuvaraj : Prince/Successor to the king

He also proposes a routine for the king to meet his subjects to get a chance to verify information supplied to him by his reporters as well as to get a first-hand information about the success or failure of the strategies developed for the benefit of the kingdom.

Kautilya is keen to ensure that the king always gets correct information and which is cross-checked. Hence in his design of the management information system, he proposes the use of ‘Gudha Purush’ – the spy mechanism.

Kautilya’s stand on shorter span of control, such as ‘four reportees’ is accepted by major management theorists who emphasise on flat structure and sharp information gathering system for strategic decision making.

Execution:
Kautilya emphasises that successful execution of strategies is very important to meet the fundamental aims of any kingdom. He highlights that the important element in execution is power, ‘Dandaneetee’. He highlights four aspects of execution that are based on power. These are :

  • Acquisition of what has not been acquired.
  • Preservation of what has been acquired
  • Augmentation of what has been preserved
  • Distribution among those who deserve what has been augmented

These aspects can be seen from the point of view of the execution of strategies in the corporate world, especially in the present era of globalised world. He points out again and again that concentration of the king should be on exploitation of natural resources and development of national income.

Power that is needed for execution of strategy, ac-cording to him comes from seven elements of the kingdom. These elements are:

  • Swamy    : King
  • Amatya  : Prime  Minister
  • Janapada: People
  • Durga  : Fort
  • Kosha  : Treasury
  • Bala  : Defence  Forces
  • Mitra  : Allies

These elements can be seen in the corporate world as under :

  • Swamy : Owners or Board  of Directors
  • Amatya : Chief Executive Officer/Managing Director
  • Janapada    : Employees    of the  organisation
  • Durga  : Defensive  Strategies
  • Kosha  : Cash  Flow/Financial  Position
  • Bala : Specific skills such as Marketing, Operations, Finance, H.R.
  • Mitra  : Strategic  alliances

Culture:

Kautilya promotes the idea of a culture based on Dharma and Nyaya (values and fairness) to ensure concern for fairness and civic responsibility through-out the kingdom. At the time Arthashastra was written, the constitution of a society was based on Varna, the caste system – different stakeholders. Kautilya highlights the roles of each stakeholder in the society and the king co-ordinates the role of each stakeholder for effective and efficient running of the kingdom. He, therefore, emphasises the importance of roles played by the lower castes and gives them the status of Aryas to connote the theme of equality in society.

His advice for developing a healthy culture within the society is based on teaching of Vedas. He emphasises the supremacy of Vedas by stating “The kingdom, when maintained in accordance with Vedas, will prosper for ever and not perish.” The concept of culture emphasised in Arthashastra is perfectly applicable to the corporate culture. The corporate culture will be fair and responsible only when everyone working realises the roles played by different functional areas such as marketing, finance, operations, systems and human relations and their importance for effective and efficient operations. Similarly, the culture within the orga-nisation will be strong and healthy when it is based on values and fairness as it would help create the corporate brand, which is essential for attraction and retention of talent.

Talent, temperament  and technique:

Kautilya is very specific in terms of the officials to be appointed by the king for the administration of the kingdom. He specifies officials in three categories : Statesmen, Warriors & Artisans and specifies their duties. Statesmen have the duty of making laws and govern the state in accordance with the laws. The duty of the warriors is to protect people from both internal and external danger and the duty of artisans is to undertake economic activities to satisfy the needs of society.

Kautilya highlights talent and temperament as the qualifications of officials to be appointed by the king. He advises the king to make a thorough check on the prospective candidates. He sets out a procedure to select suitable candidates as under:

  • Family background, nationality and amenability to discipline of the candidate should be verified from reliable people.

  • Knowledge  of functional areas should be verified by experts from different functional areas.

  • Intelligence, perseverance and dexterity of the candidate should be evaluated from the past performance.

  • Eloquence, boldness and presence of mind should be ascertained through a personal interview.

  • Closely observing how the candidate deals with others will show his energy, endurance, integrity, friendliness, loyalty and ability to suffer adversities.

  • Health, character, strength, amiability and love of mankind of the candidate should be found out from his close friends as well as personal observations.

Kautilya is very specific in suggesting that even after appointment, the king should test integrity through a variety of secret tests. The tests should highlight the qualities such as Dharma, the values, Artha, the financial judgment and Nyaya, the sense of fairness.

Kautilya highlights the importance of effective thinking for success. He emphasises study of history as it reveals the essential features of the historical processes and provides an insight into cause and effect relationship, which in those times was attributed to chance or providence. Kautilya states that chance or providence is not to be considered as given. Chance and providence can be brought under human control through systematic thinking.

The technique to merge talent and temperament is necessary for success. According to Kautilya, this lies clearly in the hands of the king, who should develop the art of getting the best out of his people by regular assessment, rewards and promotions for effective and efficient officials.

Kautilya’s thinking on talent, temperament and technique provides an ideal platform for designing corporate H.R. policies. His ideas highlight the need for identifying training areas required for continuous growth and for controlling attrition, which is a major concern of H.R. specialists in the corporate sector.

Innovation :

Kautilya in Arthashastra identifies innovation as a key element in war and covert operation strategies. He has been blamed by the western historians for proposing gudha purusha system, that is spy mechanism. However, considering the challenges to a king in those times, this was a unique innovation for safety of the state.

Kautilya provides a variety of options for selecting secret agents. These were mundajatila, the shaven headed ascetics, a sadhvi, the nun, a rich widow, orphans, dumb persons, astrologers, readers of omens, barbers, caterers, among others. The selection is based on the fact that these persons have social acceptability and are invited by villagers to come to their houses and also stay there, if the need arises. Hence, they have easy access to information. These agents were to be trained in sign language, palmistry, magic and illusions. He also points out that transmission of information gathered is important and this needs innovative ways. He identifies ways such as songs, story telling, signals and signs and hidden messages in the musical instruments.

In terms of war strategies, Kautilya emphasises the importance of innovative moves for victory. He identifies incidents such as a weak king facing a strong king in the battle ground and states, “In the strengths of the strong king, lies his weaknesses.” He illustrates by providing an example, such as when faced with an elephant brigade, the weak king needs two crocodiles. He highlights that the elephants are mightily frightened of crocodiles and when confronted by them, they will try to turn around and run, and hence crocodiles will foil the attempt of the strong king to trample over the army of the weak king.

Kautilya also points out that power, time and place are interdependent and any event is a total product of these three forces acting and reacting upon one another. Hence he claims that success does not belong to divinity, that is, Daivam, which is considered beyond man’s control, but belongs to Manushyam, that is thoroughly seen by man and brought under control. Manushyam is based on effective and timely thinking ability of a person.

Another innovative idea Kautilya provides is benchmarking. He advises the king to identify cultivation and trading practices as well as war strat-egies of the neighbouring kingdoms, which could be deployed for better output and trading gains and security throughout the kingdom.

In the corporate world of the 21st century, innovation has been accepted as the key element of success in the globalised environment and some of the examples from Arthashastra are good pointers for devising strategies to win in the market place.

Strategic  alliance:

In the globalised corporate world, to enter into new markets and to develop competitive advantage, strategic alliance has been identified as an important strategic move. Strategic alliance, in principle, is a tie-up between companies which bring their specific core competencies together for specific products or markets, while keeping their individual identities. It is not a merger, but an alliance for growth, a basically win-win situation for both parties. In the recent past, Indian companies have started forming such strategic alliances to enable them enter foreign markets as well as to compete effectively in the home markets. To cite an example, Bajaj Electricals have made a strategic alliance with a Chinese company for making electrical components in China, which are sold by Bajaj Electricals in India as well as in other countries. Similarly, General Motors of USA have forged a strategic alliance with Sundaram Fastners for de-veloping and producing auto components for Indian as well as South-East Asian markets.

Kautilya has visualised the scope of strategic alliances for security and prosperity of a kingdom in the 4th century prior to Christian era. He identifies kings with whom a king can forge a strategic alliance as Mitra and classifies them it) three categories, such as dangerous allies, worthy allies and best allies.

Dangerous ally is one

  • whose past shows that he has attacked an ally by joining forces with others or under the influence of others
  • who has sold himself for a price to the enemy and withdrawn himself at crucial times
  • who would change affinity due to weakness or greed.

Worthy ally is one

  • who exerts  himself on behalf  of the  alliance
  • who is worthy  of respect

Best ally is one who  shows  six qualities

  • Ally of the family for a long time
  • Amenable  to control
  • Powerful  in his support
  • Shares  common  interests
  • Ability to mobilise troops and resources quickly
  • Has never betrayed a friend.

 

Kautilya points out that in choosing allies, one has to make choices, as there could be different options. He identifies such options by giving examples as under:

  • If the choice is to be made between two allies, one who is constant, but not amenable to control and the other who is temporary but controllable. Many scholars felt that a constant ally, though not amenable, is to be preferred. But Kautilya disagrees. His choice is the temporary ally who is controllable, because he remains an ally so long as he needs help. The real characteristic of an ally, according to Kautilya, is giving help.

  • If a choice is to be made between two allies, both are amenable to control, but one can give substantial but temporary help, while the other can give little but constant help. Many scholars would prefer an ally who gives substantial help. Kautilya, however, preferred constant ally even if he gives little help. He argues that the con-stant ally provides help continuously over a long period of time and therefore, contributes more to the alliance.

  • If the choice is between a mighty ally who mobilises slowly and a less mighty ally who mobilises quickly, Kautilya prefers the one who mobilises quickly, as he states success depends on interaction between power, time and place.

If these choices can be seen from the position of options a company has in the present environment for strategic alliance, it shows an in-depth understanding of the issues which need to be tackled from the point of view of managerial effectiveness.

Arthashastra was written by Kautilya as a guide for those who govern. Throughout the treatise, he implies that good governance is based on managerial effectiveness and highlights areas a king should concentrate on for managerial effectiveness. His insight into issues involved in managing a kingdom effectively, makes his treatise an excellent guide for managerial effectiveness, which has relevance to the corporate world of the 21st century.

Kautilya challenges us to use these concepts.

Consolidation in the Indian Banking Industry

Article

Preamble :


The period since the early 90s has witnessed a flurry of
activities in the Indian economy not experienced earlier. This is truly the era
of liberalisation, economic reforms, globalisation, etc. The trend of events in
the Indian economy during this period can be summed up only as positive. While
there is always the downside in any scenario, the balance is certainly
encouraging. The fast growth in the GDP, the strong foreign exchange reserves
position, and a host of other parameters all point in this direction with the
result that India is being seen as a very attractive destination for several
countries for investments in different fields.

One of the sectors that has been eyed for sometime now is the
banking and financial sector. India is already home for different categories of
banks viz. public sector banks, old generation private sector banks, new
generation private sector banks, foreign banks, co-operative banks. The list
does not include non-banking finance companies, investment banks, etc. While the
canvas is quite wide, the immediate focus of this article is the public sector
banks and private sector banks. Much interest has been evinced by several
foreign banks, which do not have a presence in India at present, for setting
base here or widening the existing base, and establishing a large presence
because of the opportunities that have been identified for banking activities in
the country. The Government of India has however been holding back permission
for these banks, essentially with a view to provide the Indian banks an
opportunity to strengthen their position adequately enough to be able to
withstand foreign competition — a necessary fallout of the globalisation that
has been taking place across the world. (The existing guidelines1 prescribe a
74% limit for all types of foreign investment, which effectively means a minimum
stake of 26% for resident Indian capital. Foreign banks have been allowed to
open branches or establish wholly-owned subsidiary or subsidiaries, which have
investment up to 74% in private banks.) Since however such protective policies
cannot remain without any time limit, the Government of India has decided that
from April 2009 onwards, the banking sector would be thrown open to foreign
entrants as well. This date incidentally coincides with the date by which banks
in India are expected to be Basel II–compliant, which to mention in simple
terms, would ensure that the financials are strong enough by international
standards. Thus, the post-April 2009 scenario is expected to witness hectic
activities in this sector with the expected increased presence of foreign
players. The strategies and course of action that would need to be adopted by
Indian banks to equip themselves to face the situation that is likely to emerge
make interesting study. This process of consolidation, which has been suggested
very often by the Government of India, would inter alia witness
mergers and acquisitions in the industry. This paper seeks to look at a few
issues that would have a bear-ing on the decisions of banks to acquire/be
acquired/get merged with other banks, some of the factors that could induce such
decisions, and a few matters having a bearing on the success or otherwise of the
process. The focus would essentially be on the issues involved rather than a
simple statistical tell-tale rhetoric, figures being mentioned purely
incidentally.

History of mergers & acquisitions in Indian banking industry :

Since the onset of reforms in 1990, there have been quite a
few bank amalgamations. Prior to 1999, the amalgamations of banks were primarily
triggered by the weak financials of the bank being merged, whereas in the
post-1999 period, there have also been mergers between healthy banks, driven by
business and commercial considerations. The earlier mergers were more often
distress mergers and hence not entirely for business considerations. Mergers
were driven by the Government to address the financial crisis or distressed
financial position of a bank. Some of the examples are those of SBI taking over
Bank of Cochin and Kashinath Seth Bank, New Bank of India merging with Punjab
National Bank, Global Trust Bank with Oriental Bank of Commerce, Ganesh Bank of
Kurundwad with Federal Bank, etc. . . . But in the recent years a new wave of
consolidation has entered the Indian banking industry. The mergers of Times Bank
with HDFC Bank, Bank of Madura and ICICI with ICICI Bank, Bank of Punjab with
Centurion Bank and now Centurion Bank of Punjab with HDFC Bank fall under this
category of mergers not arising out of distressed financial position.

The few paragraphs that follow have been devoted to a few
topics that are incidental to the main theme, essentially relating to the
causative factors, both external and internal. This has been done consciously
since the capacity of the Indian banking sector to be prepared for coping with
the emerging scenario would not depend on the picture as may be presented, but
on the harsh ground level realities, and any attempt to turn a “Nelson’s eye” to
these warning signals would only be counter-productive and, in certain
circumstances, could even prove suicidal. As such, this diversion is considered
a necessity.

Causative factors :

The situations influencing M&A in the banking industry (as
indeed in any industry) could broadly be classified as external and internal,
though the discussions could see a bit of overlapping of these two factors.
External factors refer to the intent of a bank to grow inorganically by takeover
of another bank or to join hands with another bank in order to reap the benefits
of size and reach. These can also relate to a necessity-based situation driven
by the inherent weakness of a bank as a component of the sector as a whole and
its inability to cope with the dynamic situation. Internal factors on the other
hand refer to the position of the concerned bank itself in terms of its overall
internal financial strength as reflected by various parameters. The following
paragraphs seek to look into these factors and related aspects.

External factors :

The globalisation process has brought ‘in its wake quite a few challenges, not the least being one of intense competition which would ultimately result in the survival of the fittest, the others being forced out of the race for one reason or the other. The focus thus shifts entirely to one characteristic – being fit enough to withstand the competition and being the fittest in order to outperform others. This is where quite a lot of discussions have taken place and will continue to take place – as to what constitutes fitness? Suffice it to understand that the concerned bank needs to be financially strong not only in isolation, but more importantly, as one among, and in comparison with, the other players in the field. In the context of the players in the banking industry, this should encompass largeness of size (where this provides the advantages of volumes in transactions and balance sheet size), a wider reach than at present (where this provides not only the reach into newer areas geographically, but also facilitates newer approaches and products not hitherto possible), a stronger balance sheet (with the inherent advantages of faster growth), etc. It must be mentioned that largeness of size and having a wide reach could turn into disadvantages if not handled in a proper and planned fashion. While it is not the intention of this paper to enter into a debate on the advantages and disadvantages of largeness of size and reach – these have been discussed and chronicled fairly adequately – a few connected points need mention in order to have a clearer understanding:

1. Largeness of size without a proper integration of various activities and co-ordination among them could create total chaos. While this is true of any organisation, it is all the more relevant in the case of banks which deal with public funds and where ongoing changes in the market affecting one activity could have a direct or indirect bearing on another activity of the bank. It is necessary to take full advantage of the synergies of the various activities and utilise the benefits of networking among them, if largeness of size is not to become a ‘drag’.

2. The above observations equally apply to the wide reach that is expected to be one of the advantages of consolidation. The planning process plays a very important role since the reach of a bank in different locations would provide different strengths, depending on the location. For example, location in a rural area would provide the advantage of funding of small business, agriculture and micro-credit as against an urban location which would facilitate corporate business, etc.

3. Viewed from a different angle, smallness of size is also a disadvantage in certain circumstances. With the deadline for reporting compliance with Basel II norms just round the comer, there could be issues connected with need for a strong database and MIS. Inadequacies in these areas would be serious. At the same time, getting these in place would necessitate a strong technology base and connectivity, with the obvious issue of costs. Equally important is the need to build up sophisticated systems which would continuously assess the capital requirements for the different risks and ensure optimal allocation of capital towards these risks; this would again have a cost implication that could prove too high for smaller banks.

4. A large number of small banks have the effect of splitting the consumer base of existing players in the market, similar trends being observed in profit after tax, borrowings and interest and non-interest incomes of the banks, thereby hinting at increased levels of fragmentation in banks. Though this could be an opportunity for healthy competition, the goal of becoming a globally competent bank, for which size of the bank does play an important role, would be missed out. (It may be significant to state at this stage that State Bank of India (SBI)the country’s largest bank, is ranked 60th in the world according to Fortune it is gathered that the next biggest i.e. ICICI Bank, is ranked around 200.) The smaller fragmented banks with no economies of scale, low capabilities to manage risks and poor market power at times end up taking excessive risks resulting in irreparable losses overall. (This aspect is covered in slightly greater detail later in this note.) Under these circumstances, merging or getting taken over by a bank with a ready infrastructure has a lot to commend itself.

As mentioned earlier, the inorganic growth through the process of mergers and acquisitions could be the voluntary route where two banks decide to merge or one bank decides to acquire another bank, essentially by mutual consent, in order to secure the advantages of size and/or reach. Alternatively, it could arise because of inherent weaknesses observed in the bank being acquired. While the former would essentially be caused by external factors, the latter could see a combination of external and internal factors.

The history of mergers and recent discussions held to discuss possible mergers would indicate both categories. The mergers of ICICI with ICICI Bank, IDBI Bank with IDBI, etc. and the discussions held between Bank of India and Union Bank of India are examples of mergers by mutual consent aimed at tapping the inherent synergies between the two organisations. More recently, the discussions between State Bank of India and State Bank of Saurashtra, and also the indications of talks aimed at merger of its other associate banks with State Bank of India, are further examples of this category. On the other hand, the takeover of banks like Global Trust Bank by Oriental Bank of Commerce, Lord Krishna Bank by Centurion Bank and Nedungadi Bank by Punjab National Bank fall in the latter category viz. banks that have had problems and are required to be taken over in the interests of the stakeholders. Also, since there has been quite a bit of analysis on the former category of consolidation, only a brief mention has been made above of the former category. It is however considered necessary to discuss the latter category in slightly greater detail. This would essentially focus on the internal causative factors, though as mentioned earlier, a slight degree of overlapping of the external factors cannot be totally avoided.

Internal factors:

Situations where a bank is confronted with problems to the extent that external help is required to resurrect it are invariably built up over a period – these do not happen overnight or in a totally unexpected manner. On occasions, the approach of a bank to remain content with its level of operations, whether in terms of size or area of operations, could turn out to be the negative factor. Instances exist of banks having been in existence for quite a long period (sometimes even extending to decades) without the type of growth that is seen in other banks placed in a similar category in terms of period of existence, etc. By the time there is an ‘awakening’, it is perhaps too late – the concerned bank remains small in comparison to other players, thereby having to face the negative effects of smallness of size and reach. While this by itself could induce corrective action through the process of consolidation (which would perhaps be the right course of action when viewed from the stakeholders’ angle), the temptation of attempting to remain afloat and in the race’ at any cost’ very often leads to its undoing and pushes the concerned bank into an enforced consolidation by way of takeover by another bank. The next part of this study looks at some of the ways in which this misguided attempt takes place, as also some of the implications of such attempts:

1. Efforts are made to make up for lost time by adopting inappropriate shortcuts. A typical instance would be of a bank trying to go beyond its capacity and rushing in an unplanned manner into activities which it may not be able to handle. For example, taking into account the size and other related factors of a bank. it may not be equipped to handle the larger, and more sophisticated, business offered by corporates. This type of business is however a strong temptation for achieving quantum jump in figures on the business front. This situation can be avoided only with a strong and well-informed Board of Directors which should be very particular on a properly drawn out business plan covering a reasonable period into the future, based purely on the inherent strengths of the bank, sector-wise growth prospects and the opportunities available. In this context, the importance of an independent director on the Board who is truly independent cannot be overstated. This aspect of the Board’s composition is an area that requires serious attention.

2. A variation of the above possibility is the anxiety of the top management, particularly at the CEO’s level, to show good progress in terms of figures during his/her tenure, which could be quite short. During this process, the interests of the stakeholders are lost sight of, since the time available at the disposal of the CEO is less, in view of the short tenure of appointment. The solution to this matter partly lies in the CEO being appointed ab initio for longer durations (say, 4-5 years) with very clear mandates from the Board of Directors (as a sequel to the point mentioned above), so that the long-term interests of the bank and its stakeholders are not sacrificed in the process of achieving short-term results which may not be sustainable.

3. A slightly narrower version of the above observations arises out of the fixation on figures (targets ?), whether year end or at end of specific periods viz. quarter-end or half year-end. This fixation takes the form of ‘ballooning’ towards end of such specific periods, whether in terms of deposits or advances (credit). Often, there is a spurt in the figures of business at such period-ends which revert to the earlier levels when the fresh period commences. While this by itself may not always impact the financial health of the bank, the figures per se are misleading. Where such action also impacts the bank’s financial health, the matter is more serious. This aspect is discussed briefly.in the following paragraphs :

a)  It is evident that growth of the type envisaged above cannot be achieved through retail or other small business avenues in the very short period of (say) a fortnight or a month. The temptation is therefore to go in for bulk business, whether deposits or advances. Deposits, when raised in bulk, are invariably from corporates/institutions where the rates offered have to be high enough to be attractive. These do not conform to the normal rates otherwise offered by the bank – they are quite higher. Looking to the volumes generated through this route, the impact on the profitability can easily be visualised, though the deposits may have been raised only for short periods. The logical sequel to the above is the deployment of the funds thus raised. Here again, the situation is similar to deposits except that the competitive rates have to be low enough to be attractive, with the obvious impact on the bottom line of the bank.

b) The cause-effect could also be reversed in the sense that with availability of large quantum of surplus funds, the deployment could take place first, followed by raising of deposits, the latter with an eye on the need for a satisfactory Credit-Deposit (CD) ratio. In either case, the impact would be the same. Such developments would in the normal course get reflected in the Asset Liability Management (ALM) exercise, as would the possible situation of such bulk advances being extended for longer periods as compared to the tenure of the bulk deposits. There do arise circumstances where these indicators are given a ‘go-by’ in a variety of ways, but dilating on these would shift the focus away from the main theme, and is therefore being left open for individual interpretations.

c) An incidental fallout of the above is the frightening possibility of one or more of such bulk advances turning bad, a situation that could seriously impact the financial position of the bank whose size may not permit such an impact. The implications are obvious.

 4. Another area where the focus on figures could easily take the visibility away from realities relates to the identification and declaration of non-performing assets (NPAs). While the matter of handling of NPAs is by itself a complex one permitting a full-fledged discussion paper, acts of omission and commission in this area could also present the financial position of a bank at an unreal level. One of the routes followed is what is commonly referred to as the process of ‘ever-greening’. Quite simply put, this is the process where, just before an account slips into the category of an NPA, fresh assistance is provided on an ad hoc basis to clear the amounts that are about to slip into the overdue category. This is an area that has been attracting a lot of flak from the regulators who have been giving several guidelines to overcome this ‘illness’. The ultimate effectiveness would however depend on the will to face the real picture which alone would facilitate taking of corrective steps, all in the interests of the health of the banking sector aimed at making it strong enough to face up to the emerging challenges.

Some important issues :

With April 2009 just round the corner, when the sector would be more fully opened up to the foreign banks, and with the prospect of these banks landing with their huge resources and infrastructure, size would become a matter that cannot be wished away. It is therefore apparent that consolidation in the banking industry is inevitable sooner than later. Against this backdrop, it would be appropriate to take a brief look at some of the areas where the consolidation process would make an impact, and some of the issues that may be required to be addressed:

Invariably, the shareholders of the bank being taken over benefit as compared to the shareholders of the acquiring bank.

A few issues could be posed by differences in the customer mix if the banks entering into an arrangement are of different categories e.g., old generation bank and new generation one, public sector bank and private sector bank, Indian bank and foreign bank, etc. The differences could relate to the manner in which transactions are put through in each bank even in such simple matters like withdrawal or deposit of cash.

Objections raised by unions/associations may playa role. The recent case in view is the plan for merger of Union Bank of India and Bank of India, which did not move beyond the initial stages.

Related alliances of either bank have to be taken into account. In today’s scenario, most of the banks have some tie-up or the other. For instance, a bank may have linkages with an insurance company for marketing of the latter’s products. If two such banks with linkages with two different insurance companies come together in the consolidation process, appropriate methodologies may have to be worked out in this area as well.
 
The next issue which should be thoroughly analysed is the HR factor. Looking to its importance, it would only be appropriate to look at this area in slightly greater detail under a couple of sub-heads:

 The culture and behavioral patterns of the concerned banks could be quite different, and their mutual compatibility and adapt-ability is an important pre-condition for the success of the consolidation process. While problems could arise even between two banks of similar character (e.g., two new private sector banks or two nationalised banks), the matter gets more complex when such similarity does not exist. The complexities could relate to different types of hierarchies and reporting practices in the organisation structure, procedures (whether in internal personnel matters or seeking decisions on credit and other business-related matters, and a host of such matters), differences in staff regulations, etc.

Differences in the overall age pattern prevailing within each bank can be another serious matter. One cannot afford to bypass matters such as the typical ‘generation-gap’, with the elder generation strongly believing that all its long years of experience and labour are being slighted – particularly if they are required to report to the younger lot, post-consolidation, and the younger generation equally strongly feeling that their professional qualification linked to the current requirements need to get much greater attention and that the earlier generation is somewhat ‘out-of-tune’ with today’s world. The simple fact is that neither the large experience, for which there can be no substitute, nor the technical expertise gained by the younger generation can be ignored a healthy marriage of the two is essential.

 Merging and positioning of the personnel of the two banks in the new organisation structure is another challenge, particularly in certain specialised departments like Credit, Treasury and Resource Management, etc.

 Differences in compensation structure is yet another serious component of the HR factor, particularly if the employees in the bank being taken over have been drawing more compensation than the employees of the taking-over bank.

Recent mergers/takeovers of Global Trust Bank by Oriental Bank of Commerce, Bank of Madura by ICICI Bank, IDBI Bank with IDBI, etc. have all had issues falling under one or the other of the above HR-related categories.

Instances of this crucial area (HR) could be multiplied, but suffice it for the purpose of this paper to observe that this is a really crucial, if not critical, issue in any process of consolidation, and any due diligence study that does not give this matter the required level of attention would only be half-cooked. The consequences could be disastrous in the form of staff frustration, depression, disappointment over failure to be given due recognition and, quite often, a high degree of attrition. The net result is not hard to visualise.

The type of technologies used in each bank is another crucial factor. With almost all the banks across the economy going in for Core Banking Solutions a necessity in the context of growing competition, imperative need to focus on providing the best customer service, need for a strong database that would keep updating itself on real-time basis and hence provide a strong MIS – different players have emerged for providing this Solution, with differences existing between one and the other. In the event of different vendors having provided the CBS to the two banks, the scope for successful integration of these two technologies needs to be critically examined.

6. The individual balance sheet position of the banks is yet another crucial matter. This assumes greater seriousness when one of the banks is being taken over due to its weak financial position. Differences in the quality of loan portfolios, mix (e.g., one bank having a greater percentage of corporate accounts and the other a high level of retail portfolio), the levels of non-performing assets and stressed accounts, the composition of deposits (time and demand), the Credit-Deposit ratios, the investment strategies adopted and the types of investments on the balance sheet (statutory or otherwise), the Capital Adequacy ratios; matters relating to Asset Liability Management (area of maturities and interest rates mismatches) – all these demand a high degree of attention and analysis.

Conclusion:
The current scenario on the banking sector front is indeed dynamic, extremely challenging and, for a true hard core professional, immensely exciting. It is certainly not for the weak-willed. Genuine strong and equipped players will find the future holding out several challenges, thrills and prospects. At the same time, players who have missed out on opportunities, focus and direction, all of which have to be based on a strong foundation of discipline and commitment to the sector and the nation, are bound to find the going very tough for survival in the emerging scenario. The process of consolidation is not just a major one – it is almost inevitable. The process necessarily pre-supposes a meticulous and professional due diligence study, for which some of the important issues to be kept in view have been discussed in this note. It would only be an understatement to mention that such a study needs to be factual, fearless, truly independent and totally unbiased. Given the strong professional talent that is available in the country and the committed leaders in the banking sector (quite a few still remain – they only need to be identified and encouraged/supported and assuming a definite sense of purpose, focus and urgency at various levels with various authorities, one only hopes that the future would witness the emergence of a new-face banking sector – a strong, vibrant one, competing fiercely, but with one clear-cut common objective – to build a much stronger India, both financially and industrially, which would be looked upon as a role model by the rest of the financial world.

References :
1. Book: Bhagaban Das and Alok Kumar Pramanik on ‘Mergers and Acquisitions – Indian Scenario’, Kanishka Publishers,2007.

2. Business Standard, Banking Annual, 2006 Issue.

3. IBA Bulletin, Special Issue 2005,Consolidation in Banking Industry: Mergers & Acquisitions, [an 2005,VolXXVII – No. 1.

4. Special address delivered by Shri V. Leeladhar, Deputy Governor, Reserve Bank of India on April 17, 2008 in Mumbai on the occasion of the International Banking & Finance Conference 2008organised by the Indian Merchants’ Chamber, Mumbai.

5. The Banker, July 2007 Issue, ‘Top 1000World Banks’.

6. WebLink: http://rbidocs.rbLorg.in (Roadmap for Presence of Foreign Banks in India and Guidelines on Ownership and Governance in Private Banks, dated February 28, 2005)

7. Weblink: http://money.cnn.com/magazines/fortune/global500/2007/industries/192/1.html (Fortune, Global 500 Companies)

European Holding Company — Choosing the right jurisdiction

Article

Investing abroad through a holding company is necessary as
the tax laws of India do not provide any relief on investment income.
Repatriation of dividends to India is not efficient from a tax point of view as
dividends from overseas subsidiaries are generally taxed in India on a net basis
without any credit for underlying foreign taxes paid on the profits of the
paying company. Indian taxes can be deferred on the profits from the investments
abroad through the use of a holding company located in an appropriate
jurisdiction. There are several factors which need to be considered while
determining the holding company jurisdiction.


At a broad level, the key factors to be considered while
selecting an appropriate holding company jurisdiction are :

1. Tax regime — Generally, the source of income for
a holding company is dividend and capital gains. Preferred holding company
jurisdictions either follow a participation exemption regime or a tax credit
regime; which eliminates/reduces taxes on dividend and capital gains. Further,
transaction costs like stamp duty on issue or transfer of shares, thin
capitalisation norms which govern interest deductibility, ability to carry
forward interest costs for set-off against future taxable income, etc. are
also important while selecting an appropriate holding company jurisdiction.

2. Tax treaty network — It is imperative that the
holding company jurisdiction has a good tax treaty network, especially with
respect to the target company jurisdiction. A good tax treaty network is
essential to optimise on withholding tax incidence on dividend and capital
gains tax originating from the target company jurisdiction.

3. Economic and political stability — Investments
are generally made with a long-term vision. Thus, political and economic
stability of the country is very critical for deciding on the holding company
jurisdiction. In addition to political and economic stability, a stable tax
regime is also very important. Frequent changes in the tax law
do not ensure confidence in the mind of investor.

4. Regulatory environment — Considering the role of
a holding company i.e., to make and manage overseas investments, a
liberal regulatory environment in the holding company jurisdiction is also
essential.

5. Financial environment — Flexibility in raising
funds is of importance for the taxpayer. The financial environment in the
holding company jurisdiction should be sound so as to enable fund raising in
that jurisdiction.


In the following paragraphs we shall discuss some of the
popular holding jurisdictions in Europe in greater detail.

The Netherlands :

General :

The Netherlands is increasingly being used as a holding
company jurisdiction in view of favorable tax regime. A company which is
considered to be tax resident in the Netherlands is subject to tax on its
worldwide income. Non-resident companies are liable to tax on specific source of
income in the Netherlands.

The Netherlands has an extensive tax treaty network. It has
entered into tax treaties with more than 75 countries covering most of the
developed countries. To name a few, it has tax treaties in force with the USA,
the UK, Russia, Germany, India, China, Singapore, etc.

The standard corporate tax rate in the Netherlands varies,
based on the income slab as under :

Income slab
Tax rate
Up to Euro
40,000
20%
Euro 40,000 to
Euro 200,000
23%
Above Euro
200,000
25.5%

Taxation of holding companies :

Dividend and capital gains :

The Netherlands has participation exemption which exempts
dividend and capital gains on qualifying participation. Participation Exemption
covers not only cash dividends, but also stock dividends, bonus shares,
dividends in kind, and hidden profit distributions, as well as foreign exchange
gains and capital gains realised on the disposal of a qualifying shareholding.
The participation exemption is not only limited to resident shareholders but
may, in principle, also apply to a Dutch permanent establishment to which the
shareholding can be attributed.

There are certain qualifying conditions which need to be
fulfilled so as to avail the participation exemption benefit. The following
tests need to be satisfied in this regard :


  • Ownership test, and



  • Asset test



Ownership test :

The ownership test essentially requires a participation of at
least 5% in the nominal paid-up share capital of an active investee company. A
participation of less than 5% may also be considered as a qualifying
participation, provided another group entity owns a stake of at least 5% in the
active investee company.

Asset test:

The asset test provides that the participation exemption does not apply to low-taxed investment participations. A low-taxed investment participation is a participation which fulfils the following conditions :

  • more than 50% of the assets of the participation, directly or indirectly, consist of free portfolio investments; and
  • the participation is not subject to tax on profits at an effective rate of at least 10%, determined in accordance with the Netherlands standards.


While determining whether more than 50% of the assets consist of portfolio investment, the fair market value of such assets is taken into consideration.

Portfolio investments are generally considered free if the investments are not used in the course of the business of the company.

It is, therefore, essential to evaluate that both the aforesaid tests are satisfied so as to avail the benefit of participation exemption in the Netherlands.

Withholding tax:

Dividend:

Dividend  paid by a Netherlands resident  company to a non-resident shareholder is subject to withholding tax in the Netherlands. The standard rate of withholding tax on outgoing dividend is 15%, unless a lower rate is prescribed under the relevant tax treaty. The aforesaid withholding tax rate could be reduced to 0% under the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive.

This Directive is aimed at eliminating tax obstacles in the area of profit distributions between groups of companies in the EU by :

  •  abolishing withholding taxes on payments of dividends between associated companies of different Member States; and
  •  preventing double taxation of parent companies on the profits of their subsidiaries.


With this Directive, dividend can flow from one EU member state to another EU member state without any withholding tax incidence. However, there are certain conditions regarding the form of entity and minimum participation for availing the benefit of the aforesaid Directive. In addition to the above, the member countries may mutually agree on certain other conditions/ obligations to be fulfilled for grant-ing the benefit of the said Directive.

The Netherlands, being an EU member state, is eligible to avail the benefit of the aforesaid Directive. This, effectively, means that dividend received by a Netherlands holding company from its EU subsidiary may not be subject to any withholding tax in the source country. However, as mentioned herein-above, it is essential that all conditions as agreed between the Netherlands and the respective country for granting benefit of the Directive are fulfilled.

Interest:

There is no withholding tax on interest in the Netherlands. However, it is essential to evaluate the features of the loan instrument so as to ensure that it does not qualify as equity. In case, it is considered as equity, interest payment could be considered as deemed dividend liable to withholding tax, if applicable.

Thin capitalisation  rules:

There are thin capitalisation rules in the Netherlands. Thin capitalisation rules effectively restrict the deductibility of interest paid to related entities if the company is excessively debt financed. The safe-harbour debt: equity ratio in the Netherlands is around 3 : 1. The net interest attributable to the debt that is more than this ratio is treated as non-deductible, up to a maximum of the interest paid to related entities.

Alternatively, the company can elect to apply for the group ratio. Under this alternative, the company can look at the consolidated debt to equity ratio of the group of which it is a member. If the company’ debt to equity ratio does not exceed the consolidated ratio, the interest paid to related party is not disallowed.

Controlled Foreign Company (CFC) :

CFC regulations are aimed at eliminating the benefits of deferral, by currently taxing income in the parent country even when the income has not been repatriated or remitted to that country. The Netherlands does not currently have specific CFC regulations.

Capital duty:

Capital duty is a duty levied on capital contribution. Currently, there is no capital duty in the Netherlands.

Cyprus:

General:

As a former British colony, Cyprus follows the common law system and is, in many ways, influenced by the legal system of the United Kingdom. Resident companies are taxed on worldwide income. Cyprus has tax treaty with around 35 countries. Among others, it has tax treaties in force with Canada, Germany, India, Mauritius, Russia, the US and the UK.

The standard rate of (Corporate) income-tax on taxable income realised by Cypriot corporate taxpayers is 10%. In addition to income-tax, there is also a. levy of Special Contribution for the Defence of the Republic (‘Defence Tax’) on certain types of income. The rate of Defence Tax varies from 3% to 15% de-pending on the nature of income. Defence Tax is a tax -levied on income rather than on profits and as such (business) expenses incurred for the production of the income are not deductible for Defence Tax purposes.

Capital Gains Tax at a rate of 20% is levied on profits from disposal of immovable property situated in Cyprus or of shares in companies which have immovable property situated in Cyprus (unless the shares  are listed  on a recognised stock exchange).

Taxation of holding companies:

Dividend    income:

Cypriot (Corporate) Income Tax law provides for an exemption of dividends received by Cyprus resident corporate taxpayers, irrespective of the holding period. Thus, dividend income is not liable to tax in Cyprus corporate tax.

In addition, Defence Tax is levied at a rate of 15% on dividends received by resident companies from foreign companies. However, there is a participation exemption from levy of Defence Tax on fulfilment of the following conditions:

  • Dividends are exempt from the levy of this Defence Tax if the recipient holds at least 1% of the share capital of the dividend paying company (‘participation exemption threshold’);


and

  • Dividend paying company does not derive 50% or more of its income directly or indirectly from activities which lead to investment income (‘active versus passive income test’);


or

  • the foreign tax burden on the profit to be distributed as dividend is not substantially lower than the Cypriot corporate income tax rate (i.e., lower than 5%) at the level of the dividend paying company (‘effective minimum foreign tax test’).


Only one of the two tests as mentioned above need to be met in order for the (participation) exemption to apply.

Investment income mentioned hereinabove normally includes (portfolio) dividend income, licensing income, interest income (unless the dividend paying company is a financial institution or a group financing company), rental income from immovable property (unless a real estate portfolio is actively and professionally managed) and certain capital gains.

Capital  gains:

There is no capital gains tax in Cyprus except on gains derived from sale of immovable property or sale of shares, which derives underlying value from immovable property in Cyprus (unless such shares are listed). This exemption applies irrespective of the holding period, number of shares held or trading nature of the gain. Capital losses resulting from the sale of securities are not tax deductible.

Withholding tax:

Dividend  and  interest:

Cyprus does not levy any withholding taxes on dividend or interest payments from Cypriot tax resident companies to non-tax residents.

Thin capitalisation    rules:

There are no thin capitalisation rules in Cyprus. Thus, there is no safe-harbour rule which prescribes the permissible debt: equity ratio of the Cypriot company.

Controlled Foreign Company  (CFC):

Cyprus does not have CFC regulations. This means that the earnings of the passive subsidiary of Cypriot holding company need not be included in the income of Cypriot holding company, unless such earnings are actually distributed.

Capital  duty:

There is a capital duty (registration fee) payable upon incorporation of a Cypriot company. The registration fee payable is calculated at around 0.6% of the registered authorised share capital. It is possible to optimise the capital duty incidence through appropriate structuring of the capital structure.

Switzerland:

General:

Switzerland is located in the heart of Europe. It has become an attractive destination for holding company due to its favourable tax regime. Switzerland has extensive tax treaty with around 70 countries. It has concluded tax treaties with most of the European and developed countries. It has concluded tax treaties with the US, the UK, Russia, India, Canada, etc.

Switzerland is a confederation of 26 cantons. Swiss corporations are generally taxed on their income at federal level as well as at cantonal level. As a result of this multilayer tax’ rates, no standard cantonal tax rates exist. The tax rate could vary from 12.5% to 24.5% depending on the canton. This rate includes the effective federal tax rate of 7.8%.

Taxation  of holding companies:

Dividend  and capital gains:

In Switzerland, companies of which  assets consist mostly of participations can benefit from lower income taxes on federal as well as on cantonal! communal level if certain requirements are met.

Cantonal level:

The tax laws of all Swiss cantons have a special privileged tax regime (holding privilege) for companies whose main objective is to hold substantial investments in the capital of other corporations.

Hence, their income essentially comprises dividend income and their main assets are participations.

The following conditions need to be fulfilled to qualify as a holding company for cantonal income tax purposes:

  • The statutes of the corporation should mention that the main activity of the company is the long-term management of equity investments in different companies. The corporation has no business activity in Switzerland.
  • In the long term, the participations should cover two-thirds of the assets or the derived income (dividends) should represent at least two-thirds of the total income.


There is no income tax at the cantonal level if a company meets the requirements of a holding company. In effect, dividend and capital gains earned by such company are not liable to cantonal tax.

Federal  level:

At a federal level, no holding privilege is available. All income is subject to an effective federal income tax rate of 7.8%. However, income derived from qualifying participations is subject to the participation deduction. The participation income is not exempt, but the income tax is decreased according to a certain percentage. The participation exemption is not a special tax status, but has the aim to avoid economical double taxation.

The following conditions need to be satisfied to avail the participation deduction:

  • Participation  deduction  company  must own at least 20% of the capital of another  company; or
  • Participations must have a fair market value of CHF 2 million.

If one of these requirements is met, the profit tax is reduced in proportion to the net income from these participations and the total income. Net income is computed in the prescribed manner.

For dividend income purposes there is no minimum holding period requirement. However, the following additional conditions need to be satisfied for participation deduction on capital gains:

  • Capital gains should arise from sale of participation of at least 20% of the equity (capital stock) of the company; and


  • such shares must have been held for a minimum period of 1 year.

 
Withholding tax:

Dividend:

Dividend paid by a Swiss resident company to a non-resident shareholder is subject to withholding tax in Switzerland. The standard rate of withholding tax on outgoing dividend is 35% unless a lower rate is prescribed under the relevant tax treaty. Most of the tax treaties entered into by Switzerland provide for 5% or 10% tax rate on dividend income.

The aforesaid withholding tax rate could be reduced to 0% under the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive benefit. Though Switzerland is not a member of EU, certain EU member countries have extended the benefit of the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive to Swiss resident companies. On remitting dividend to another EU member state, it is essential to evaluate if the aforesaid Directive is in force with respect to that country and the conditions prescribed therein are fulfilled.

Interest:

Swiss law differentiates between ordinary loans of a Swiss borrower and bonds (for example, cash bonds or money market instruments) issued by Swiss residents or accounts/client deposits at a Swiss bank. Interest payments on ordinary loans are not subject to withholding tax, whereas interest payments on Swiss bonds and on accounts/deposits at Swiss banks are subject to withholding tax. The standard rate of withholding tax on interest is 35% unless the tax treaty provides for a lesser rate.

Further, the aforesaid withholding tax rate could be reduced to 0% under the EU Interest & Royalties Directive. As mentioned hereinabove, though Switzerland is not a member of EU, certain EU member countries have extended the benefit of the EU Interest & Royalties Directive to Swiss resident companies. On remitting interest to another EU member state, it is essential to evaluate if the aforesaid Directive is in force with respect to that country and the conditions prescribed therein  are fulfilled.

Thin capitalisation rules:

There are no specific thin capitalisation rules in Switzerland. However, the tax authorities have issued a circular specifying the maximum allowable debt. The circular defines the maximum permitted amount of debt financing per asset evaluated at market value. For example, 85% on participations, 70% on intangibles, etc.

Exceeding debts are reclassified as so-called hidden equity if and to the extent that they are granted by related parties. Interest on debt reclassified as hidden equity is not tax deductible for income tax purposes and qualifies as deemed dividend distribution, subject to Swiss withholding tax.

Controlled  Foreign Company  (CFC):

Switzerland does not have any CFC legislation. Thus, income from foreign subsidiaries is not subject to tax in Switzerland before actual distribution. Participation deduction on dividend income and on capital gain does not require any minimum taxation of the subsidiaries’ profits.

Capital  duty:

Switzerland levies capital duty on infusion of capital. Capital duty is assessed at an ordinary rate of 1% on the fair market value of any capital in excess of CHF 1 million. There are ways to optimise the capital duty incidence in Switzerland e.g., re-organisation exemption mechanism, etc.

Luxembourg:

General:

Luxembourg is the smallest of all BENELUX countries. In fact, Luxembourg was one of the first to introduce ‘holding’ companies back in 1929. Although the 1929 holding companies can no longer be incorporated due to pressure from the EU, Luxembourg continues to be an attractive jurisdiction for holding companies. Luxembourg has concluded tax treaties with almost 50 countries. Among the prominent countries, Luxembourg has concluded tax treaties with the US, the UK, Canada, Russia, and Germany. Luxembourg has recently signed tax treaty with India.

The corporate tax rate varies from 20% to 22% depending on the income level. In addition, a surcharge of 4% is payable to the unemployment fund.

A local income tax i.e., Municipal Business Tax (MBT)is also levied by different municipalities. MBT rate varies from municipality to municipality.

Taxation  of holding  companies:

Dividend  & Capital gains:

Dividends and capital gains received by a Luxembourg tax resident company are in principle subject to Corporate Income Tax (hereafter ‘CIT’) and MBT at an aggregate rate of approximately 30%. However, such income could be exempt from crr and MBT under the participation exemption regime in Luxembourg.

The conditions to be met for availing of participation exemption are as follows:

(i)    The recipient  is one of the following:

1.    A resident capital company or a qualifying entity fully subject to tax in Luxembourg;

2.    A Luxembourg branch (permanent establishment) of a company which is a resident of another EU state that is covered under Article 2 of the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive;

3.    A Luxembourg branch of a capital company which is a resident of a tax treaty country.

(ii)    The recipient owns at least 10% of the share capital of the distributing company or the cost of acquisition of the shareholding is Euro 1.2 million (for capital gains participation exemption, the requirement is Euro 6 million);

(iii)    Shares have been held for 12 months. If this period has not been completed as on the date of dividend distribution, the recipient should commit to fulfilling the holding period.

As regards international participation exemption, i.e., dividends/ capital gains received/ arising from non-resident companies, participation exemption is available, if in addition to the above conditions, either of the following two conditions is met:

(i)    The distributing capital company must be subject to a tax comparable to Luxembourg corporate tax in its home country. This condition should be met if the foreign company is subject to tax at an effective rate which is at least equal to half of the CIT (excluding unemployment surcharge); or

(ii)    The distributing entity is a resident of another EU country and is covered by Article 2 of the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive.
 

Withholding tax:

Dividend:

Dividends distributed by a Luxembourg company are in principle subject to withholding tax at a rate of 15%, unless the relevant tax treaty provides for a lesser rate.

The aforesaid rate could be reduced to 0% under the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive, subject to fulfilment of prescribed conditions.

Interest:

There is no withholding tax on ordinary interest paid to non-resident companies. The feature of the loan instrument needs to be evaluated to ensure that it is in the nature of debt and is not an equity or quasi-equity instrument. In that event, there could be withholding tax implications in Luxembourg.

Accessibility to EU Directives:

Luxembourg is a member of EU and is therefore eligible for the benefit of the EU Parent Subsidiary Directive and EU Interest & Royalties Directive on incoming dividend and interest income, respectively. However, the Luxembourg resident company must fulfil the conditions prescribed under the respective directive so as to avail the benefit.

Thin capitalisation rules:

There are no specific thin capitalisation rules in Luxembourg.

Controlled  Foreign Company  (CFC):

There are no CFC rules in Luxembourg.

Capital  duty:

Contribution of cash to the capital of a company in exchange for shares is subject to capital duty at the rate of 0.5%. The taxable base is the amount of cash contributed.

Summary  :

The summary of analysis of aforesaid holding company jurisdictions is given in Table 1 on the next page:

Conclusion:

The selection of European holding company jurisdiction is a function of multiple variables. Although all the countries discussed above provide for exemption from dividend and capital gain taxation, the conditions to be fulfilled under each jurisdiction differ.

For example, there is a minimum holding period requirement of one year and a higher threshold of participation for availing the capital gains tax participation exemption in case of Switzerland. In case of
 
Luxembourg and Cyprus there could be a possible capital duty incidence.

With the outbound investment activity increasing from India, there is a need for India to introduce a tax regime which facilitates the use of India as a holding jurisdiction.


Oral partition of joint family property is permissible and subsequent writing does not require registration or stamp duty : Hindu Law.

New Page 1

10 Oral partition of joint family property
is permissible and subsequent writing does not require registration or stamp
duty : Hindu Law.


The appellants were heirs of the original plaintiff Sonabai.
Sonabai’s husband Ganpatrao died leaving behind his son Motiram and two
daughters, namely, the appellants. Defendnat No. 1 was the widow of Motiram
while defendant no. 2 was daughter of defendant no. 1.

It was alleged that the suit property was the joint family
property left behind by Ganpatrao. The appellant submitted that there was no
partition of the suit property and as such they claimed one half share in the
suit property.

The defendant resisted the claim on the ground that soon
after the death of Motiram and his son, there was a partition and that the
appellants and defendants were cultivating and enjoying their separate share.

The learned Trial Judge held that there was already a
partition and the property did not continue to be joint. The learned Judge found
that the partition had taken place orally and subsequently in writing by
way of memorandum. The appeal was also dismissed.

In the instant case, it was not disputed that the suit
property was a joint family property. Where a document in respect of partition
comes into existence after the oral partition has already taken place, it will
neither require stamp nor registration. The partition deed would require
registration and stamp duty only if interest is created in specific property by
or under that document. If there is an oral partition, that oral partition
itself creates interest in that specific property and not the document which
comes into existence later. The document can be used for proving the severance
of status.

[Lilabai Chavan & Anr. v. Deokabai Kadam & Anr., AIR
2008 (NOC) 2050 (Bom.)]

 


levitra

Secured Creditor is entitled to apply for assistance of Court for taking over actual physical possession from borrower/secured debtor : Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002 S. 14.

New Page 1

11 Secured Creditor is entitled to apply for
assistance of Court for taking over actual physical possession from
borrower/secured debtor : Securitisation and Reconstruction of Financial Assets
and Enforcement of Security Interest Act, 2002 S. 14.


On account of the first respondent’s liability under a
security agreement in term of the SARFAESI Act, 2002, proceedings were initiated
by the petitioner u/s.13(2) of the Act. The petitioner, a secured creditor,
took symbolic possession of the property leaving the first respondent in de
facto
physical possession. The property was brought to sale, sale
certificate was also issued in favour of the auction purchaser.

 

It is within the wisdom and freedom of the secured creditor
as to whether in a given case it would, in exercise of authority u/s. 13(4) take
over de jure and de facto possession at one go, or whether it
would let the secured debtor to continue to hold de facto possession
after taking over only de jure possession, by publication in accordance
with the Act and rules, to aid the secured creditor to proceed with the sale
u/s.13. It is not the requirement of S. 13(6) or any other provisions of the Act
that a transfer by a secured creditor after taking over possession would be only
after taking over actual possession, de facto. The right to take
possession u/s.13(4)(a) is provided in such wide terms that it gives fair room
for the secured creditor to decide whether it would first proceed only to take
de jure possession. At any rate, a secured debtor, continuing to hold
de facto
possession on the ground of not having been dispossessed, would
only be one who had been given the advantage to continue to hold on de facto
possession for the time during which different steps would have followed,
resulting in the confirmation of sale in favour of a third party auction
purchaser. In absence of any jurisdictional requirement for de facto
possession to make a transfer in terms of S. 13(6), there is no legal or
jurisdictional error in the sale being held by the secured creditor on the
strength of de jure possession. Such a sale or transfer has the complete
support of S. 13(6).

[ Kottakkal Co-op. Urban Bank v. T. Balakrishnan & Anr., AIR 2008
Kerala 179]

levitra

Perspective of the Profession, a decade from today

Article

Introduction :


The Accountancy Profession is one of the oldest and
traditional professions of the modern society since its evolution. The
professions of accountancy, law and medicine are the three learned professions
classically known as the professions of divinity, law and medicine. From the
Indian context, the profession of Chartered Accountancy is in a crucial
transition stage as it has to measure up to the global standards and overcome
challenges that will be encountered over the next decade successfully. The
profession should continue to contribute as a partner in nation-building as
India is one among the fastest growing economies in the world. The Bombay
Chartered Accountants’ Society which has served commendably the profession and
the nation for the last 59 years has entered the Diamond Jubilee Year and to
commemorate the occasion has organised the Diamond Jubilee Conference with
topics that would kindle the thoughts of the intellectuals who will attend as
delegates and stimulate the strategies to be adopted for the sustenance, growth
and glory of the profession in the years to come.

There are a few peculiar constraints in which Indian
accountancy profession has been operating in public practice. The first and
foremost is that the law does not allow more than 20 partners in a firm and
secondly, the status ‘Limited Liability Partnership’ (LLP) is not in vogue as
the concerned Bill is yet to be passed by the Parliament. Besides, most of the
firms in India belong to the SMP category. Even if we construe that firms having
more than 10 partners are big in size, there are hardly 128 firms falling in
this classification. There are also a few firms who are having less than 10
partners, but have employed large number of qualified paid assistants and
trained staff. Even if these firms are kept apart, the rest can certainly be
considered as small and medium in nature.

Impact of information technology :

The impact of information technology in the field of audit
and assurance service is going to be tremendous, as the business community is
already using technology extensively in every facet of its activity. Auditing
will have to be done not just in the computerised environment but by using the
systems and technological tools. Auditing firms will have to adopt automation in
the process to deliver reports timely and qualitatively. On-line and real-time
basis financial information presentation to shareholders will replace the
present general purpose financial statements now prepared annually. Focus of the
assurance service would be on the evaluation of the input data and that of the
results reflected as part of the outputs generated since arithmetical accuracy
shall be taken for granted and therefore will not be required to be verified.

In the USA, xml-based language for financial reporting called
extensible Business Reporting Language (XBRL) has been developed enabling
electronic deciphering of the data in a harmonious manner. There are about 11
countries (Jurisdictions) which have assumed jurisdiction to implement and use
XBRL platform.

Texonomy, the relevant dictionary, has been developed, which
provides a tag with a standardised definition to each data element in the
financials. India is exploring the possibility of assuming jurisdiction to adopt
XBRL to facilitate the listed companies to upload their financial statements
using this language with the stock exchanges to make the global investor to
understand, analyse and compare them in a uniform manner. This would require the
audit function to validate the inputs and certify the outputs. If more and more
nations assume jurisdiction, Indian Professionals may even get outsourcing work
in this field.

Electronic filing of statutory forms and returns is gaining
momentum. Over the next decade the e-filing initiative will be complete in all
the Departments of the Central and State Governments and professional firms
would equip themselves to meet this obligation of their clients.

Corporate governance and role of audit :

In view of the growing importance of corporate governance the
role of audit will undergo a change. Financial debacle of many corporations in
the US like Enron, Worldcom and a few others; the not long ago sub-prime crisis
in the US and the present financial crisis of banks leading to bail-out plan by
the US Government by pumping in 700 billion dollars are all leading to closer
evaluation of the risk assessment and management functions in an entity. Similar
financial crisis is engulfing banks in Europe also and G7 nations are pondering
on methodologies to prevent major banks from failing. Regulations like SOX in
the US will emerge in a stringent way in the rest of the world and the role of
audit will transform to a different level involving objective evaluation and
reporting.

Audit findings and reporting can no longer be elusive on
non-detection of collusive frauds at the management level. The stakeholders
would expect more information and assurance on the risks and uncertainties
arising out of the decisions taken by the management. Independent assurance on
the reliability of systems, procedures and controls that generate the
information and the reliability of such information which forms the basis for
business policies and decision-making, would be expected. Corporate Social
Responsibility (CSR) will assume new dimensions and the audit reporting and
monitoring will encompass the various initiatives taken as part of CSR including
sustainability and growth. All these developments would result in more
opportunities as well as risks for the profession which can be ably met by
enhancing the skill sets and equipping itself with modern audit tools.

Yet another development for which the profession should be
prepared is the possibility of more disciplinary proceedings and adverse
developments in the context of professional indemnity. In the US, PCAOB does the
oversight function. In India, till now, we are used to peer-review mechanism to
ensure quality in attestation services. Peer review does not lead to
disciplinary proceedings and even an adverse finding results in refusal of
issuance of peer review certificate. Henceforth the scenario will change.
Quality Review Board (QRB) will replace peer review board and any adverse
finding will lead to disciplinary proceedings. The change in the disciplinary
mechanism will also expedite the disposal time of a case. More claims may lead
to popularisation of insurance policies with reference to professional
indemnity.

Convergence of standards:

The phenomenon of globalisation has resulted in free flow of funds with no hindrance on account of geographical borders and regulations have also been giving way facilitating cross-border investments. Not only the multinational companies positioned outside India are establishing in India, Indian companies are also growing stronger to position themselves in the international business arena. More and more acquisitions of foreign businesses by Indian enterprises and establishment of subsidiaries abroad would take place in the next decade. Shareholders and other investors would be spread across the globe which has initiated the debate on converging or adopting a common set of International Accounting Standards and Auditing and Assurance Standards.

About 102 countries including members of European Union, Australia and New Zealand, China and Pakistan have adopted IFRS. IASB and FASB have entered into a memorandum of understanding to work for convergence of US GAAP and IFRS. India and Canada have prepared a roadmap to converge with IFRS by the year 2011.

These developments would call for expertise inIFR S; International AAS. Fortunately, the Indian Standards are formulated keeping the International Standards as the basis and therefore the differences to be synchronised are limited. Indian professionals, if they have command over IFRS, can look forward to global opportunities seeking their services.

International taxation:

Yet another potential area for professional development on account of the globalisation; ecommerce; cross-border investments and the consequent convergence will be the evolution of international taxation as a wider area of practice. Hitherto, the scope in this discipline is restricted to a section of professionals who are specialising in this field. Soon the scope will expand at par with domestic taxation practice. Expertise in DTAAs of specific countries could be an area of exclusive specialisation for a professional.

Transfer pricing area of practice is now confined to income-tax law. With the proposed replacement of service tax and VAT legislations by Goods and Services Tax (GST) legislation by 2010, the scope of transfer pricing may extend to the service sector area too. In India, where the contribution to the GDP by the service sector is more than 51%, the scope would be greater and at the same time calls for establishing supportive knowledge bank and data base to meet the expectations.

Management consultancy services:

In the olden days, the practice area of a Chartered Accountant was confined to core areas, such as auditing and accounting and later encompassed taxation field. It is difficult now to introspect whether the statutory work conferred exclusively on Chartered Accountants was a boon that provided recognition and a steady source of revenue or was a bane that prevented them to expand their horizon of operation as a business advisor. Nevertheless, the present scenario demands focussed attention of the practitioners in the field of ‘Management Consultancy Services’ that promises to keep them busy at least for the next few decades.

The wide range of services that flows in the consultancy field include services relating to project appraisal and funding by way of private equity or debt syndication or other ineans; Funding through IPO; International Finance and Currency Management; Valuation; Due Diligence; Merger and Acquisitions; Risk Assessment; Restructuring of Business; ERP Implementation; Internal Audit; System Audit; Knowledge Process Outsourcing (KPO); Investment Banking and Wealth Management. Knowledge in these areas would bring immense opportunities and there will be no dearth of work for those who possess the skill set in these areas.

The basic difference between statutory work and consultancy work is that in the case of the former, a client is compelled to engage a Chartered Accountant to prevent penal consequences for non-compliance, whereas in the case of the latter, the client approaches on his own volition for value addition. In the case of statutory work, the client perceives it to result in an expenditure, whereas in consultancy, the benefit accrues either in the form of increase in revenue or reduction in expenditure, thereby enhancing his willingness to pay adequate compensation for the services. Therefore, the ability of the professional to do proper billing of services commensurate with ‘the time and expertise utilised is far greater with reference to consultancy services than for statutory work.

Re-orientation:

The profession of Chartered Accountancy is facing many challenges in India in view of globalisation and unprecedented growth in the economy. These challenges demand re orientation in the approach and attitude of the profession. The emerging areas of opportunities and risks indicated above call for different skill sets, knowledge and delivery mechanism. Even with reference to statutory work such as statutory audit or tax audit, one is expected to be proficient in Accounting Standards, Auditing and Assurance Standards and in the relevant laws. But, there is one significant difference between the consultancy field and the traditional practice encompassing statutory audit and that is the competitive environment. A Chartered Accountant has to compete with multinational entities, corporate bodies and other professionals in the Management Consultancy field, whereas it is a monopoly situation so far as statutory work is concerned. Nevertheless, the profession needs to acquit creditably in both the fields in order to maintain its credibility in the eyes of the public in general and that of the Government and Regulators in particular. Thus, in order to effectively compete and to deliver qualitatively, the profession needs to address many challenges during the next decade from now and some of these challenges are highlighted hereinafter.

Acquisition of skill sets:

Knowledge in the new areas of consultancy work may be acquired by studying the relevant literature and accessing information through web. Attending workshops and training programmes focusing on specific topics would be useful. Participating in the execution of work by other professionals or mentor firms will help to provide the confidence required to handle assignments independently. Templates of reporting would serve as a model in the initial implementation of work. Mid-size firms can even afford to organise periodical in-house training programmes for partners and the senior staff. Individual empowerment by undergoing specialised post-qualification courses seems to be inevitable. Every professional who has the competence in the consultancy field should groom and train others to create teams within the organisation. Forums like ICAI and BCAS should empower the profession by organising appropriate training programmes, workshops and symposiums.

Positioning of divisions:

Indian firms should grow stronger to a level where they are in a position to create divisions demarcating audit and assurance division; tax and allied services division; and consultancy division. Even if there are three partners, each one should attempt to specialise, so as to head and lead one of these divisions and build working teams. In the emerging scenario, specialisation is the order of the day. A specialist in audit, another one in tax and yet another professional having proficiency in consultancy can come under one roof to constitute a strong firm and render multifarious services to the client. There were two proposals relevant to the growth of the firms that were pending viz., Limited Liability Partnership Bill and approval of regulations to allow multi-disciplinary partnership firms. While the first is still pending, the latter has come through recently.

Human resource development:

Attracting new talent in the profession to practice appears to be a Himalayan task. About 90% of the newly qualified Chartered Accountants prefer to go for employment and only the remaining few have the passion to join a practising firm and a very few among them end up setting up their own office. If we trace back the history, there has been a cyclic pattern among the newly qualified in switching over in their option between practice and employment. The span of each such cycle was a period of 5 to 7 years. However, the recent financial crisis in the US and Europe is expected to marginally spill over in Asia and may enhance the number of entrants into the profession.

Expansion by mergers and consolidation will be the order of the profession in the decade to follow. Although size per se is not quality, it helps to comprehend wider horizon of services to be rendered to the client and enables undertaking work of greater magnitude. Prior to mergers, networking arrangements may surface to provide the required under-standing and compatibility over a period of time.

Geographical spread:

Another challenge faced by Indian firms is that most of them are operating in one centre. Getting assignment of certain works would depend on the extent of geographical presence in more cities. Therefore, one would do well to identify professionals/firms in different geographical locations and develop an understanding for mutual reference and execution of works. Once the reliability and compatibility is established, then merger can be contemplated by converting the firm in the other location as a branch. By this approach, a small firm also can evolve itself into a bigger firm by developing branches in many centres. No doubt, this is easy to say but challenging to accomplish. But, if there is a sustained approach and zeal, nothing is impossible. Firms can also look for international affiliation. There are many associations at the global level which identify member firms in different countries so as to strengthen the ability to serve clientele across the globe by cross reference. The initial cost of becoming a member of any such association and annual membership fee may appear burdensome, but it should be viewed as an investment and not as expenditure. The return on investment is bound to take some time, but it should be worth the wait in the globalised scenario. Further, such an affiliation can be used for securing templates or database as may be helpful in handling new avenues of assignments.

Infrastructure:

Generally, infrastructure takes a back seat and it is a non-priority item for many firms. This mindset should drastically undergo a change. Every firm should aspire to have stability in the place of operation and allocate a percentage of earnings every year for acquiring modem gadgets and tools. Further, every firm should spend in installing and documenting systems, procedures and controls to secure and enhance operational efficiency. Knowledge database should be developed leading to industry-wise specialisation and also in select areas like transfer pricing. Every firm should also periodically address and review the investment planning for every partner in the firm. Such planning should include securing of housing and conveyance facility for the partner’s family.

Billing standards:

It can be said without fear of contradiction that many firms are unable to recruit youngsters for two reasons. One is inability to pay near to market salary and secondly, not being able to guarantee partnership and provide lucrative practice with variety of work exposure in view of the limited areas of operation. While the second one can be addressed by tackling the challenges identified above, the first one can be handled only by proper billing ofthe services rendered. Underbilling of services cripples the growth potential of a firm.

Service rendered, in many cases, is not properly identified and added on to the billing. Invariably, it is the practice of annual billing or common fee package for multifarious services that paves the way for underselling of the services. Many do not even consider the manhours spent as one of the imp or- desert peace. Prosperity is welcome, but not at the ‘tant ingredients for billing. Of course, in deserving cost of peace of mind. Contentment is a great virand exceptional cases, rendering services for a low ‘ tue to be given up. No one is poor if he is contented cost or free of charge may be justified, but that policy and the one who lacks it can never be considered or approach should not be extended to all clients. rich, irrespective of the wealth that he may possess. A professional who renders services backed by knowledge, values and competence always does the billing with absolute confidence unmindful of losing the client. He not only demands greater value for services, but also commands respect and credibility. In the long run, such a professional experiences that quality begets qualitative client, irrespective of the cost of services.

In order to facilitate proper billing, ICAI has prescribed norms for charging fees for various services rendered. These norms can be relied upon to convince and persuade the client to compensate for the services rendered. A firm should develop the practice of billing as per these norms and make the client to fall in line to recognise the value of services. While exploitation by excessive billing is to be condemned, underbilling is undesirable and to be desisted.

Quality  and values:

Most important challenge for a professional firm is to ensure quality in anything it does and to adhere to the ethical norms laid down for the profession. The first one can be ensured by building quality team in the organisation and the latter by imbibing values and appreciating that growth should not be at the cost of ethics. Adherence to values is a challenging task these days as many players around us in the system do not attach any significance to this aspect. The dividing line between profession and business is getting blurred, of late. Hope it does not vanish in the days to come. If it happens, it would be quite unfortunate and the onus is on us not to allow it to happen.

Aspiration to become rich in the shortest possible time can be the root cause for deviation from established principles and best practices. We read in history that Gautam Buddha deserted all the prosperity and left the palace in search of peace. On the contrary, many in today’s world seem to be joining the race in search of prosperity and in the process desert peace. Prosperity is welcome, but not at the cost of peace of mind. Contentment is a great virtue to be given up. No one is poor if he is contented and the one who lacks it can never be considered rich, irrespective of the wealth that he may possess.

Therefore, whatever is stated above urging against underbilling should not be misconstrued as an advice to exploit the client or to do excessive billing either. Fee-based approach in everything we do would be fatal in the long run, whereas value-based approach would bring reputation. Mahatma Gandhi said that there is enough for everyone’s need but not for the greed. The Father of the Nation also indicated that ‘ends’ do not justify the ‘means’. It might pay to be unethical in the short run, but in return one loses self-esteem and peace of mind, which is too precious a price one should dread to pay. When we charge the fee, let it be a consideration only for our services and not a price for compromising on values and principles. Quality in service without compromising on ethical values leads not only to prosperity in the long run, but undoubtedly helps us to command respect.

Conclusion:

There is tremendous scope for the profession to grow and expand. There is acute shortage of finance professionals which factor influences in the flow of more and more work to existing firms. Business entrepreneurs, these days, require professional firms to do the hand-holding in the establishment of their business as well as in the expansion and restructuring plans. They expect a professional to be part of the decision-making process, instead of merely providing inputs for decision making. If only the SMPs can address the above-discussed challenges with enthusiasm and right attitude, they can perform with competence and efficiency and make a mark in the profession. Not only they shall prosper, but they would also contribute to the economic growth of the nation. In matters of innovation and empowerment, let us swim with the current, but in matters of values and principles, let us stand like a rock. I wish BCAS to grow from strength to strength and continue to excel in serving the profession in the centuries to follow.

Gaps in GAAP – Multiple Element Contract

Accounting Standards

Recently the ICAI issued an Exposure Draft of Monograph on
‘Revenue Recognition for Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables’ inviting
comments. The author is pleased to respond to the Exposure Draft.


Overall, the author does not agree with the issuance of the
proposed Monograph for the following summary reasons :

    1. After having made a public announcement of convergence with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) effective April 1, 2011, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) or any of its committees should not take any action which may go against the spirit of the said announcement.

    2. As hereinafter discussed, certain requirements of the Monograph may not be in compliance with IFRS.



IAS 18 contains guidance with regard to multiple element
contracts, which provides that ‘Recognition criteria are usually applied
separately to each transaction. However, in certain circumstances, it is
necessary to apply the recognition criteria to the separately identifiable
components of a single transaction in order to reflect the substance of the
transaction. For example, when the selling price of a product includes an
identifiable amount for subsequent servicing, that amount is deferred and
recognised as revenue over the period during which the service is performed.’
International Financial Reporting Interpretations Committee (IFRIC), at its
November 2006 meeting, has considered that the multiple element issue was wide
and complicated, needing a full scope debate and amendment of IAS 18, rather
than an interpretation, and therefore decided not to take this item onto its
agenda. Therefore, issuance of the proposed Monograph in India is not
recommended since it may conflict with the outcome of the said project.

The Monograph is an adaptation of ‘EITF 00-21 : Revenue
Arrangements with Multiple Deliverables’
under US GAAP. Since US GAAP
follows rule-based approach as compared to principle-based approach under IFRS,
application of the Monograph based on US GAAP requirements will significantly
reduce scope of judgment by the preparers and limit flexibility available under
IFRS. In addition, some of these requirements may be contrary to IFRS. The
following are a few examples in this regard :


(i) As per the Monograph, if there is objective and reliable evidence of fair value, i.e., Specific Objective Evidence (SOE) for all units of accounting in an arrangement, the arrangement consideration should be allocated to the separate units of accounting based on their relative fair values (the relative fair value method). In cases, where there is objective reliable evidence for undelivered elements only, then the residual method is used to allocate the arrangement consideration.

This implies that if there is no objective evidence of fair value, for either delivered or undelivered element, then no revenue can be recognised until all elements are delivered. Take for instance, a company selling version V1 of a product, plus an entitlement to receive updated version V2, due to be released in the next one year. As there is no SOE of fair value of V2, since it has not been sold separately, as it has not yet been released, under the Monograph, sales cannot be recognised on despatch of V1.

Paragraph 13 of IAS 18 and paragraph 11 of the Appendix to IAS 18 provide guidance on the accounting treatment of multiple elements under IFRS. Paragraph 13 states that “in certain circumstances, it is necessary to apply the recognition criteria to the separately identifiable components of a single transaction in order to reflect the substance of the transaction”. As per paragraph 11 of the Appendix to IAS 18, “when the selling price includes an identifiable amount for subsequent servicing, that amount is deferred and recognised as revenue over the period during which the service is performed. The amount deferred is that which will cover the expected costs of the services under the agreement, together with a reasonable profit on those services”.

While IAS 18 does not provide any specific guidance on how that allocation should be determined, it does not require SOE of fair values; rather, cost of services plus reasonable profit may be an indicator of fair value. An entity may also estimate fair value based on a statistical approach or market practice. We believe that in cases where revenue recognition has been deferred under the Monograph due to a lack of SOE of fair value, it would be unreasonable to conclude that no fair value can be established under IFRS, just because SOE of fair value is not available.

(ii) As it is evident from (i) above, the Monograph gives precedence to the relative fair value method over the residual method; whereas there is no such preference under IFRS. As part of issuance of IFRIC 13, IFRIC has examined this issue and noted that IAS 18 does not specify which of these methods should be applied, or in what circumstances. The IFRIC decided that the interpretation should not be more prescriptive than IAS 18(refer Basis for Conclusions paragraph BC 14 to IFRIC 13). Under IFRS, therefore either method or other methods such as cost methods or management estimates would be acceptable.

(iii) The Monograph requires that under the residual method, the amount of consideration allocated to the delivered item(s) equals the total arrangement consideration less the aggregate fair value of the undelivered item(s). The residual method therefore has the effect of allocating all discounts to the delivered element, rather than apportioning the discount among all elements. For example, a company sells one product for INR 10 million with one year’s post-sale services (PSS) and a renewal rate of PSS has been fixed at INR 2 million (20%) at the end of the first year (giving a fair value of INR 2 million for the PSS element). Under the residual method, the company will be able to recognise INR 8 million when the licence is delivered (total contract price of 10 million less 2 million being fair value of the undelivered element).

Under IFRS,while the above may be an acceptable method of recognising revenue on delivered element; one could question the allocation of entire discount to the delivered element. Under IFRS one may allocate the discount to both the delivered and undelivered element, for example, in proportion of the fair value of the undelivered elements and of the residual amount determined for the delivered element. In the example above, this would have the consequence of allocating the discount both on the delivered licence element and on the undelivered PSS element, for example, 84% of it allocated to the delivered licence element and 16% allocated to the PSS. Thus, applying the residual method and then apportioning the discount among delivered and undelivered elements would result in recognition of INR 8.4 million of revenue on delivery of the product software, whereas the residual method alone would restrict the amount of revenue recognised upon delivery of the licence to INR 8 million.

For the above reasons, the author does not believe that the Research Committee should pursue this Monograph till the time further guidance is provided by the IASB. Any such action by the Committee may put a question mark over ICAI’s commitment to converge with IFRS.

Headers and Footers

Computer Interface

The aim of this article is to help the readers work
effectively by using automated tools built into the application software. This
article would be useful for beginners as well as intermediate level users.


Most of us have a tendency to underutilise the resources
built into the older versions also. Come to think of it, most of us use the PC
more like a typewriter thus leaving the computing power utterly untapped. I have
commented on this far too many times in this column and it is for this reason I
chose to write an article on a difficult aspect like headers and footers.

I’m often surprised to find that certain Word users are
completely unaware of the headers and footers feature in Word. In part, this is
because Word’s designers hid it. Word has a lot of tricks up its sleeve, and the
Insert menu is home to most of them. Some of the useful things that Word has to
offer can be found on the Insert menu: page numbers, date and time, AutoText,
fields, symbols, comments, footnotes and endnotes, cross-references, indexes and
tables, text boxes, pictures, frames, diagrams
. However, Header and Footer
is hidden on the View menu. Users who come straight from a typewriter to Word
don’t think of using headers and footers, because they’re used to manually
typing text at the beginning or end of a page. It may not occur to them that
there is a better way. But the header/footer feature in Word is one of its most
useful tools, one that users need to learn how to take advantage of.

Headers and footers in a document :

Headers and footers are areas in the top and bottom margins
(margin : The blank space outside the printing area on a page.) of each page in
a document.

You can insert text or graphics in headers and footers — for
example, page numbers, the date, a company logo, the document’s title or file
name, or the author’s name — that are printed at the top or bottom of each page
in a document.

The question one would ask is when should I use a header
or footer 
?

Headers and footers are used in the following instances :

l
Repeated text


Whenever you need to repeat text or graphics on a page.
Usually such text will be a ‘running head’ or ‘running foot’ at the top or
bottom of the page, but header and footer content is not confined to the top and
bottom; it can appear anywhere on the page — in the same place on every page
(but some content can be dynamic; for example, a page number can change on every
page).

l
Text that stays put


Whenever you need to put text at the beginning or at the end
of a document that will stay put and be out of the way.



Repeated text :

One of the most common elements of a header or footer is a
page number. You may already have figured out how to number pages using the
Insert | Page Numbers command. For simple documents, this feature actually
offers a great deal of power and flexibility : you can omit the page number on
the first page, you can choose where you want it to appear (top or bottom, left,
centre, or right — even inside or outside for facing pages), and you can choose
from a variety of number formats. You can choose to include a chapter number (see
picture 2
), and you can choose a starting page number. With care, you can
even use this feature in documents with more than one section. If you know what
you’re doing, you can edit the page field that Word inserts for you, to add text
such as “Page” before the number.

Usually, though, in anything but the simplest type of
document, page numbers inserted this way become difficult to use (especially if
you want to combine them with other text). Moreover, if you decide not to use
them, there is no way to “turn them off” from the Page Numbers dialog, and if
you remove them incompletely (failing to delete the frame the page number is
in), you can have puzzling problems down the line (see “Text at the top of the
page is unaccountably indented”). In any situation where you need more than a
simple page number (even something as simple as “Page 1 of n”), you should use a
header or footer (see picture 3). This includes book and chapter titles
(or the name of the author) in books, section titles in reports, logos and
letterheads in letters, watermarks, and so on.

Text that stays put :

The most common example of text that belongs in a header is a
letterhead. You want to put that at the beginning of a letter, and you want it
to be out of the way of other text you will add, so that it doesn’t get pushed
down the page. Usually you don’t want it repeated on every page, so you use a
special kind of header for it. Another example is the text you want to stay at
the end of a document, no matter how much text you add to the document. You can
put that in a footer. Again, you don’t want it repeated on every page, but there
is a way to achieve that too, as will be detailed below.

Creating a header or footer :

As mentioned above, even if you think your document doesn’t
yet have a header or footer, you have to use View | Header and Footer to create
one. This may seem illogical to you, but in fact, the header and footer already
exist; they’re just empty until you put something in them.

Unlike Word Perfect, where the header and footer are at the top and bottom margins, and you have to add space between them and the document text, Word reserves space for the header and footer outside the top and bottom margins (as shown in picture 1) They have their own distinct margins, which you set from the Margins tab of File I Page Setup in Word 2000 and earlier and on the Layout tab of Word 2002 and above. In order to insert headers and footers click on Header and Footer on the View menu.

Once you have created a header or footer, you can open it for editing in Print Layout view by double-clicking on the existing content. To open it the first time, however (or to access it from Normal view), you must select View I Header and Footer. When you do this, Word opens the header pane and displays the Header and Footer toolbar (see picture 4). This toolbar offers a number of useful buttons that will be discussed throughout this article. The first one you should find is the Switch Between Header and Footer button. If you are trying to create a footer rather than a header, this is what you need to get to the footer pane.

(The concluding portion of this write up will be published in the next issue of the BCAJ)

Headers and Footers — Part 2

Deposits made in post office monthly income account which was opened contrary to Rules — Depositor entitled to interest accrued on deposits. Govt. Saving Bank Act, 1879 S. 15.

New Page 1

9 Deposits made in post office monthly income
account which was opened contrary to Rules — Depositor entitled to interest
accrued on deposits. Govt. Saving Bank Act, 1879 S. 15.


The petitioner’s husband made deposits in multiple accounts
in post office monthly income scheme by opening 12 accounts. Subsequently the
accounts were converted into joint accounts. None of the post office staff
informed the petitioner that one should not invest beyond a certain amount in
joint a/c. In fact agents of post office persuaded the petitioner and her
husband to invest the amounts. When the petitioner asked for payment of the
amounts on maturity of the deposits the respondent deducted the interest amount
over and above the limit provided under the Post Office Monthly Scheme Rules.

The Court observed that it is an undisputed fact that the
petitioner has deposited different amounts into various accounts and none of
those accounts has exceeded the prescribed deposit limit. The first respondent
noticed that all the accounts were opened in the name of a single depositor in
various post offices and the amount put together exceeded the maximum amount
prescribed under the rules. Though the rules prescribed that more than two
accounts shall not be opened by any person, it was a mistake on the part of the
post master also in allowing the petitioner to open more accounts contrary to
the rules.

The petitioner contended that the agents who get com-mission
also made the petitioner and her husband to believe that there will not be any
problem if they open more accounts and they will also get interest on all the
accounts without any objection. Had there been any objection at the time of
opening of accounts or obtaining a declaration from the depositor that the
depositor did not open more than two accounts in any post office, that would
have made the petitioner and her husband to bind themselves that they have
knowledge about the rule that they should not open more accounts than two. There
was a mistake on the part of the post master also in allowing the petitioner to
open more accounts in the name of the petitioner and her husband. Therefore, as
the deposits were not made intentionally after knowing the rules, the petitioner
cannot be deprived of the interest accrued thereon.

The petitioner is entitled for interest on the entire amount
kept in the various post offices.

[ Smt. K. Susheela v. Ministry of Communications Dept.
of Post & Ors.,
AIR 2008 Andhra Pradesh 179.]

 


levitra